Mitsubishi VS-6041 User`s manual

FX3U-CAN
USER'S MANUAL
Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)
Before installation, operation, maintenance or inspection of this product, thoroughly read through and
understand this manual and all of the associated manuals. Also, take care to handle the module properly and
safely.
This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories:
and
.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe
injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight
personal injury or physical damage.
Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by
may also cause severe injury.
It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety.
Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary. Always forward it
to the end user.
1. DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
Reference
•
•
•
Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during
external power supply problems or PLC failure.
Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents.
1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for
opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the
equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all
outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output
control block, output control may be disabled.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
For the operating status of each node in the case of a communication error, see the FX3U-CAN user’s manual and
the product manual of each node.
Erroneous output or malfunctions may cause an accident.
When executing control (data changes) to an operating PLC, construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program
so that the entire system operates safely. In addition, when executing control such as program changes and
operation status changes (status control) to an operating PLC, carefully read the manual and sufficiently confirm
safety in advance. Especially in control from external equipment to a PLC in a remote place, problems in the PLC
may not be able to be handled promptly due to abnormality in data transfer. Construct an interlock circuit in the
sequence program. At the same time, determine the actions in the system between the external equipment and the
PLC for protection against abnormalities in data transfer.
23
Reference
•
Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due
to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to the manual of the PLC main unit).
(1)
23
Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)
2. INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Reference
•
Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
25
Reference
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in PLC main unit manual (Hardware
Edition).
Never use the product in areas with excessive dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt air, Cl2, H2S,
SO2 or NO2), flammable gas,
vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature, condensation, or rain and wind.
If the product is used in such conditions, electric shock, fire, malfunctions, deterioration or damage may occur.
Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly.
Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions.
When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC's ventilation port when installation work is completed.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
Install the product on a flat surface.
If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the PC board, thereby causing nonconformities.
Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws.
Connect extension cables securely to their designated connectors.
Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
25
3. WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Reference
•
Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
28
Reference
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) to the shield of the twisted shield cable (refer to
Subsection 4.2.3).
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to communication connectors or communication cables.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.
Make sure to affix the CAN bus connector with fixing screws.
Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (CAN bus connector) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due
to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100 mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
Place the communication cable in grounded metallic ducts or conduits both inside and outside of the control panel
whenever possible.
(2)
28
Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)
4. STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Reference
•
•
•
Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and
the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.
192
194
198
215
Reference
•
•
•
•
Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
Do not drop the product or exert strong impact to it.
Doing so may cause damage.
Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards, and special adapters
- Input/output extension units/blocks, FX Series terminal blocks and special function units/blocks
- Battery and memory cassette
194
198
215
5. DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS
Reference
•
Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of
your device.
23
6. TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS
Reference
•
The PLC is a precision instrument. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general
specifications of the PLC main unit manual.
Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC. After transportation, verify the operations of the PLC.
(3)
23
Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)
MEMO
(4)
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
FX3U-CAN
User's Manual
Manual number
JY997D43301
Manual revision
B
Date
12/2013
Foreword
This manual describes the FX3U-CAN Communication Block and should be read and understood before
attempting to install or operate the hardware.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi
Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of
using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2012 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
1
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Outline Precautions
• This manual provides information for the use of the FX3U-CAN Communication block. The manual has
been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of such a person or persons is
as follows;
1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment
using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to
the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of all
aspects of safety with aspects regarding to automated equipment.
2) Any commissioning or maintenance engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to
the local and national standards required to fulfill the job. These engineers should also be trained in the
use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being familiar with all associated
manuals and documentation for the product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with
established safety practices.
3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and
coordinated manner in compliance with established safety practices. The operators should also be
familiar with documentation that is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment.
Note: the term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device that contains or uses the
product associated with this manual.
• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been
designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine
or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product
where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe
functions into the system.
• When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standards and codes of regulation to
which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product with the system,
machines, and apparatuses to be used.
• If there is doubt at any stage during installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical
engineer who is qualified and trained in the local and national standards. If there is doubt about the
operation or use, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
• Since the examples within this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as reference; please use it
after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will not accept
responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• The content, specification etc. of this manual may be changed for improvement without notice.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you
notice any doubtful point, error, etc., please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Registration
• CiA® and CANopen® are registered Community Trademarks of CAN in Automation e.V.
• The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of each company.
2
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. (1)
Standards................................................................................................................................... 8
Certification of UL, cUL standards ....................................................................................................... 8
Compliance with EC directive (CE Marking) ........................................................................................ 8
Associated Manuals................................................................................................................ 10
Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in the Manual ...................................................... 12
Reading the Manual ................................................................................................................ 14
1. Introduction
15
1.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................... 15
1.1.1 Overview of the CANopen® Network............................................................................................. 15
1.1.2 Overview of FX3U-CAN communication block .............................................................................. 16
1.1.3 Characteristics............................................................................................................................... 16
1.2 External Dimensions and Each Part Name................................................................................... 18
1.2.1 External dimensions and each part name ..................................................................................... 18
1.2.2 Power and status LEDs ................................................................................................................. 19
1.2.3 Terminal layout .............................................................................................................................. 19
1.3 System Configuration.................................................................................................................... 20
1.3.1 General configuration .................................................................................................................... 20
1.3.2 Applicable PLC .............................................................................................................................. 21
1.3.3 Connection with PLC ..................................................................................................................... 21
1.4 System Start-up Procedure........................................................................................................... 22
2. Specifications
23
2.1 General Specifications .................................................................................................................. 24
2.2 Power Supply Specifications......................................................................................................... 24
2.3 Performance Specifications .......................................................................................................... 24
3. Installation
25
3.1 Connection with PLC..................................................................................................................... 25
3.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.1 DIN rail mounting........................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.2 Direct Mounting ............................................................................................................................. 27
4. Wiring
28
4.1 Applicable Cable and Connector................................................................................................... 28
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
Applicable connector ..................................................................................................................... 28
Applicable cable ............................................................................................................................ 29
Termination of cable end ............................................................................................................... 29
Removal and installation of CAN bus connector ........................................................................... 29
4.2 CAN-Bus Wiring ............................................................................................................................ 30
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
Connecting communication cables................................................................................................ 30
Module wiring ................................................................................................................................ 30
Grounding of twisted pair cable ..................................................................................................... 31
Termination.................................................................................................................................... 31
4.3 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................... 31
3
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5. Introduction of Functions
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Table of Contents
32
Functions List ................................................................................................................................ 32
Function Modes............................................................................................................................. 32
Object Dictionary........................................................................................................................... 33
Command Interface....................................................................................................................... 33
Data Type Definition Area ............................................................................................................. 34
Communication Profile Area ......................................................................................................... 34
5.6.1 CAN-ID / COB-ID........................................................................................................................... 54
5.6.2 Error Register ............................................................................................................................... 55
5.6.3 Pre-defined error field.................................................................................................................... 55
5.6.4 SDO............................................................................................................................................... 55
5.6.5 RPDO / TPDO ............................................................................................................................... 56
5.6.6 MPDO............................................................................................................................................ 63
5.6.7 SYNC............................................................................................................................................. 64
5.6.8 Node guarding ............................................................................................................................... 65
5.6.9 Heartbeat....................................................................................................................................... 66
5.6.10 TIME ............................................................................................................................................ 67
5.6.11 Store parameters......................................................................................................................... 67
5.6.12 Restore default parameters ......................................................................................................... 68
5.6.13 EMCY .......................................................................................................................................... 68
5.7 Error Behaviour ............................................................................................................................. 70
5.8 Network Management ................................................................................................................... 71
5.8.1 CANopen® Boot-Up Procedure and NMT states........................................................................... 71
5.8.2 Protocol Boot-Up ........................................................................................................................... 72
5.8.3 Protocol NMT (Node control)......................................................................................................... 72
5.8.4 NMT slave identification ................................................................................................................ 73
5.8.5 NMT master startup....................................................................................................................... 73
5.8.6 NMT slave startup ......................................................................................................................... 77
5.8.7 NMT slave assignment .................................................................................................................. 79
5.8.8 NMT Bootup / Error Event handling............................................................................................... 81
5.8.9 Request NMT ................................................................................................................................ 82
5.8.10 Request node guarding ............................................................................................................... 83
5.8.11 Flying Master ............................................................................................................................... 83
5.8.12 LSS.............................................................................................................................................. 86
5.8.13 Configuration manager ................................................................................................................ 86
5.9 Device Profile CiA® 405 V2.0 for IEC 61131-3 Programmable Devices....................................... 88
5.10 Application Profile CiA® 417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems......................................................... 90
5.10.1 Lift number................................................................................................................................... 93
5.10.2 Virtual input mapping................................................................................................................... 94
5.10.3 Virtual output mapping................................................................................................................. 96
5.10.4 Door control word ........................................................................................................................ 99
5.10.5 Door status word ....................................................................................................................... 100
5.10.6 Light barrier status..................................................................................................................... 102
5.10.7 Control word .............................................................................................................................. 102
5.10.8 Status word................................................................................................................................ 104
5.10.9 Modes of operation.................................................................................................................... 105
5.10.10 Modes of operation display...................................................................................................... 105
5.10.11 Target position......................................................................................................................... 105
5.10.12 Load value ............................................................................................................................... 105
5.10.13 Load signalling......................................................................................................................... 105
6. Allocation of Buffer Memories
106
6.1 Buffer Memories (BFM) Lists ...................................................................................................... 106
6.2 How to Read/Write from/to Buffer Memory ................................................................................. 109
6.2.1 Direct specification of buffer memory (FX3U/FX3UC only) .......................................................... 109
6.2.2 FROM/TO instructions................................................................................................................. 109
6.3 Receive/Transmit Process Data.................................................................................................. 110
4
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Table of Contents
6.4 [BFM #20] Data Exchange Control ............................................................................................. 110
6.5 [BFM #21] Function Mode........................................................................................................... 111
6.6 [BFM #22] Save/Restore Configuration ...................................................................................... 112
6.7 [BFM #24] Baud Rate.................................................................................................................. 113
6.8 [BFM #25] Communication Status .............................................................................................. 113
6.9 [BFM #26] FROM/TO Watchdog................................................................................................. 115
6.10 [BFM #27] Node Address.......................................................................................................... 115
6.11 [BFM #29] Error Status ............................................................................................................. 115
6.12 [BFM #30] Module ID Code....................................................................................................... 115
6.13 [BFM #35] CAN Transmission Error Counter............................................................................ 116
6.14 [BFM #36] CAN Reception Error Counter ................................................................................. 116
6.15 [BFM #37] Baud Rate Display................................................................................................... 116
6.16 [BFM #38] Sampling Point Display............................................................................................ 116
6.17 [BFM #39] BFM Setting Error Display ....................................................................................... 116
6.18 [BFM #40] BFM Initialisation/Online Mode Write Error Display................................................. 116
6.19 [BFM #50 to #59] Time Stamp .................................................................................................. 117
6.20 [BFM #70] NMT Start all Nodes delay....................................................................................... 118
6.21 [BFM #71] SDO Time out.......................................................................................................... 118
6.22 [BFM #601 to #727] NMT State ................................................................................................ 119
6.23 [BFM #750 to #859] Emergency Message Buffer ..................................................................... 120
6.24 [BFM #900 to #963] NMT Error Control Status ......................................................................... 122
7. CANopen® 405 Mode
123
7.1 Data Transfer Location for CANopen® 405 Mode....................................................................... 123
7.1.1 Direct TO BFM Access to the CANopen® 405 Object................................................................. 123
7.1.2 Direct FROM BFM access to the CANopen® 405 Object............................................................ 125
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode ............................................... 127
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
TPDO mapping table ................................................................................................................... 128
RPDO mapping table................................................................................................................... 131
Mode 0 mapping.......................................................................................................................... 134
Mode A mapping ......................................................................................................................... 134
Mode B COB-ID mapping............................................................................................................ 135
Mode B COB-ID Mapping Errors ................................................................................................. 139
8. CANopen® 417 Mode
140
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application ..................................................................................... 140
8.2 Lift Number.................................................................................................................................. 151
8.3 Virtual Input/Output Mapping ...................................................................................................... 151
8.3.1 Virtual input mapping................................................................................................................... 151
8.3.2 Virtual output mapping................................................................................................................. 154
8.4 Door Control Word/Door Status Word......................................................................................... 158
8.4.1 Door control word ........................................................................................................................ 158
8.4.2 Door status word ......................................................................................................................... 159
8.5 Door Position............................................................................................................................... 160
8.6 Light Barrier Status ..................................................................................................................... 160
8.7 Position Value ............................................................................................................................. 160
8.8 Speed Value Car......................................................................................................................... 161
8.9 Acceleration Value Car ............................................................................................................... 161
8.10 Control Word/Status Word ........................................................................................................ 161
8.10.1 Control word .............................................................................................................................. 161
8.10.2 Status word................................................................................................................................ 163
8.11 Modes of operation/Modes of operation display ....................................................................... 164
8.11.1 Modes of operation.................................................................................................................... 164
8.11.2 Modes of operation display........................................................................................................ 164
5
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Table of Contents
8.12 Control Effort ............................................................................................................................. 164
8.13 Position Actual Value/Target Position ....................................................................................... 164
8.13.1 Position actual value.................................................................................................................. 164
8.13.2 Target position........................................................................................................................... 165
8.14 Profile Velocity .......................................................................................................................... 165
8.15 Velocity Actual Value/Target Velocity ....................................................................................... 165
8.15.1 Target velocity ........................................................................................................................... 165
8.15.2 Velocity actual value.................................................................................................................. 165
8.16 Load Value ................................................................................................................................ 165
8.17 Load Signalling.......................................................................................................................... 165
9. CAN Layer 2 Mode
166
9.1 Receive/Transmit Process Data.................................................................................................. 166
9.2 Layer 2 Message Specific Error Code List.................................................................................. 169
9.3 Pre-defined Layer 2 Message Configuration............................................................................... 169
9.3.1 Pre-defined Layer 2 transmit messages...................................................................................... 170
9.3.2 Pre-defined Layer 2 receive messages ....................................................................................... 172
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Layer 2 RTR Flags ...................................................................................................................... 174
Message Transmit Trigger Flags ................................................................................................ 175
PLC RUN>STOP And Power Down Messages .......................................................................... 175
CIF Sending Layer 2 Message.................................................................................................... 177
10. Command Interface
178
10.1 [BFM #1000 to #1066] Command Interface .............................................................................. 178
10.2 SDO Request ............................................................................................................................ 179
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.2.4
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
CIF SDO read access................................................................................................................ 179
CIF Multi SDO read access ....................................................................................................... 180
CIF SDO write access ............................................................................................................... 181
CIF Multi SDO write access....................................................................................................... 182
Set Heartbeat ............................................................................................................................ 183
Set Node Guarding / NMT Slave Assignment........................................................................... 184
Send an Emergency Message .................................................................................................. 185
Store Object Dictionary Settings ............................................................................................... 187
Restore Object Dictionary Default Settings............................................................................... 188
Display Current Parameter........................................................................................................ 188
Error Messages......................................................................................................................... 189
10.9.1 Error messages ......................................................................................................................... 189
10.9.2 CIF busy message..................................................................................................................... 191
11. PLC RUN/STOP
192
12. Communication Settings Procedure
194
12.1 CANopen® 405 Mode ............................................................................................................... 195
12.2 CANopen® 417 Mode ............................................................................................................... 196
12.3 11 bit / 29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode ......................................................................................... 197
6
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13. Program Example
Table of Contents
198
13.1 System Configuration................................................................................................................ 198
13.2 Local Label Setting.................................................................................................................... 199
13.3 Program .................................................................................................................................... 202
14. Diagnostics
215
14.1 Preliminary Checks ................................................................................................................... 215
14.2 Detail Error Check..................................................................................................................... 217
Warranty................................................................................................................................. 219
Revised History ..................................................................................................................... 220
7
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Standards
Standards
Certification of UL, cUL standards
FX3U-CAN units comply with the UL standards (UL, cUL).
UL, cUL File number :E95239
Regarding the standards that comply with the main unit, please refer to either the FX series product catalog or
consult with your nearest Mitsubishi product provider.
Compliance with EC directive (CE Marking)
This document does not guarantee that a mechanical system including this product will comply with the
following standards.
Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive for the entire mechanical module should be checked by the
user / manufacturer. For more information please consult with your nearest Mitsubishi product provider.
Regarding the standards that comply with the main unit, please refer to either the FX series product catalog or
consult with your nearest Mitsubishi product provider.
Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive
The following products have shown compliance through direct testing (of the identified standards below) and
design analysis (through the creation of a technical construction file) to the European Directive for
Electromagnetic Compatibility (2004/108/EC) when used as directed by the appropriate documentation.
Attention
• This product is designed for use in industrial applications.
Note
• Manufactured by:
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
2-7-3 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-8310 Japan
• Manufactured at:
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Himeji Works
840 Chiyoda-machi, Himeji, Hyogo, 670-8677 Japan
• Authorized Representative in the European Community:
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.
Gothaer Str. 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany
Type:
Programmable Controller (Open Type Equipment)
Models:
MELSEC FX3U series manufactured
from April 1st, 2012
FX3U-CAN
Standard
EN61131-2:2007
Programmable controllers
- Equipment requirements and tests
8
Remark
Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.
EMI
• Radiated Emission
• Conducted Emission
EMS
• Radiated electromagnetic field
• Fast transient burst
• Electrostatic discharge
• High-energy surge
• Voltage drops and interruptions
• Conducted RF
• Power frequency magnetic field
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Standards
Caution for Compliance with EC Directive
1) Caution for wiring
For noise prevention, please ground at least 35 mm (1.38") of the twisted-pair cable along the grounding
plate to which the ground terminal is connected.
For details regarding wiring, refer to Section 4.2
2) Installation in Enclosure
*1.
For details regarding installation in an enclosure of FX3G Series PLC,
refer to FX3G User's Manual - Hardware Edition
For details regarding installation in an enclosure of FX3GC*1 Series PLC,
refer to FX3GC User's Manual - Hardware Edition
For details regarding installation in an enclosure of FX3U Series PLC,
refer to FX3U User's Manual - Hardware Edition
For details regarding installation in an enclosure of FX3UC*1 Series PLC,
refer to FX3UC User's Manual - Hardware Edition
An FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is necessary to connect the FX3U-CAN to an FX3GC/FX3UC
Series PLC.
9
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Associated Manuals
Associated Manuals
Only the installation manual is packed together with the FX3U-CAN Communication Block.
For a detailed explanation of the FX3U-CAN, refer to this manual.
For further information of the hardware information and instructions on the PLC main unit, refer to the
respective manuals.
Refer to these manuals
Refer to the appropriate equipment manual
For a detailed explanation, refer to an additional manual
Title of manual
Document
number
Description
Model code
Manual for the Main Unit
FX3G Series PLCs Main Unit
Supplied
Manual
FX3G Series
Hardware Manual
Describes FX3G Series PLC specification for I/O, wiring
and installation extracted from the FX3G User's Manual
JY997D46001 - Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to FX3G Series User's Manual Hardware Edition.
Additional
Manual
FX3G Series
User's Manual
- Hardware Edition
JY997D31301
Describes FX3G Series PLC specification details for I/O,
wiring, installation and maintenance.
-
09R521
FX3GC Series PLCs Main Unit
Supplied
Manual
FX3GC Series
Hardware Manual
Describes FX3GC Series PLC specification for I/O,
wiring and installation extracted from the FX3G User's
JY997D45201 Manual - Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to FX3GC Series User's Manual Hardware Edition.
Additional
Manual
FX3GC Series
User's Manual
- Hardware Edition
JY997D45401
Describes FX3GC Series PLC specification details for I/
O, wiring, installation and maintenance.
-
09R533
FX3U Series PLCs Main Unit
Supplied
Manual
FX3U Series
Hardware Manual
Describes FX3U Series PLC specification for I/O, wiring
and installation extracted from the FX3U User's Manual JY997D50301 Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to FX3U Series User's Manual Hardware Edition.
Additional
Manual
FX3U Series
User's Manual
- Hardware Edition
JY997D16501
Describes FX3U Series PLC specification details for I/O,
wiring, installation and maintenance.
-
09R516
FX3UC Series PLCs Main Unit
10
Supplied
Manual
FX3UC(D,DS,DSS) Series
Hardware Manual
Describes FX3UC(D,DS,DSS) Series PLC specification
for I/O, wiring and installation extracted from the FX3UC
JY997D50501 Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to FX3UC Series User's Manual Hardware Edition.
Supplied
Manual
FX3UC-32MT-LT-2
Hardware Manual
Describes FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 specification for I/O,
wiring and installation extracted from the FX3UC User's
JY997D31601 Manual - Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to FX3UC Series User's Manual Hardware Edition.
-
Supplied
Manual
FX3UC-32MT-LT
Hardware Manual
(Only Japanese document)
Describes FX3UC-32MT-LT specification for I/O, wiring
and installation extracted from the FX3UC User's
JY997D12701 Manual - Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to FX3UC Series User's Manual Hardware Edition.
-
Additional
Manual
FX3UC Series
User's Manual
- Hardware Edition
JY997D28701
Describes FX3UC Series PLC specification details
for I/O, wiring, installation and maintenance.
-
09R519
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Title of manual
Associated Manuals
Document
number
Description
Model code
Programming
Additional
Manual
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/
FX3UC Series
Programming Manual
- Basic & Applied
Instruction Edition
Additional
Manual
MELSEC-Q/L/F
Structured
Programming
Manual (Fundamentals)
Additional
Manual
FX CPU Structured
Programming Manual
[Device & Common]
Describes FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series
JY997D16601 PLC programming for basic/applied instructions and
devices.
09R517
SH-080782
Programming methods, specifications, functions, etc.
required to create structured programs.
13JW06
JY997D26001
Devices, parameters, etc. provided in structured
projects of GX Works2.
09R925
Additional
Manual
FX CPU Structured
Sequence instructions provided in structured projects of
Programming Manual
JY997D34701
GX Works2.
[Basic & Applied Instruction]
09R926
Additional
Manual
FX CPU Structured
Programming Manual
[Application Functions]
JY997D34801
Application functions provided in structured projects of
GX Works2.
09R927
Manuals for FX3U-CAN Communication Block
Supplied
Manual
FX3U-CAN
Installation Manual
JY997D43201
Describes some of FX3U-CAN communication block
specifications for installation and wiring extracted from
the FX3U-CAN User's Manual.
For details, refer to FX3U-CAN User's Manual.
-
Additional
Manual
FX3U-CAN
User's Manual
(This Manual)
JY997D43301
Describes details of the FX3U-CAN communication
block.
-
11
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in the Manual
Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in the Manual
Generic name or abbreviation
Description
PLC
FX3G series
FX3G PLC or main unit
FX3GC series
FX3GC PLC or main unit
FX3U series
FX3U PLC or main unit
FX3UC series
FX3UC PLC or main unit
Generic name for FX3G Series PLC
Generic name for FX3G Series PLC main unit
Generic name for FX3GC Series PLC
Generic name for FX3GC Series PLC main unit
Generic name for FX3U Series PLC
Generic name for FX3U Series PLC main unit
Generic name for FX3UC Series PLC
Generic name for FX3UC Series PLC main unit
Expansion board
Generic name for expansion board
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the main
unit to be used for your system.
Special adapter
Generic name for high-speed input/output special adapter, communication special adapter, analog
special adapter, and CF card special adapter.
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the main
unit to be used for your system.
I/O extension unit/block
Generic name for input/output powered extension unit and input/output extension block
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the main
unit to be used for your system.
Special function unit/block or
Special extension unit
Generic name for special function unit and special function block
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the main
unit to be used for your system.
Special function unit
Generic name for special function unit
Special function block
Generic name for special function block
FX3U-CAN
Abbreviated name for FX3U-CAN
Memory cassette
Generic name for memory cassette.
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the main
unit to be used for your system.
FX Series terminal block
Generic name for FX Series terminal block.
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the main
unit to be used for your system.
Peripheral unit
Peripheral unit
Generic name for programming software, handy programming panel, and indicator
Programming tool
Programming tool
Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel
Programming software
Generic name for programming software
GX Works2
Abbreviation of programming software packages SWDNC-GXW2-J/SWDNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
Abbreviation of programming software packages SWD5C-GPPW-J/SWD5C-GPPW-E
Handy programming panel (HPP)
Generic name for FX-30P and FX-20P(-E)
Indicator
GOT1000 series
Generic name for GT15, GT11 and GT10
GOT-900 series
Generic name for GOT-A900 series and GOT-F900 series
GOT-A900 series
Generic name for GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series
Generic name for GOT-F900 series
ET-940 series
Generic name for ET-940 series
Manual
12
FX3G Hardware Edition
Abbreviation of FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3GC Hardware Edition
Abbreviation of FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in the Manual
Generic name or abbreviation
Description
FX3U Hardware Edition
Abbreviation of FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3UC Hardware Edition
Abbreviation of FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition
Programming manual
Abbreviation of FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic and Applied
Instruction Edition
Communication control Edition
Abbreviation of FX Series User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Analog control Edition
Abbreviation of FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition
Positioning control Edition
Abbreviation of FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
CANopen®
communication term
U8, U16, U32, U48
Unsigned Integer x Bit
I8, I16, I32
Signed Integer x Bit
Visible String
String of ISO646 bit coded characters which end after the last character.
Domain
Large block of binary data.
CAN
Controller Area Network
CANopen®
CAN based higher-layer protocol
CAN-ID
CAN Identifier
Identifier for CAN data and remote frames as defined in ISO11898-1
CAN in Automation
CiA®
Non-profit organization for standardization of CAN protocols. The CiA® Members develop
specifications which are published as CiA® specifications. (http://can-cia.org/)
COB-ID
Communication object identifier
Identifier that contains the CAN-ID and additional control bits.
RPDO
Receive Process Data Objects are data received from other nodes via the CAN bus.
TPDO
Transmit Process Data Objects are data sent to other nodes via the CAN bus.
MPDO
Multiplexed Process Data Object
SDO
Service Data Object
SYNC
Synchronization object
EMCY
Emergency object
NMT
Network management
LSS
Layer Setting Services
OSC
Open Style Connector
RTR
Remote transmission request
VD
Virtual Device
13
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Reading the Manual
Reading the Manual
Shows the manual title.
This area shows the
manual title for the current
page.
Shows the title of the chapter and the title
Indexes the chapter number.
of the section.
The right side of each page
indexes the chapter number
for the page currently opened.
This area shows the title of the chapter and the
title of the section for the current page.
Shows the reference.
The " " mark indicates
a reference destination
and reference manual.
The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
14
1 Introduction
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1.1 Outline
1
Introduction
2
Outline
The FX3U-CAN communication block is an interface block that allows FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs
to connect to a CANopen® system. FX3U-CAN can be connected directly to the FX3G/FX3GC*1/FX3U/FX3UC*1
series PLC's extension port, or to any other extension unit / block's right side extension port.
*1.
For safe use
•
•
1.1.1
4
Wiring
•
This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been designed or manufactured to
be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine or passenger movement
vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product where major accidents or losses
could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system.
3
Installation
An FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is necessary to connect the FX3U-CAN to an FX3GC/FX3UC
Series PLC.
Specifications
1.1
Introduction
1.
5
Overview of the CANopen® Network
1) Simple, relatively high speed communication can be accomplished with modules that handle binary data
such as I/Os or numeric data.
3) Messages can be prioritized for transfer to the CAN Bus.
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
2) All CANopen® nodes are able to transmit data and several nodes can make a request to the CAN bus
simultaneously.
Introduction of
Functions
CANopen® is a CAN based higher layer protocol which provides a very flexible system for transferring serial
messages between different nodes via the CAN bus.
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
15
1 Introduction
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1.1.2
1.1 Outline
Overview of FX3U-CAN communication block
CANopen® ready I/O stations and device stations can be connected to the CAN bus and information can be
transmitted to the FX3U-CAN communication block and FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
1. The maximum send / receive message number
80 TPDO /80 RPDO (8 bytes / PDO) can be sent and received to/from a CANopen® network.
2. CANopen® device/application Profiles according to CiA® Standards
• Interface and Device Profile CiA® 405 V2.0 for IEC 61131-3 Programmable Devices.
• Application Profile CiA® 417 V2.1 for lift control systems.
3. Communication with other CANopen® nodes
All nodes on the CANopen® network can write data to all the other nodes on the network. Each piece of data
has a unique identifying number that is read by the receiving nodes to determine whether that data should be
kept in the receiving nodes' Buffer Memory.
The FX3U-CAN communication block uses buffer memories to communicate on the CAN bus. Each buffer
memory is separated into memory dedicated to write TO and memory dedicated to read FROM the CAN bus.
These Buffer Memories are accessed by FROM/TO commands of the PLC. However, only FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC supports direct specification of the buffer memory.
For further information on applied instructions, bit specification of word devices and direct specification of
buffer memory, refer to the following manual.
Refer to PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Note
Buffer memory that is assigned in 32 bits must use 32-bit instructions to read/write.
32-bit data cannot be correctly read/written from/to buffer memory if 16-bit read/write instructions are used.
1.1.3
Characteristics
This section describes the characteristics of the CAN bus, communication with other CANopen® nodes, and
some of the special features available in the CANopen® protocol.
1. The object dictionary
The Object Dictionary is a type of indexed storage system that contains data, device parameters, CANopen®
feature setup data, instruction triggers, and other information necessary to configure and operate the
CANopen® protocol.
2. SDO command
The Service Data Object Command can be used to read/write data to the Object Dictionary.
This command can be used to set network parameters and also to initiate CANopen® functionality.
3. SYNC service
The SYNC service provides the basic network synchronization mechanism.
4. TIME service
The TIME service provides a simple network clock. CANopen® devices that operate a local clock may use the
TIME object to adjust their own time base to that of the time stamp object producer.
5. EMCY object service
Emergency objects are triggered by the occurrence of a CANopen® device internal error situation and are
transmitted from an emergency producer on the CANopen® device.
16
1 Introduction
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1.1 Outline
1
Introduction
6. Network management (hereinafter called NMT)
• General NMT services
• Node guarding Master/Slave
• Heartbeat Consumer/Producer
2
The Command Interface (CIF) can be used to access the Object Dictionary of the local node or a network
node and is located in the BFM. Access is performed by commands for SDO read/write, special direct
command for Node Guarding, Heartbeat, PDO Mapping or Emergency Messages.
8. NMT master
3
Installation
The network management provides services for controlling the network behaviour of CANopen® devices as
defined in CiA® 301 and CiA® 302. All CANopen® devices of a network referred to as NMT slaves are
controlled by services provided by an NMT master.
Specifications
7. The command interface
9. Flying master
The flying master mechanism provides services for a hot stand-by NMT master within a CANopen® network.
The Configuration manager provides mechanisms for configuration of CANopen® devices in a CANopen®
network.
4
Wiring
10.Configuration manager
11.SYNC producer
12.Layer setting services master (hereinafter called LSS) according to standard CiA® 305 V2.2
With this service, an LSS slave device that is sealed against harsh environments and that does not have any
hardware components like DIP-switches for setting the node-ID or bit timing parameters can be configured
via the CAN Bus.
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
13.MPDO for Lift Application Profile
5
Introduction of
Functions
The SYNC producer broadcasts the SYNC object. The SYNC service provides the basic network
synchronization mechanism.
An MPDO provides direct write access to objects of a CANopen device's object dictionary.
The size of the data of these objects is limited to a maximum of 4 bytes.
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
17
1 Introduction
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1.2 External Dimensions and Each Part Name
1.2
External Dimensions and Each Part Name
1.2.1
External dimensions and each part name
90 (3.55")
80 (3.15")
(mounting hole pitch)
[2] [3]
Unit : mm (inches)
[4]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[8]
4 (0.16")
43 (1.7")
2-
18
87 (3.43")
8
(0.32")
4.5 mounting holes
9 (0.36")
Mass (Weight): 0.2 kg (0.44 lbs)
Accessories: Label for indication of special function unit/block number,
Dust proof protection sheet,
Terminating resistor (120Ω 1/2W),
Manual supplied with product
[1]
Extension cable
[6]
Nameplate
[2]
Status LEDs (See Subsection 1.2.2)
[7]
DIN rail mounting hook
[3]
Power LED (See Subsection 1.2.2)
[8]
CAN bus connector
[4]
Top cover
[9]
[5]
DIN rail mounting groove
DIN rail: DIN46277, 35 mm (1.38") width
Direct mounting hole
2 holes of 4.5 (0.18")
(mounting screw: M4 screw)
1 Introduction
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Power and status LEDs
LED Name
LED Color
Status
Description
OFF
Layer 2 offline mode
SINGLE FLASH*1
Green
BLINKING*1
FLICKERING*1
FROM/TO
Green
Green
Red
OFF
PLC is not accessing BFMs in module.
ON
PLC is accessing BFMs in module.
OFF
Module is not transmitting or receiving CAN messages.
ON
Module is transmitting or receiving CAN messages.
No error
SINGLE FLASH*1
At least one of the error counters of the module has reached or exceeded the error
passive level.
DOUBLE FLASH*1
A NMT guarding failure (NMT-Slave or NMT-Master) or a heartbeat failure has
occurred.
FLICKERING*1
Green
General error
LSS Services in progress
ON
Module is BUS-OFF state, or CPU error occurs in PLC main unit.
ON
24V DC power is properly supplied from PLC main unit.
RUN and ERROR LEDs have four kinds of flicker states: single flash, double flash, blinking, and
flickering.
This LED flickers as follows.
SINGLE FLASH
0.2 s
1s
0.2 s
0.2 s
0.2 s
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
0.2 s
1s
BLINKING
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
FLICKERING
0.05 s 0.05 s
1.2.3
Terminal layout
8
CAN_L
CAN_SHLD
CAN_H
Signal
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Pin No.
CAN_GND
5
6
DOUBLE FLASH
0.2 s
4
Introduction of
Functions
*1.
3
OFF
BLINKING*1
POWER
CANopen® mode: CANopen® OPERATIONAL state
Layer 2 mode:
Layer 2 online mode
Wiring
ERROR
LSS Services in progress
Installation
Tx/Rx
CANopen® PRE-OPERATIONAL state
•
•
ON
2
CANopen® STOPPED state
Specifications
RUN
Introduction
1.2.2
1.2 External Dimensions and Each Part Name
Description
1
CAN_GND
Ground / 0 V / V-
2
CAN_L
CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3
(CAN_SHLD)
Optional CAN shield
4
CAN_H
CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
5
(CAN_V+)
Optional CAN external positive supply (not connected internally)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
CAN_V+
10
Command
Interface
19
1 Introduction
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1.3 System Configuration
1.3
System Configuration
1.3.1
General configuration
PLC programming tool
CANopen® Configuration tool
Import
FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC
FX3U-CAN
Communication
block
CAN
Interface
CAN bus network
Node 2
Node 1
Terminating
resistor
EDS
File
Terminating
resistor
Node 3
Repeater
CAN bus network
Node 5
Terminating
resistor
FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC
Part Name
Communication block
PLC
Node 4
Model Name
Remarks
FX3U-CAN
FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/
FX3UC Series PLC
An FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is necessary to connect the FX3U-CAN to
an FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC.
CAN bus network
-
CAN bus network
-
CANopen® Node, or CAN Layer 2 Node
Repeater
-
PLC programming tool
EDS file
(Electronic Data Sheet file)
GX Works2
FX3U-CAN-405.eds,
FX3U-CAN-417.eds
Maximum transmission
distance
FX3U-CAN-405: When using FX3U-CAN by Interface and Device Profile CiA®
405 for IEC 61131-3 Programmable Devices, the EDS file uses
FX3U-CAN-405.eds.
FX3U-CAN-417: When using FX3U-CAN by Application Profile CiA® 417 for lift
control systems, the EDS file uses FX3U-CAN-417.eds.
Hardware Interface between CANopen® Configuration tool and CAN bus.
CAN Interface
Terminating resistor
-
The CAN bus network requires terminating resistors for network both ends.
-
5000 m (16,404'2") at 10 kbps (with repeaters).
The transmission distance is reduced to 25 m (82') at the maximum baud rate of 1
Mbps.
The maximum distance also depends on the specification of other connected
nodes.
How to obtain EDS file
For EDS file, consult with your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
20
Terminating
resistor
FX3U-CAN
Communication
block
Node
CANopen® Configuration tool
Node 6
1 Introduction
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Applicable PLC
Model name
FX3G Series PLC
FX3GC Series
PLC*1
Introduction
1.3.2
1.3 System Configuration
Applicability
Ver. 1.00 and later (Up to 8 blocks can be extended*2)
2
Ver. 1.40 and later (Up to 8 blocks can be extended*2)
Ver. 2.20 and later (Up to 8 blocks can be extended*2)
FX3UC Series PLC*1
Ver. 2.20 and later (Up to 8 blocks can be extended*2*3)
1.3.3
Connection with PLC
*1.
Other
extension
units/blocks
FX3G/FX3U PLC
FX3UCAN
5
Introduction of
Functions
Unit No. 1 to No. 7 is assigned when the main unit is an FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2).
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
4
Wiring
The FX3U-CAN connects with a PLC via an extension cable.
The FX3U-CAN is handled as a special extension block of the PLC. The unit number of the FX3U-CAN is
automatically assigned No. 0 to No. 7 starting from the special function unit/block closest to the PLC main unit.
(This unit number is used for the designation of a FROM/TO instruction.)
For further information of the assignment of the I/O number and unit number of the PLC, refer to the following
manual corresponding to the connected PLC.
3
Installation
The version number can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001/D8101.
*1. An FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is necessary to connect the FX3U-CAN to an FX3GC/FX3UC PLC.
*2. Check the current consumption of the connected extension blocks and when necessary insert
extension power supply units.
*3. Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
Specifications
FX3U Series PLC
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
7
FX3UCAN
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
FX3GC/FX3UC
PLC
Other
extension
units/blocks
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
FX2NC-CNV-IF
• An FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is necessary to connect the FX3U-CAN to an FX3GC/FX3UC PLC.
21
10
Command
Interface
• The number of I/O points occupied by the FX3U-CAN is eight. Make sure that the total number of I/O points
(occupied I/O points) of the main unit, extension unit(s), extension block(s) and the number of points
occupied by special function blocks does not exceed the maximum number of I/O points of the PLC.
For further information of the maximum number of I/O points of the PLC, refer to the respective product manual.
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
CAN Layer 2
Mode
• The optional FX0N-65EC (FX0N-30EC) and FX2N-CNV-BC are necessary to lengthen the extension cable.
9
1 Introduction
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1.4
1.4 System Start-up Procedure
System Start-up Procedure
FX3U-CAN
Refer to Chapter 1
Outline of system:
Applicable PLC
CANopen® nodes: Applicable CANopen®
configuration tool
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2
Check of specifications
Specifications:
Operation environment
Power supply specifications
Performance specifications
- Maximum bus length (depends on baud rate)
Refer to Chapter 1 and 2
System configuration
System configuration:
Refer to Chapter 3 and 4
Installation and wiring
Installation:
Arrangements
For arrangements, refer to the manual
of the PLC main unit
Mounting
Wiring:
Applicable cable and connector
CAN bus wiring
Grounding
Bus terminator
Refer to Chapter 5 to12
Communication settings
Communication settings:
For CANopen® 405 mode, refer to Section 12.1
For CANopen® 417 mode, refer to Section 12.2
For CAN Layer 2 mode, refer to Section 12.3
Refer to Chapter 5 to 12
Object Dictionary (CANopen® mode only):
Communication profile area
Network management
Device profile CiA® 405
(CANopen® 405 mode only)
Application profile CiA® 417
(CANopen® 417 mode only)
Buffer memory:
List of buffer memories
Details of buffer memory
Create program
For buffer memory read/write method,
refer to programming manual
Communication program:
For example program, refer to Chapter 13
Refer to Chapter14
If the error status data is abnormal,
refer to Chapter 14.
22
2 Specifications
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Introduction
2.
Specifications
2
•
•
7
DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
•
Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device.
TRANSPORTATION AND
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS
•
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due to abnormal data
written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm
(3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to the manual of the PLC main unit).
5
Introduction of
Functions
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
4
Wiring
•
3
Installation
•
Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply
problems or PLC failure.
Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents.
1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements
(such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower
positioning limits).
2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off.
Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be
disabled.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
For the operating status of each node in the case of a communication error, see the FX3U-CAN user’s manual and the product
manual of each node.
Erroneous output or malfunctions may cause an accident.
When executing control (data changes) to an operating PLC, construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the entire
system operates safely. In addition, when executing control such as program changes and operation status changes (status control)
to an operating PLC, carefully read the manual and sufficiently confirm safety in advance. Especially in control from external
equipment to a PLC in a remote place, problems in the PLC may not be able to be handled promptly due to abnormality in data
transfer. Construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program. At the same time, determine the actions in the system between the
external equipment and the PLC for protection against abnormalities in data transfer.
Specifications
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
The PLC is a precision instrument. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifications of the
PLC main unit manual.
Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC. After transportation, verify the operations of the PLC.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
23
2 Specifications
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
2.1
2.1 General Specifications
General Specifications
Items other than the following table are equivalent to those of the PLC main unit.
For further information of general specifications, refer to the manual of the PLC main unit.
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
Item
2.2
Specification
Dielectric Withstand Voltage
500V AC for one minute
Insulation Resistance
5M or more by 500V DC megger
Between all terminals and ground terminal
Power Supply Specifications
Item
Specification
24V DC, max 110 mA
24V DC power is supplied internally from the main unit.
Internal Power Supply
For details on the 24V DC power supply of main unit, refer to the manual of the PLC main unit.
2.3
Performance Specifications
Item
Specification
Transmission Type
CAN Bus network (RS-485, CSMA/CR)
Applicable Function
CANopen® Node, CAN Layer 2 Node
CANopen® Communication Services
According to CiA® Standards
CANopen® Device and Application
CiA® 301 V4.2
CiA® 302 V4.1
CiA® 305 V2.2
•
Profiles According to CiA® Standards •
Remote Transmit Request (RTR)
Interface and Device Profile CiA® 405 V2.0 for IEC 61131-3 Programmable Devices.
Application Profile CiA® 417 V2.1 for lift control systems.
No support in CANopen® mode.
Support in Layer 2 mode.
For support in Layer 2 mode, refer to Chapter 9
Node Number on CANopen
Network
Maximum 127 nodes
A total of 30 nodes can be connected to any segment of the bus. Using repeaters or bridges, the
total number can be extended up to 127 nodes.
Node ID
Selectable from 1 to 127
Communication Method
Acyclic, cyclic or event driven
®
1 Mbps / 25 m (82')
800 kbps / 50 m (164')
500 kbps / 100 m (328'1")
Supported Transmission Speed /
Maximum Bus Length
250 kbps / 250 m (820'2")
125 kbps / 500 m (1640'5")
100 kbps / 600 m (1968'6")
50 kbps / 1000 m (3280'10")
20 kbps / 2500 m (8202'1")
10 kbps / 5000 m (16404'2")
24
Connection Cable
Refer to Subsection 4.1.2.
Terminating Resistor
120  (Accessory: 120  1/2W)
No. of Occupied I/O Points
8 points
(taken from either the input or output points of the PLC)
3 Installation
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
3.1 Connection with PLC
1
Introduction
3.
Installation
2
Specifications
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
•
Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
3
•
•
•
•
3.1
Connection with PLC
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
The FX3U-CAN connects on the right side of a PLC main unit or extension units/blocks (including special
function units/blocks).
For connection to an FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC or FX2NC Series PLC extension block, an FX2NC-CNV-IF or
FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.
For further information, refer to the respective PLC manual.
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
5
Introduction of
Functions
•
•
4
Wiring
•
Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in PLC main unit manual (Hardware Edition).
Never use the product in areas with excessive dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt air, Cl2, H2S, SO2 or NO2),
flammable gas,
vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature, condensation, or rain and wind.
If the product is used in such conditions, electric shock, fire, malfunctions, deterioration or damage may occur.
Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly.
Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions.
When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC's ventilation port when installation work is completed.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
Install the product on a flat surface.
If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the PC board, thereby causing nonconformities.
Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws.
Connect extension cables securely to their designated connectors.
Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
Installation
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
25
3 Installation
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
3.2
3.2 Mounting
Mounting
The FX3U-CAN may be installed in a control cabinet with a 35 mm wide DIN46277 DIN rail mounting or M4
screw direct mounting.
3.2.1
DIN rail mounting
The product may be mounted on a 35 mm wide DIN46277 (DIN rail).
1
2
1
Fit the upper edge (A in the figure to the right) of the DIN
rail mounting groove onto the DIN rail.
Push the product onto the DIN rail.
A
• An interval space of 1 to 2 mm (0.04" to 0.08") between each unit is necessary.
3
2
Connect the extension cable.
Connect the extension cable (B in the figure to the right) to
the main unit, I/O extension unit/block or special function
unit/block on the left side of the product.
For further information of the extension cable connection
procedure, refer to the respective product PLC manual.
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
• Example of installation on DIN rail
- In the case of the FX3G/FX3U PLC
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08")
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08")
FX3G/FX3U
Series main unit
FX3U-CAN
Other
extension
equipment
DIN rail
- In the case of the FX3GC/FX3UC PLC
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08")
FX3GC/FX3UC
Series
main unit
DIN rail
FX2NC-CNV-IF or
FX3UC-1PS-5V
26
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08")
FX3U-CAN
Other
extension
equipment
B
3 Installation
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Direct Mounting
1
3
Installation
2
Create mounting holes in the mounting
surface according to the external dimensions
diagram.
2
Specifications
The product can be installed directly with screws.
An interval space of 1 to 2 mm (0.04" to 0.08") between each unit is necessary.
For further information of installation, refer to the following respective PLC manual.
For mounting hole pitches, refer to Section 1.2
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
Introduction
3.2.2
3.2 Mounting
Fit the FX3U-CAN (A in the figure to the right)
to the mounting holes and tighten with M4
screws (B in the figure to the right).
4
Wiring
For further information of the screw position and quantity,
refer to the dimensioned drawing specified below.
For dimensions, refer to Section 1.2
3
Connect the extension cable.
FX
3U
-48
M
IN 0
10
3
13
4
14
5
15
5
6
16
7
17
20
21
22
OU
0
1
11
24
25
PO
PO
WER
WER
T
10
23
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
7
17
20
21
22
26
27
RURU
N N
BA BA
TT TT
ERER
RORO
R R
23
24
25
26
27
B
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
2
12
Introduction of
Functions
Connect the extension cable to the main unit, I/O
extension unit/block or special function unit/block on the left
side of the product.
(Refer to Step 3 in Subsection 3.2.1.)
For further information of the extension cable connection
procedure, refer to the respective PLC manual.
1
11
A
B
7
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08")
FX3G/FX3U Series
main unit
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
• Example of direct installation
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08")
FX3U-CAN
other
extension
equipment
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
(+ shows the M4 screw)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
27
4 Wiring
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
4.
4.1 Applicable Cable and Connector
Wiring
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
•
Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 or less) to the shield of the twisted shield cable (refer to Subsection 4.2.3).
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to communication connectors or communication cables.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.
Make sure to affix the CAN bus connector with fixing screws.
Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (CAN bus connector) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due to abnormal data
written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100 mm
(3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
Place the communication cable in grounded metallic ducts or conduits both inside and outside of the control panel whenever possible.
4.1
Applicable Cable and Connector
4.1.1
Applicable connector
FX3U-CAN uses a CAN bus connector. This connector is removable.
For further information of removal and installation of the CAN bus connector, refer to the following section.
Refer to Subsection 4.1.4
28
4 Wiring
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Applicable cable
Item
Applicable Cable
Cable Type
Twisted pair cable
Unshielded/ Shielded
2
Shielded
2 pair
Conformance Standard
Specifications
No. of Pairs
Wire Size
Introduction
4.1.2
4.1 Applicable Cable and Connector
ISO 11898/1993
0.3
mm2
to 0.82 mm2 (AWG22 to 18)
120 
Impedance
3
Note
Bus Length (m)
Length Related Resistance (mΩ/m)
Cross Section (mm2)
70
0.3 to 0.34 (AWG 22)
Less than 60
0.34 to 0.60 (AWG 22 to 19)
300 to 600
Less than 40
0.50 to 0.60 (AWG 20 to 19)
600 to 1000
Less than 26
0.75 to 0.80 (AWG 18)
4
Wiring
0 to 40
40 to 300
Installation
The bus length, length related resistance and the cross section of the cable to be used should be related as
follows.
Guidelines for the cable are available in CiA® 303.
For details, refer to CiA® 303
5
Introduction of
Functions
4.1.3
Termination of cable end
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
Model names
Caulking tool
AI 0.5-8WH
CRIMPFOX 6*1
AI-TWIN 2X 0.5-8WH
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)
Insulating sleeve
2.6mm
(0.11")
Contact area
(Crimp area)
8mm
(0.32")
14mm(0.56")
7
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
*1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3
*2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6
4.1.4
6
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
• When using stranded wires
It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath. Select
appropriate electric wire by referring to the dimensions of the wire
ferrule.
<Reference>
9mm
(0.35")
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Strip 9 mm (0.35") of insulation from the end of the wire. For stranded wires, terminate the
end of the wire using a wire ferrule with insulating sleeve.
Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.4 to 0.5 Nm.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to
do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
Removal and installation of CAN bus connector
29
10
Command
Interface
2) Installation
Place the CAN connector in the specified position, and evenly tighten both CAN connector mounting
screws.
Tightening torque 0.4 to 0.5 Nm
Do not tighten the terminal block mounting screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
1) Removal
Evenly unscrew both CAN connector mounting screws, and remove the CAN connector from the module.
If the cable is attached to the connector, hold and pull the connector on the side. Do not pull the cable.
4 Wiring
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
4.2 CAN-Bus Wiring
4.2
CAN-Bus Wiring
4.2.1
Connecting communication cables
Terminating
resistor
(1) CAN_GND
(2) CAN_L
(3) CAN_SHLD
(4) CAN_H
(5) CAN_V+
(1) CAN_GND
(2) CAN_L
(3) CAN_SHLD
(4) CAN_H
(5) CAN_V+
Grounding resistance of
100 Ω or less (Class D)
(1) CAN_GND
(2) CAN_L
(3) CAN_SHLD
(4) CAN_H
(5) CAN_V+
Terminating
resistor
Grounding resistance of
100 Ω or less (Class D)
For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), it is recommended to ground the cable shield at both ends.
Caution
For safety, always check the potential differences between the grounding points. If potential differences are
found, proper measures must be taken to avoid damage.
4.2.2
Module wiring
For further information on PLC wiring, refer to the following manual.
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
CAN Bus connector
FX3U-CAN
CAN_GND
CAN_L
CAN_SHLD
CAN_H
CAN_V+
FX3G/FX3GC*1/
FX3U/FX3UC *1
Series PLC
Grounding resistance of
100 Ω or less (Class D)
Grounding mounting plate or
grounded DIN rail with a
grounding resistance of 100 Ω
or less (Class D).
Strip a part of the coating of the shielded twisted pair cable as shown in subsection 4.2.3.
Ground the PLC's grounding terminal there.
*1.
30
An FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is necessary to connect the FX3U-CAN to an FX3GC/FX3UC
Series PLC.
4 Wiring
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Grounding of twisted pair cable
Strip a part of the coating of the shielded twisted pair cable as shown below, and ground at least 35 mm
(1.38") of the exposed shield section.
Introduction
4.2.3
4.3 Grounding
2
Specifications
Shielded twisted pair cable
Shield
4.2.4
3
Termination
4.3
Grounding
4
Wiring
Ground the cables as follows
• The grounding resistance should be 100  or less.
Independent grounding
Best condition
FX3UCAN
Other
equipment
Shared grounding
Good condition
FX3UCAN
Other
equipment
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Other
equipment
5
Introduction of
Functions
• Independent grounding should be established whenever possible.
Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding is not configured, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For further information, refer to the respective PLC manual.
Refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
Refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
FX3UCAN
Installation
The CANopen® network requires terminating resistors for both network ends. When FX3U-CAN is the network
end, connect the included terminating resistor (120  1/2W) between pin number 2 (CAN_L) and 4 (CAN_H).
Shared grounding
Not allowed
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
• The grounding point should be close to the FX3U-CAN, and all grounding wires should be as short as
possible.
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
31
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.
5.1
5.1 Functions List
Introduction of Functions
Functions List
The function list is shown below.
Functions
Reference
Different Function Modes of the module
Section 5.2 and Section 6.5
Object Dictionary
Link between CANopen® network and PLC
Section 5.3
Command Interface
Module Interface to the Object Dictionary
Section 5.4 and Chapter 10
SDO
Service Data Object
Subsection 5.6.4
RPDO / TPDO
Receive/Transmit Process Data Object
Subsection 5.6.5
MPDO
Multiplexed Process Data Object
Subsection 5.6.6
SYNC
Synchronization object
Subsection 5.6.7
Node guarding
Node guarding service
Subsection 5.6.8
Heartbeat
Heartbeat Service
Subsection 5.6.9
TIME
Time stamp object
Subsection 5.6.10
EMCY
Emergency object
Subsection 5.6.13
General NMT
General Network management services
Section 5.8
NMT Master
Network Management Master Services
Section 5.8
Boot-Up
Device Boot-Up Message Service
Subsection 5.8.2
Flying Master
Flexible Network Management
Subsection 5.8.11
LSS
Layer Setting Service for Devices
Subsection 5.8.12
Configuration manager
Profile CiA® 405 V2.0
Profile
5.2
Description
Function Modes
CiA®
417 V2.1
Mechanism for configuration of the Object Dictionary of
other CANopen® Devices
Device Profile for IEC 61131-3 Programmable Devices
Application Profile for lift control systems
Subsection 5.8.13
Section 5.9 and Chapter 7
Section 5.10 and Chapter 8
Layer 2 Message mode Layer 2 Message transmission and receive Mode
Chapter 9
PLC RUN / STOP
Chapter 11
Module behaviour in case of PLC RUN/STOP
Function Modes
The FX3U-CAN has four different function modes. The function mode is set up by BFM #21.
For further information on how to set the function mode, refer to the following section.
Refer to Section 6.5
Function Mode
Description
This mode supports full access to Layer 2 of the CAN communication protocol. Customized 11-bit Identifier
11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode
Layer 2 messages can be sent and raw 11-bit Identifier Layer 2 messages can be received.
32
29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode
This mode supports full access to Layer 2 of the CAN communication protocol. Customized 29-bit Identifier
Layer 2 messages can be sent and raw 29-bit Identifier Layer 2 messages can be received.
CANopen® 405 mode
This mode supports the CANopen® CiA® 405 IEC 61131-3 Programmable Device Profile.
CANopen® 417 mode
This mode supports the CANopen® CiA® 417 Lift Application Profile.
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Object Dictionary
General layout of CANopen® standard object dictionary
3
The general layout of the CANopen® standard object dictionary is shown below.
0000
0001 to 009F
00A0 to 0FFF
Object
Not used
Data type definitions
Refer to Section 5.5
301/CiA®
2000 to 5FFF
Manufacturer-specific profile area
6000 to 9FFF
Standardized Profile area (CiA® 417)
Wiring
(CiA®
Communication profile area
302)
Refer to Section 5.6 and Section 5.8
Refer to Section 5.10
5
Standardized Profile area (CiA® 405)
Refer to Section 5.9
Introduction of
Functions
B000 to FFFF
4
Reserved
1000 to 1FFF
A000 to AFFF
5.4
Installation
Index (hex)
2
Specifications
The Object Dictionary is a structure for data organization within the CANopen® network. The data within the
Object Dictionary is used to set CAN bus parameters, initialize special functions, control data flow, store data
in many formats and send emergency messages.
The Object Dictionary is structured in Indexes and Sub-Indexes. Each Index addresses a single parameter, a
set of parameters, network input/output data or other data. A Sub-Index addresses a subset of the parameter
or data of the Index.
Introduction
5.3
5.3 Object Dictionary
Reserved
Command Interface
7
Function Mode Selection
Mode 405
Mode 417
Reference
Mode 11
Mode 29
SDO Request
-
-
Section 10.2
Set Heartbeat
-
-
Section 10.3
Set Node Guarding / NMT slave assignment
-
-
Section 10.4
-
-
Section 10.5
Store Object Dictionary settings
-
-
Section 10.6
Restore Object Dictionary default settings
-
-
Section 10.7
-
-
Communication Mapping Modes
-
Display current Parameter
Sending Layer 2 Message
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Send an Emergency Message
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Command Interface
Section 7.2
Section 10.8
-
-
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
The Command Interface (CIF) provides access to the Object Dictionary of the FX3U-CAN and the Object
Dictionary of other CANopen® nodes in the network. Using the BFM area #1000 to #1066, the various CIF
functions can be used for SDO read/write, RPDO and TPDO configuration/mapping, configuration of Node
Guarding, Heartbeat, Emergency Messages and others.
For Command Interface, refer to Chapter 10
Section 9.7
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
33
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.5
5.5 Data Type Definition Area
Data Type Definition Area
Static data types are placed in the object dictionary for definition purposes only. Indexes H0002 to H0008
may be mapped in order to define the appropriate space in the RPDO as not being used by the device. An
SDO access results in an error.
For RPDO, refer to Subsection 5.6.5
5.6
Index (hex)
Sub-index (hex)
0001
00
Object
Description
Reserved
-
0002
00
Signed 8bit
I8
0003
00
Signed 16bit
I16
0004
00
Signed 32bit
I32
0005
00
0006
00
Data type
definition
Data Type
Unsigned 8bit
U8
Unsigned 16bit
U16
0007
00
Unsigned 32bit
U32
0008
00
Float 32 bit
Real32
0009 to 009F
00
Reserved
-
Communication Profile Area
The table below provides a brief description and reference information for the FX3U-CAN CANopen® Object
Dictionary.
Note: Stored to Flash ROM
Data will be saved in the Flash ROM by using the Store Parameter command in Index H1010. Be careful with
write handling. The maximum number of writes to the built-in flash ROM is 10,000 times.
Note
Here, the RPDO and TPDO settings for CANopen® 405 mode are described.
For the settings in CANopen® 417 mode, refer to the EDS file
How to obtain EDS files
For EDS files (FX3U-CAN-405.eds, FX3U-CAN-417.eds) of FX3U-CAN, consult with your local Mitsubishi
Electric representative.
Index
(hex)
Subindex
(hex)
Object
Description / Set Range
Stored
Read/
to Flash
Write
ROM
Data Type
Initial Value
U32
K405
R
U8
H0
R
-
-
-
-
-
Describes the device profile or the
application profile
1000
00
Device Type
•
CANopen® 405 Mode: K405
-
• CANopen® 417 Mode: K417
Will be changed by setting BFM #21.
1001
00
Error Register
1002
00
Reserved
1003
34
00
01 to 0F
Pre-defined error field
Refer to Subsection 5.6.2
Refer to Subsection 5.6.3
-
U8
H0
R/W
U32
H0
R
-
-
-
-
-
1004
00
Reserved
1005
00
COB-ID of SYNC message
Refer to Subsection 5.6.7
U32
H80
R/W
1006
00
Communication Cycle Period
Refer to Subsection 5.6.7
U32
H0
R/W
1007
00
Reserved
-
-
-
-
FX3U-CAN
R
-
X.XX
R
-
-
1008
00
Device Name
8 Byte ASCII String
Visible
String
1009
00
Hardware Version
4 Byte ASCII String
Visible
String
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
Subindex
(hex)
100A
00
Software Version
100B
00
Reserved
Object
Description / Set Range
00
Guard
100D
00
Life time factor*1
100E to
100F
00
Reserved
01
Store parameters
Restore default parameters
00
COB-ID Time
00
Reserved
1014
00
COB-ID EMCY
00
Inhibit Time EMCY
1015
1016
01 to 7F
00
-
-
-
Refer to Subsection 5.6.8
U16
H0
R/W
Refer to Subsection 5.6.8
U8
H0
R/W
-
-
-
-
Highest sub-index
U8
H01
R
-
Save all parameters
Refer to Subsection 5.6.11
U32
H1
R/W
-
Highest sub-index
U8
H01
R
-
Restore all parameters
Refer to Subsection 5.6.12
U32
H1
R/W
-
Refer to Subsection 5.6.10
U32
H8000 0100
R/W
-
-
-
-
Refer to Subsection 5.6.13
U32
H80 + Node-Id
R
-
Refer to Subsection 5.6.13
U16
H0
R/W
U8
H7F
R
U32
H0
R/W
-
Consumer heartbeat time
Producer heartbeat time
Highest sub-index
Refer to Subsection 5.6.9
Refer to Subsection 5.6.9
U16
•
CANopen®
405 Mode:
K0
•
CANopen®
-
Highest sub-index
U8
H03
R
Vendor-ID
U32
H71
R
-
Product Code
U32
K7170
R
-
Revision Number
U32
HXXXX XXXX
R
-
-
-
-
-
Identity Object
03
1019 to
101F
00
Reserved
-
00
1020
01
Highest sub-index
Verify Configuration
*1
02
1028
1029
00
00
01 to 7F
00
01
Reserved
Emergency consumer object
Error behaviour
00
NMT inhibit time*1
102B to
13FF
00
Reserved
00
Highest sub-index
Refer to Subsection 5.6.13
Highest sub-index
02
*1.
00
R/W
-
-
-
-
U8
H7F
R
U32
H80 + Node-Id
R/W
R
H0
R/W
Refer to Subsection 5.8.7
U16
H0
R
-
-
-
-
U8
Transmission type
Refer to
Inhibit time
Subsection 5.6.5
Compatibility entry
Event-timer
Reserved
H0
H01
05
15F2 to
15FF
U32
U8
COB-ID
04
R/W
U8
Highest sub-index
RPDO communication
parameter
R
H0
-
7
-
-
U32
U8
U16
9
Refer to Table 5.1
Refer to Table 5.5
U8
-
U16
-
-
-
8
CAN Layer 2
Mode
03
H02
Refer to Section 5.7
01
1400 to
15F1
U8
U32
6
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
102A
-
-
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1021 to
1027
Refer to Subsection 5.8.13
4
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
00
01
02
3
5
R/W
417 Mode:
K1000
1018
2
Introduction of
Functions
1017
00
-
Wiring
1012
1013
-
Installation
01
R
-
00
1011
X.XX
-
00
1010
Visible
String
Specifications
100C
Initial Value
4 Byte ASCII String
time*1
Stored
Read/
to Flash
Write
ROM
Data Type
Introduction
Index
(hex)
-
10
Applicable for FX3U-CAN firmware Ver. 1.10 or later.
Command
Interface
35
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Index
(hex)
1600 to
17F1
17F2 to
17FF
Subindex
(hex)
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Object
Description / Set Range
00
Number of valid
object entries
U8
01
1st Mapped object
U32
02
2nd Mapped object
U32
rd
3 Mapped object
Refer to
Subsection 5.6.5 4th Mapped object
U32
05
5th Mapped object
U32
06
6th
Mapped object
U32
07
7th
Mapped object
U32
08
8th Mapped object
U32
03
04
00
RPDO mapping parameter
Reserved
00
-
02
03
04
Transmission type
Refer to
Inhibit time
Subsection 5.6.5
Compatibility entry
05
1979 to
19FF
1A00 to
1B78
1B79 to
1F21
00
Event-timer
Reserved
1F23 to
1F24
U32
02
2nd
Mapped object
U32
03
3rd
Mapped object
Refer to
th
Subsection 5.6.5 4 Mapped object
U32
05
5th Mapped object
U32
06
6th
Mapped object
U32
07
7th
Mapped object
U32
08
8th Mapped object
U32
01 to 7F
00
01 to 7F
Configuration request
00
01 to 7F
Expected configuration date
00
1F27
1F28 to
1F7F
1F80
01 to 7F
Expected configuration time
00
Reserved
00
NMT startup
00
1F81
36
01 to 7F
NMT slave assignment
-
-
Refer to Table 5.3
Refer to Table 5.8
-
U32
-
-
-
Refer to Table 5.4
Refer to Table 5.9
Refer to Table 5.10
-
-
-
-
U8
H7F
R
-
DOMAIN
-
R/W
-
-
-
-
Highest sub-index
U8
H80
R
-
Refer to Node-ID value
Subsection 5.8.13 ALL nodes
U32
H0
W
-
Highest sub-index
U8
H7F
R
-
Refer to
Node-ID value
Subsection 5.8.13
U32
H0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
H7F
R
Refer to
Node-ID value
Subsection 5.8.13
U32
H0
R/W
-
-
-
Refer to
Node-ID value
Subsection 5.8.13
Reserved
80
1F26
Highest sub-index
Concise DCF
00
1F25
-
1st Mapped object
Reserved
-
U16
01
00
Refer to Table 5.2
Refer to Table 5.6
Refer to Table 5.7
U8
U8
00
1F22
-
U8
U16
Number of valid
object entries
TPDO mapping parameter
Stored
Read/
to Flash
Write
ROM
U32
00
04
Initial Value
U8
COB-ID
TPDO communication
parameter
U32
-
Highest sub-index
01
1800 to
1978
Data Type
-
Refer to Subsection 5.8.5
U32
H0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
H7F
R
Refer to
Node-ID value
Subsection 5.8.7
U32
H0
R/W
-
-
-
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
Subindex
(hex)
1F82
01 to 7F
Object
Description / Set Range
00
1F85
1F87
-
-
W
-
R
-
U8
00
Highest sub-index
U8
H80
Refer to Node-ID value
Subsection 5.8.10 All nodes
U8
H0
01 to 7F
Request node guarding
00
01 to 7F
00
01 to 7F
00
01 to 7F
00
01 to 7F
00
01 to 7F
Highest sub-index
Device type
Refer to Subsection 5.8.4
Highest sub-index
Vendor identification
Refer to Subsection 5.8.4
Highest sub-index
Product code
Refer to Subsection 5.8.4
Highest sub-index
Revision number
Refer to Subsection 5.8.4
Highest sub-index
Serial number
00
Boot time
1F8A to
1F8F
00
Reserved
R/W
-
W
-
U8
H7F
R
U32
H0
R/W
U8
H7F
R
U32
H0
R/W
U8
H7F
R
U32
H0
R/W
U8
H7F
R
U32
H0
R/W
U8
H7F
R
H0
R/W
H0
R/W
-
-
-
-
R
01
U16
K100
R/W
02
NMT master
negotiation time
delay
U16
K500
R/W
U16
K1
R/W
U16
K1500
R/W
04
timing
NMT master
Refer to priority
Subsection 5.8.11
Priority time slot
CANopen® device
time slot
U16
K10
R/W
06
Multiple NMT
master detect
cycle time
U16
K4000 +
K10 * Node-ID
R/W
-
-
-
00
Reserved
-
4
5
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
05
3
Introduction of
Functions
H06
master
-
U32
U8
2
-
U32
Highest sub-index
NMT flying
parameters
-
Refer to Subsection 5.8.7
NMT master
timeout
03
-
Refer to Subsection 5.8.4
-
00
-
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1F91 to
1FFF
-
R/W
80
1F89
1F90
R
H0
Wiring
1F88
H80
Installation
1F86
U8
Refer to Node-ID
Subsection 5.8.9 All nodes
80
1F84
Initial Value
Specifications
1F83
Highest sub-index
Request NMT
Stored
Read/
to Flash
Write
ROM
Data Type
Introduction
Index
(hex)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
37
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Table 5.1: Mode 405 RPDO communication Parameter
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
Index
(hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW
H03
RW
H04
-
H05
RW
1400
5
200 + Node-Id
FE
0
Reserved
0
1401
5
300 + Node-Id
FE
0
Reserved
0
1402
5
400 + Node-Id
FE
0
Reserved
0
1403
5
500 + Node-Id
FE
0
Reserved
0
1404 to 144F
5
80000000
FE
0
Reserved
0
1450 to 15F1
Reserved
Table 5.2: Mode 405 RPDO mapping Parameter
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Index
(hex)
38
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
RW
H01
RW
H02
RW
H03
RW
H04
RW
H05
RW
H06
RW
H07
RW
H08
RW
1600
4
A5800110
A5800210
A5800310
A5800410
0
0
0
0
1601
4
A5800510
A5800610
A5800710
A5800810
0
0
0
0
1602
4
A5800910
A5800A10
A5800B10
A5800C10
0
0
0
0
1603
4
A5800D10
A5800E10
A5800F10
A5801010
0
0
0
0
1604
4
A5801110
A5801210
A5801310
A5801410
0
0
0
0
1605
4
A5801510
A5801610
A5801710
A5801810
0
0
0
0
1606
4
A5801910
A5801A10
A5801B10
A5801C10
0
0
0
0
1607
4
A5801D10
A5801E10
A5801F10
A5802010
0
0
0
0
1608
4
A5802110
A5802210
A5802310
A5802410
0
0
0
0
1609
4
A5802510
A5802610
A5802710
A5802810
0
0
0
0
160A
4
A5802910
A5802A10
A5802B10
A5802C10
0
0
0
0
160B
4
A5802D10
A5802E10
A5802F10
A5803010
0
0
0
0
160C
4
A5803110
A5803210
A5803310
A5803410
0
0
0
0
160D
4
A5803510
A5803610
A5803710
A5803810
0
0
0
0
160E
4
A5803910
A5803A10
A5803B10
A5803C10
0
0
0
0
160F
4
A5803D10
A5803E10
A5803F10
A5804010
0
0
0
0
1610
4
A5804110
A5804210
A5804310
A5804410
0
0
0
0
1611
4
A5804510
A5804610
A5804710
A5804810
0
0
0
0
1612
4
A5804910
A5804A10
A5804B10
A5804C10
0
0
0
0
1613
4
A5804D10
A5804E10
A5804F10
A5805010
0
0
0
0
1614
4
A5805110
A5805210
A5805310
A5805410
0
0
0
0
1615
4
A5805510
A5805610
A5805710
A5805810
0
0
0
0
1616
4
A5805910
A5805A10
A5805B10
A5805C10
0
0
0
0
1617
4
A5805D10
A5805E10
A5805F10
A5806010
0
0
0
0
1618
4
A5806110
A5806210
A5806310
A5806410
0
0
0
0
1619
4
A5806510
A5806610
A5806710
A5806810
0
0
0
0
161A
4
A5806910
A5806A10
A5806B10
A5806C10
0
0
0
0
161B
4
A5806D10
A5806E10
A5806F10
A5807010
0
0
0
0
161C
4
A5807110
A5807210
A5807310
A5807410
0
0
0
0
161D
4
A5807510
A5807610
A5807710
A5807810
0
0
0
0
161E
4
A5810110
A5810210
A5810310
A5810410
0
0
0
0
161F
4
A5810510
A5810610
A5810710
A5810810
0
0
0
0
1620
4
A5810910
A5810A10
A5810B10
A5810C10
0
0
0
0
1621
4
A5810D10
A5810E10
A5810F10
A5811010
0
0
0
0
1622
4
A5811110
A5811210
A5811310
A5811410
0
0
0
0
1623
4
A5811510
A5811610
A5811710
A5811810
0
0
0
0
1624
4
A5811910
A5811A10
A5811B10
A5811C10
0
0
0
0
1625
4
A5811D10
A5811E10
A5811F10
A5812010
0
0
0
0
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H03
RW
H04
RW
H05
RW
H06
RW
H07
RW
H08
RW
1626
4
A5812110
A5812210
A5812310
A5812410
0
0
0
0
1627
4
A5812510
A5812610
A5812710
A5812810
0
0
0
0
1628
4
A5812910
A5812A10
A5812B10
A5812C10
0
0
0
0
1629
4
A5812D10
A5812E10
A5812F10
A5813010
0
0
0
0
162A
4
A5813110
A5813210
A5813310
A5813410
0
0
0
0
162B
4
A5813510
A5813610
A5813710
A5813810
0
0
0
0
162C
4
A5813910
A5813A10
A5813B10
A5813C10
0
0
0
0
162D
4
A5813D10
A5813E10
A5813F10
A5814010
0
0
0
0
162E
4
A5814110
A5814210
A5814310
A5814410
0
0
0
0
162F
4
A5814510
A5814610
A5814710
A5814810
0
0
0
0
1630
4
A5814910
A5814A10
A5814B10
A5814C10
0
0
0
0
1631
4
A5814D10
A5814E10
A5814F10
A5815010
0
0
0
0
1632
4
A5815110
A5815210
A5815310
A5815410
0
0
0
0
1633
4
A5815510
A5815610
A5815710
A5815810
0
0
0
0
1634
4
A5815910
A5815A10
A5815B10
A5815C10
0
0
0
0
1635
4
A5815D10
A5815E10
A5815F10
A5816010
0
0
0
0
1636
4
A5816110
A5816210
A5816310
A5816410
0
0
0
0
1637
4
A5816510
A5816610
A5816710
A5816810
0
0
0
0
1638
4
A5816910
A5816A10
A5816B10
A5816C10
0
0
0
0
1639
4
A5816D10
A5816E10
A5816F10
A5817010
0
0
0
0
163A
4
A5817110
A5817210
A5817310
A5817410
0
0
0
0
A5817610
A5817710
A5817810
0
0
0
0
A5820110
A5820210
A5820310
A5820410
0
0
0
0
163D
4
A5820510
A5820610
A5820710
A5820810
0
0
0
0
163E
4
A5820910
A5820A10
A5820B10
A5820C10
0
0
0
0
163F
4
A5820D10
A5820E10
A5820F10
A5821010
0
0
0
0
1640
4
A5821110
A5821210
A5821310
A5821410
0
0
0
0
1641
4
A5821510
A5821610
A5821710
A5821810
0
0
0
0
1642
4
A5821910
A5821A10
A5821B10
A5821C10
0
0
0
0
1643
4
A5821D10
A5821E10
A5821F10
A5822010
0
0
0
0
1644
4
A5822110
A5822210
A5822310
A5822410
0
0
0
0
1645
4
A5822510
A5822610
A5822710
A5822810
0
0
0
0
1646
4
A5822910
A5822A10
A5822B10
A5822C10
0
0
0
0
1647
4
A5822D10
A5822E10
A5822F10
A5823010
0
0
0
0
1648
4
A5823110
A5823210
A5823310
A5823410
0
0
0
0
1649
4
A5823510
A5823610
A5823710
A5823810
0
0
0
0
164A
4
A5823910
A5823A10
A5823B10
A5823C10
0
0
0
0
4
A5823D10
A5823E10
A5823F10
A5824010
0
0
0
0
4
A5824110
A5824210
A5824310
A5824410
0
0
0
0
164D
4
A5824510
A5824610
A5824710
A5824810
0
0
0
0
164E
4
A5824910
A5824A10
A5824B10
A5824C10
0
0
0
0
164F
4
A5824D10
A5824E10
A5824F10
A5825010
0
0
0
0
1650 to 17F1
Reserved
6
7
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
164B
164C
5
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
A5817510
4
4
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
4
3
Introduction of
Functions
163B
163C
2
Wiring
H02
RW
Installation
H01
RW
Specifications
H00
RW
Introduction
Index
(hex)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
39
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Table 5.3: Mode 405 TPDO communication Parameter
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
Index
(hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW
H03
RW
H04
-
H05
RW
1800
5
4000 0180 + Node-Id
FE
0
Reserved
0
1801
5
4000 0280 + Node-Id
FE
0
Reserved
0
1802
5
4000 0380 + Node-Id
FE
0
Reserved
0
1803
5
4000 0480 + Node-Id
FE
0
Reserved
0
1804 to 184F
5
C0000000
FE
0
Reserved
0
1850 to 1978
Reserved
Table 5.4: Mode 405 TPDO mapping Parameter
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Index
(hex)
40
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
RW
H01
RW
H02
RW
H03
RW
H04
RW
H05
RW
H06
RW
H07
RW
H08
RW
1A00
4
A1000110
A1000210
A1000310
A1000410
0
0
0
0
1A01
4
A1000510
A1000610
A1000710
A1000810
0
0
0
0
1A02
4
A1000910
A1000A10
A1000B10
A1000C10
0
0
0
0
1A03
4
A1000D10
A1000E10
A1000F10
A1001010
0
0
0
0
1A04
4
A1001110
A1001210
A1001310
A1001410
0
0
0
0
1A05
4
A1001510
A1001610
A1001710
A1001810
0
0
0
0
1A06
4
A1001910
A1001A10
A1001B10
A1001C10
0
0
0
0
1A07
4
A1001D10
A1001E10
A1001F10
A1002010
0
0
0
0
1A08
4
A1002110
A1002210
A1002310
A1002410
0
0
0
0
1A09
4
A1002510
A1002610
A1002710
A1002810
0
0
0
0
1A0A
4
A1002910
A1002A10
A1002B10
A1002C10
0
0
0
0
1A0B
4
A1002D10
A1002E10
A1002F10
A1003010
0
0
0
0
1A0C
4
A1003110
A1003210
A1003310
A1003410
0
0
0
0
1A0D
4
A1003510
A1003610
A1003710
A1003810
0
0
0
0
1A0E
4
A1003910
A1003A10
A1003B10
A1003C10
0
0
0
0
1A0F
4
A1003D10
A1003E10
A1003F10
A1004010
0
0
0
0
1A10
4
A1004110
A1004210
A1004310
A1004410
0
0
0
0
1A11
4
A1004510
A1004610
A1004710
A1004810
0
0
0
0
1A12
4
A1004910
A1004A10
A1004B10
A1004C10
0
0
0
0
1A13
4
A1004D10
A1004E10
A1004F10
A1005010
0
0
0
0
1A14
4
A1005110
A1005210
A1005310
A1005410
0
0
0
0
1A15
4
A1005510
A1005610
A1005710
A1005810
0
0
0
0
1A16
4
A1005910
A1005A10
A1005B10
A1005C10
0
0
0
0
1A17
4
A1005D10
A1005E10
A1005F10
A1006010
0
0
0
0
1A18
4
A1006110
A1006210
A1006310
A1006410
0
0
0
0
1A19
4
A1006510
A1006610
A1006710
A1006810
0
0
0
0
1A1A
4
A1006910
A1006A10
A1006B10
A1006C10
0
0
0
0
1A1B
4
A1006D10
A1006E10
A1006F10
A1007010
0
0
0
0
1A1C
4
A1007110
A1007210
A1007310
A1007410
0
0
0
0
1A1D
4
A1007510
A1007610
A1007710
A1007810
0
0
0
0
1A1E
4
A1010110
A1010210
A1010310
A1010410
0
0
0
0
1A1F
4
A1010510
A1010610
A1010710
A1010810
0
0
0
0
1A20
4
A1010910
A1010A10
A1010B10
A1010C10
0
0
0
0
1A21
4
A1010D10
A1010E10
A1010F10
A1011010
0
0
0
0
1A22
4
A1011110
A1011210
A1011310
A1011410
0
0
0
0
1A23
4
A1011510
A1011610
A1011710
A1011810
0
0
0
0
1A24
4
A1011910
A1011A10
A1011B10
A1011C10
0
0
0
0
1A25
4
A1011D10
A1011E10
A1011F10
A1012010
0
0
0
0
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H03
RW
H04
RW
H05
RW
H06
RW
H07
RW
H08
RW
1A26
4
A1012110
A1012210
A1012310
A1012410
0
0
0
0
1A27
4
A1012510
A1012610
A1012710
A1012810
0
0
0
0
1A28
4
A1012910
A1012A10
A1012B10
A1012C10
0
0
0
0
1A29
4
A1012D10
A1012E10
A1012F10
A1013010
0
0
0
0
1A2A
4
A1013110
A1013210
A1013310
A1013410
0
0
0
0
1A2B
4
A1013510
A1013610
A1013710
A1013810
0
0
0
0
1A2C
4
A1013910
A1013A10
A1013B10
A1013C10
0
0
0
0
1A2D
4
A1013D10
A1013E10
A1013F10
A1014010
0
0
0
0
1A2E
4
A1014110
A1014210
A1014310
A1014410
0
0
0
0
1A2F
4
A1014510
A1014610
A1014710
A1014810
0
0
0
0
1A30
4
A1014910
A1014A10
A1014B10
A1014C10
0
0
0
0
1A31
4
A1014D10
A1014E10
A1014F10
A1015010
0
0
0
0
1A32
4
A1015110
A1015210
A1015310
A1015410
0
0
0
0
1A33
4
A1015510
A1015610
A1015710
A1015810
0
0
0
0
1A34
4
A1015910
A1015A10
A1015B10
A1015C10
0
0
0
0
1A35
4
A1015D10
A1015E10
A1015F10
A1016010
0
0
0
0
1A36
4
A1016110
A1016210
A1016310
A1016410
0
0
0
0
1A37
4
A1016510
A1016610
A1016710
A1016810
0
0
0
0
1A38
4
A1016910
A1016A10
A1016B10
A1016C10
0
0
0
0
1A39
4
A1016D10
A1016E10
A1016F10
A1017010
0
0
0
0
1A3A
4
A1017110
A1017210
A1017310
A1017410
0
0
0
0
A1017610
A1017710
A1017810
0
0
0
0
A1020110
A1020210
A1020310
A1020410
0
0
0
0
1A3D
4
A1020510
A1020610
A1020710
A1020810
0
0
0
0
1A3E
4
A1020910
A1020A10
A1020B10
A1020C10
0
0
0
0
1A3F
4
A1020D10
A1020E10
A1020F10
A1021010
0
0
0
0
1A40
4
A1021110
A1021210
A1021310
A1021410
0
0
0
0
1A41
4
A1021510
A1021610
A1021710
A1021810
0
0
0
0
1A42
4
A1021910
A1021A10
A1021B10
A1021C10
0
0
0
0
1A43
4
A1021D10
A1021E10
A1021F10
A1022010
0
0
0
0
1A44
4
A1022110
A1022210
A1022310
A1022410
0
0
0
0
1A45
4
A1022510
A1022610
A1022710
A1022810
0
0
0
0
1A46
4
A1022910
A1022A10
A1022B10
A1022C10
0
0
0
0
1A47
4
A1022D10
A1022E10
A1022F10
A1023010
0
0
0
0
1A48
4
A1023110
A1023210
A1023310
A1023410
0
0
0
0
1A49
4
A1023510
A1023610
A1023710
A1023810
0
0
0
0
1A4A
4
A1023910
A1023A10
A1023B10
A1023C10
0
0
0
0
4
A1023D10
A1023E10
A1023F10
A1024010
0
0
0
0
4
A1024110
A1024210
A1024310
A1024410
0
0
0
0
1A4D
4
A1024510
A1024610
A1024710
A1024810
0
0
0
0
1A4E
4
A1024910
A1024A10
A1024B10
A1024C10
0
0
0
0
1A4F
4
A1024D10
A1024E10
A1024F10
A1025010
0
0
0
0
1A50 to 1B78
Reserved
6
7
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
1A4B
1A4C
5
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
A1017510
4
4
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
4
3
Introduction of
Functions
1A3B
1A3C
2
Wiring
H02
RW
Installation
H01
RW
Specifications
H00
RW
Introduction
Index
(hex)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
41
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Table 5.5: Mode 417 RPDO communication Parameter
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Index
(hex)
42
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
H03
RW
1400
5
1401
2
1402
H04
-
H05
RW
80000000
FF
0
501
FF *1)
Reserved
Reserved
0
2
502
FF *1)
Reserved
1403
2
503
FF *1)
Reserved
1404
2
504
FF *1)
Reserved
1405
2
505
FF *1)
Reserved
1406
2
506
FF *1)
Reserved
1407
2
507
FF *1)
Reserved
1408
2
508
FF *1)
Reserved
1409
2
509
FF *1)
Reserved
140A
2
50A
FF *1)
Reserved
140B
2
50B
FF *1)
Reserved
140C
2
50C
FF *1)
Reserved
140D
2
50D
FF *1)
Reserved
140E
2
50E
FF *1)
Reserved
140F
2
50F
FF *1)
Reserved
1410
2
510
FF *1)
Reserved
1411
2
511
FF *1)
Reserved
1412
2
512
FF *1)
Reserved
1413
2
513
FF *1)
Reserved
1414
2
514
FF *1)
Reserved
1415
2
515
FF *1)
Reserved
1416
2
516
FF *1)
Reserved
1417
2
517
FF *1)
Reserved
1418
2
518
FF *1)
Reserved
1419
2
519
FF *1)
Reserved
141A
2
51A
FF *1)
Reserved
141B
2
51B
FF *1)
Reserved
141C
2
51C
FF *1)
Reserved
141D
2
51D
FF *1)
Reserved
141E
2
51E
FF *1)
Reserved
141F
2
51F
FF *1)
Reserved
1420
2
520
FF *1)
Reserved
1421
2
521
FF *1)
Reserved
1422
2
522
FF *1)
Reserved
1423
2
523
FF *1)
Reserved
1424
2
524
FF *1)
Reserved
1425
2
525
FF *1)
Reserved
1426
2
526
FF *1)
Reserved
1427
2
527
FF *1)
Reserved
1428
2
528
FF *1)
Reserved
1429
2
529
FF *1)
Reserved
142A
2
52A
FF *1)
Reserved
142B
2
52B
FF *1)
Reserved
142C
2
52C
FF *1)
Reserved
142D
2
52D
FF *1)
Reserved
142E
2
52E
FF *1)
Reserved
142F
2
52F
FF *1)
Reserved
1430
2
530
FF *1)
Reserved
1431
2
531
FF *1)
Reserved
1432
2
532
FF *1)
Reserved
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
1433
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
2
533
FF *1)
H03
RW
H04
-
Introduction
Index
(hex)
H05
RW
Reserved
2
534
FF *1)
Reserved
2
535
FF *1)
Reserved
1436
2
536
FF *1)
Reserved
Reserved
2
537
FF *1)
2
538
FF *1)
Reserved
1439
2
539
FF *1)
Reserved
143A
2
53A
FF *1)
Reserved
143B
2
53B
FF *1)
Reserved
143C
2
53C
FF *1)
Reserved
143D
2
53D
FF *1)
Reserved
143E
2
53E
FF *1)
Reserved
143F
2
53F
FF *1)
Reserved
1440
2
540
FF *1)
Reserved
1441
2
541
FF *1)
Reserved
2
542
FF *1)
Reserved
2
543
FF *1)
Reserved
Reserved
1444
2
544
FF *1)
1445
2
545
FF *1)
Reserved
1446
2
546
FF *1)
Reserved
1447
2
547
FF *1)
Reserved
548
FF *1)
Reserved
549
FF *1)
Reserved
144A
2
54A
FF *1)
Reserved
144B
2
54B
FF *1)
Reserved
144C
2
54C
FF *1)
Reserved
144D
2
54D
FF *1)
Reserved
144E
2
54E
FF *1)
Reserved
144F
2
54F
FF *1)
Reserved
1450
2
550
FF *1)
Reserved
Reserved
2
551
FF *1)
2
552
FF *1)
Reserved
1453
2
553
FF *1)
Reserved
1454
2
554
FF *1)
Reserved
1455
2
555
FF *1)
Reserved
1456
2
556
FF *1)
Reserved
1457
2
557
FF *1)
Reserved
558
FF *1)
Reserved
559
FF *1)
Reserved
145A
2
55A
FF *1)
Reserved
145B
2
55B
FF *1)
Reserved
145C
2
55C
FF *1)
Reserved
145D
2
55D
FF *1)
Reserved
145E
2
55E
FF *1)
Reserved
145F
2
55F
FF *1)
Reserved
Reserved
1460
2
560
FF *1)
1461
2
561
FF *1)
Reserved
1462
2
562
FF *1)
Reserved
1463
2
563
FF *1)
Reserved
2
564
FF *1)
Reserved
2
565
FF *1)
Reserved
1466
2
566
FF *1)
Reserved
1467
2
567
FF *1)
Reserved
9
10
Command
Interface
1464
1465
8
CAN Layer 2
Mode
2
2
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
1458
1459
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1451
1452
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
2
2
5
Introduction of
Functions
1448
1449
4
Wiring
1442
1443
3
Installation
1437
1438
2
Specifications
1434
1435
43
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Index
(hex)
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
1468
2
568
FF *1)
Reserved
H04
-
1469
2
569
FF *1)
Reserved
146A
2
56A
FF *1)
Reserved
146B
2
56B
FF *1)
Reserved
146C
2
56C
FF *1)
Reserved
146D
2
56D
FF *1)
Reserved
146E
2
56E
FF *1)
Reserved
146F
2
56F
FF *1)
Reserved
1470
2
570
FF *1)
Reserved
1471
2
571
FF *1)
Reserved
1472
2
572
FF *1)
Reserved
1473
2
573
FF *1)
Reserved
Reserved
1474
2
574
FF *1)
1475
2
575
FF *1)
Reserved
1476
2
576
FF *1)
Reserved
1477
2
577
FF *1)
Reserved
1478
2
578
FF *1)
Reserved
1479
2
579
FF *1)
Reserved
147A
2
57A
FF *1)
Reserved
147B
2
57B
FF *1)
Reserved
147C
2
57C
FF *1)
Reserved
147D
2
57D
FF *1)
Reserved
147E
2
57E
FF *1)
Reserved
147F
2
57F
FF *1)
1480
44
H03
RW
H05
RW
Reserved
Reserved
1481
5
481
FF
0
Reserved
0
1482
5
482
FF
0
Reserved
0
1483
5
483
FF
0
Reserved
0
1484
5
484
FF
0
Reserved
0
1485
5
485
FF
0
Reserved
0
1486
5
486
FF
0
Reserved
0
1487
5
487
FF
0
Reserved
0
1488
5
488
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
1489
5
489
FF
0
Reserved
148A
5
48A
FF
0
Reserved
0
148B
5
48B
FF
0
Reserved
0
148C
5
48C
FF
0
Reserved
0
148D
5
48D
FF
0
Reserved
0
148E
5
48E
FF
0
Reserved
0
148F
5
48F
FF
0
Reserved
0
1490
5
490
FF
0
Reserved
0
1491
5
491
FF
0
Reserved
0
1492
5
492
FF
0
Reserved
0
1493
5
493
FF
0
Reserved
0
1494
5
494
FF
0
Reserved
0
1495
5
495
FF
0
Reserved
0
1496
5
496
FF
0
Reserved
0
1497
5
497
FF
0
Reserved
0
1498
5
498
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
1499
5
499
FF
0
Reserved
149A
5
49A
FF
0
Reserved
0
149B
5
49B
FF
0
Reserved
0
149C
5
49C
FF
0
Reserved
0
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
H03
RW
H04
-
H05
RW
149D
5
49D
FF
0
Reserved
0
149E
5
49E
FF
0
Reserved
0
149F
5
49F
FF
0
Reserved
0
14A0
5
4A0
FF
0
Reserved
0
14A1
5
4A1
FF
0
Reserved
0
14A2
5
4A2
FF
0
Reserved
0
14A3
5
4A3
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4A4
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4A5
FF
0
Reserved
0
14A6
5
4A6
FF
0
Reserved
0
14A7
5
4A7
FF
0
Reserved
0
14A8
5
4A8
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4A9
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4AA
FF
0
Reserved
0
14AB
5
4AB
FF
0
Reserved
0
14AC
5
4AC
FF
0
Reserved
0
14AD
5
4AD
FF
0
Reserved
0
14AE
5
4AE
FF
0
Reserved
0
14AF
5
4AF
FF
0
Reserved
0
14B0
5
4B0
FF
0
Reserved
0
14B1
5
4B1
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4B2
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4B3
FF
0
Reserved
0
14B4
5
4B4
FF
0
Reserved
0
14B5
5
4B5
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4B6
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4B7
FF
0
Reserved
0
14B8
5
4B8
FF
0
Reserved
0
14B9
5
4B9
FF
0
Reserved
0
14BA
5
4BA
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4BB
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
4BC
FF
0
Reserved
0
14BD
5
4BD
FF
0
Reserved
0
14BE
5
4BE
FF
0
Reserved
0
14BF
5
4BF
FF
0
Reserved
0
14C0
5
4C0
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
188
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
14C1 to 1500
1501
Reserved
5
183
FF
1504
Reserved
1505
5
181
FF
0
Reserved
0
1506
5
18C
FF
0
Reserved
0
1507
5
18D
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
9
Reserved
5
201
FF
0
Reserved
5
205
FF
0
Reserved
0
150C
5
202
FF
0
Reserved
0
150D
5
206
FF
0
Reserved
0
150E
5
203
FF
0
Reserved
0
150F
5
207
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
198
FF
0
Reserved
0
1510
10
Command
Interface
150A
150B
CAN Layer 2
Mode
1508 to 1509
1511
8
Reserved
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
1502
1503
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
14BB
14BC
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
14B6
14B7
5
Introduction of
Functions
14B2
14B3
4
Wiring
14A9
14AA
3
Installation
14A4
14A5
2
Specifications
H00
R
Introduction
Index
(hex)
Reserved
45
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Index
(hex)
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
1512
1513
H04
-
H05
RW
0
Reserved
0
Reserved
5
193
FF
1514
Reserved
1515
5
191
FF
0
Reserved
0
1516
5
19C
FF
0
Reserved
0
1517
5
19D
FF
0
Reserved
0
1518 to 1519
Reserved
151A
5
211
FF
0
Reserved
0
151B
5
215
FF
0
Reserved
0
151C
5
212
FF
0
Reserved
0
151D
5
216
FF
0
Reserved
0
151E
5
213
FF
0
Reserved
0
151F
5
217
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1520
1521
Reserved
5
1A8
FF
1522
1523
Reserved
5
1A3
FF
1525
5
1A1
FF
0
Reserved
0
1526
5
1AC
FF
0
Reserved
0
1527
5
1AD
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1524
Reserved
1528 to 1529
152A
Reserved
5
221
FF
152B
5
225
FF
0
Reserved
0
152C
5
222
FF
0
Reserved
0
152D
5
226
FF
0
Reserved
0
152E
5
223
FF
0
Reserved
0
152F
5
227
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
1B8
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1530
1531
Reserved
1532
1533
Reserved
5
1B3
FF
1534
Reserved
1535
5
1B1
FF
0
Reserved
0
1536
5
1BC
FF
0
Reserved
0
1537
5
1BD
FF
0
Reserved
0
1538 to 1539
Reserved
153A
5
231
FF
0
Reserved
0
153B
5
235
FF
0
Reserved
0
153C
5
232
FF
0
Reserved
0
153D
5
236
FF
0
Reserved
0
153E
5
233
FF
0
Reserved
0
153F
5
237
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1540
1541
Reserved
5
1C8
FF
1542
1543
Reserved
5
1C3
FF
1544
Reserved
1545
5
1C1
FF
0
Reserved
0
1546
5
1CC
FF
0
Reserved
0
1547
5
1CD
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1548 to 1549
154A
46
H03
RW
Reserved
5
241
FF
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
154B
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
H03
RW
H04
-
H05
RW
5
245
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
242
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
246
FF
0
Reserved
0
154E
5
243
FF
0
Reserved
0
154F
5
247
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1550
1551
Reserved
5
1D8
FF
5
1D3
FF
1552
1553
Reserved
3
Reserved
1555
5
1D1
FF
0
Reserved
0
1556
5
1DC
FF
0
Reserved
0
1557
5
1DD
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1558 to 1559
Installation
1554
155A
2
Specifications
154C
154D
Introduction
Index
(hex)
Reserved
5
251
FF
4
5
255
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
252
FF
0
Reserved
0
155D
5
256
FF
0
Reserved
0
155E
5
253
FF
0
Reserved
0
155F
5
257
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
Introduction of
Functions
Wiring
155B
155C
1560
1561
Reserved
5
1E8
FF
1562
1563
Reserved
5
1E3
FF
1564
Reserved
5
1E1
FF
0
Reserved
0
1566
5
1EC
FF
0
Reserved
0
1567
5
1ED
FF
0
Reserved
0
156A
5
261
FF
0
Reserved
0
156B
5
265
FF
0
Reserved
0
156C
5
262
FF
0
Reserved
0
156D
5
266
FF
0
Reserved
0
156E
5
263
FF
0
Reserved
0
156F
5
267
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1568 to 1569
Reserved
Reserved
5
1F8
FF
1572
5
1F3
FF
1575
5
1F1
FF
0
Reserved
0
1576
5
1FC
FF
0
Reserved
0
1577
5
1FD
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1574
Reserved
1578 to 1579
5
271
FF
157B
5
275
FF
0
Reserved
0
157C
5
272
FF
0
Reserved
0
157D
5
276
FF
0
Reserved
0
157E
5
273
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
277
FF
0
Reserved
0
1580
5
18E
FF
0
Reserved
0
1581
5
18F
FF
0
Reserved
0
10
Command
Interface
157F
1582 to 158F
9
Reserved
CAN Layer 2
Mode
157A
8
Reserved
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
1573
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1570
1571
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
1565
Reserved
47
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
Index
(hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
H03
RW
H04
-
H05
RW
1590
5
19E
FF
0
Reserved
0
1591
5
19F
FF
0
Reserved
0
1592 to 159F
Reserved
15A0
5
1AE
FF
0
Reserved
0
15A1
5
1AF
FF
0
Reserved
0
15B0
5
1BE
FF
0
Reserved
0
15B1
5
1BF
FF
0
Reserved
0
15A2 to 15AF
Reserved
15B2 to 15BF
Reserved
15C0
5
1CE
FF
0
Reserved
0
15C1
5
1CF
FF
0
Reserved
0
15C2 to 15CF
Reserved
15D0
5
1DE
FF
0
Reserved
0
15D1
5
1DF
FF
0
Reserved
0
15E0
5
1EE
FF
0
Reserved
0
15E1
5
1EF
FF
0
Reserved
0
15F0
5
1FE
FF
0
Reserved
0
15F1
5
1FF
FF
0
Reserved
0
15D2 to 15DF
Reserved
15E2 to 15EF
Reserved
Table 5.6: Mode 417 RPDO mapping Parameter part 1
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Index
(hex)
1600
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
RW
H01
RW
H02
RW
H03
RW
H04
RW
H05
RW
H06
RW
H07
RW
H08
RW
4
A5800110
A5800210
A5800310
A5800410
0
0
0
0
Table 5.7: Mode 417 RPDO mapping Parameter part 2
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Index
(hex)
1601 to 167F
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
R
01
60110030
02
64820108
64800110
Reserved
Reserved
04
64010010
64040008
00050008
64330020
Reserved
1705
01
64060020
Reserved
1706
01
63830120
Reserved
1707
01
63830220
Reserved
170A
02
63010110
170B
01
63100108
1708 to 1709
48
Reserved
Reserved
1704
Reserved
170C
02
63010210
170D
01
63100208
170E
02
63010310
170F
01
63100308
1710
H05 to H08
-
Reserved
1702
1703
H04
R
Reserved
16C1 to 1700
1701
H03
R
FF
1680
1681 to 16C0
H02
R
63020110
Reserved
Reserved
63020210
Reserved
Reserved
63020310
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
1711
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
R
H02
R
02
6C820108
6C800110
04
6C010010
6C040008
1712
1713
H03
R
H04
R
Reserved
Reserved
00050008
6C330020
1715
01
6C060020
Reserved
1716
01
6B830120
Reserved
1717
01
6B830220
Reserved
171A
02
6B010110
171B
01
6B100108
1718 to 1719
Reserved
02
6B010210
01
6B100208
171E
02
6B010310
171F
01
6B100308
1720
6B020110
Reserved
Reserved
6B020310
Reserved
Reserved
74820108
74800110
Reserved
Reserved
04
74010010
74040008
00050008
74330020
74060020
Reserved
01
73830120
Reserved
1727
01
73830220
1728 to 1729
Reserved
Reserved
172A
02
73010110
172B
01
73100108
02
73010210
01
73100208
172E
02
73010310
172F
01
73100308
1730
73020110
Reserved
Reserved
73020210
73020310
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
02
7C820108
1732
7C800110
Reserved
Reserved
7C010010
1735
01
7C060020
Reserved
1736
01
7B830120
Reserved
1737
01
7B830220
1734
7C040008
00050008
7C330020
Reserved
Reserved
1738 to 1739
Reserved
8
Reserved
7B010110
173B
01
7B100108
173C
02
7B010210
173D
01
7B100208
173E
02
7B010310
173F
01
7B100308
Reserved
Reserved
7B020210
Reserved
Reserved
7B020310
Reserved
9
Reserved
Reserved
02
84820108
1742
84800110
Reserved
Reserved
04
84010010
1744
84040008
00050008
84330020
Reserved
Reserved
01
84060020
Reserved
1746
01
83830120
Reserved
1747
01
83830220
10
Command
Interface
1745
CAN Layer 2
Mode
1740
7B020110
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
02
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
04
1748 to 1749
6
Reserved
Reserved
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
172C
172D
1743
5
Introduction of
Functions
01
1726
1741
Reserved
Reserved
1725
173A
Wiring
02
1724
1733
4
Reserved
1722
1731
3
Reserved
Reserved
6B020210
2
Installation
171C
171D
1723
Reserved
Reserved
Specifications
1714
1721
H05 to H08
-
Introduction
Index
(hex)
Reserved
Reserved
49
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Index
(hex)
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
R
H02
R
174A
02
83010110
83020110
174B
01
83100108
174C
02
83010210
174D
01
83100208
174E
02
83010310
174F
01
83100308
1750
1751
02
8C820108
Reserved
Reserved
83020210
Reserved
Reserved
83020310
Reserved
Reserved
8C800110
Reserved
04
8C010010
8C040008
00050008
8C330020
01
8C060020
Reserved
1756
01
8B830120
Reserved
1757
01
8B830220
1758 to 1759
Reserved
Reserved
175A
02
8B010110
175B
01
8B100108
175C
02
8B010210
175D
01
8B100208
8B020110
8B020210
Reserved
Reserved
02
8B010310
175F
01
8B100308
02
94820108
94800110
04
94010010
94040008
1760
Reserved
Reserved
175E
8B020310
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1762
1763
Reserved
Reserved
1764
00050008
94330020
01
94060020
Reserved
1766
01
93830120
Reserved
1767
01
93830220
1768 to 1769
Reserved
Reserved
176A
02
93010110
176B
01
93100108
176C
02
93010210
176D
01
93100208
176E
02
93010310
176F
01
93100308
02
9C820108
1770
93020110
Reserved
Reserved
93020210
Reserved
Reserved
93020310
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1772
1773
Reserved
Reserved
1765
1771
Reserved
Reserved
1755
1761
H05 to H08
-
Reserved
1754
9C800110
Reserved
Reserved
04
9C010010
1774
9C040008
00050008
9C330020
Reserved
1775
01
9C060020
Reserved
1776
01
9B830120
Reserved
1777
01
9B830220
Reserved
177A
02
9B010110
177B
01
9B100108
1778 to 1779
50
H04
R
Reserved
1752
1753
H03
R
Reserved
177C
02
9B010210
177D
01
9B100208
9B020110
Reserved
Reserved
9B020210
Reserved
Reserved
177E
02
9B010310
177F
01
9B100308
9B020310
Reserved
Reserved
1780
01
63830320
Reserved
1781
01
63830420
Reserved
Reserved
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
R
1782 to 178F
H02
R
H03
R
H04
R
H05 to H08
-
Reserved
1790
01
6B830320
1791
01
6B830420
2
Reserved
Reserved
17A0
01
73830320
17A1
01
73830420
17A2 to 17AF
Specifications
1792 to 179F
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
17B0
01
7B830320
17B1
01
7B830420
Reserved
3
Reserved
Reserved
17C0
01
83830320
Reserved
17C1
01
83830420
Reserved
17D0
01
8B830320
Reserved
17D1
01
8B830420
Reserved
17E0
01
93830320
17E1
01
93830420
17C2 to 17CF
Installation
17B2 to 17BF
Reserved
4
Wiring
17D2 to 17DF
Reserved
17E2 to 17EF
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
17F0
01
9B830320
Reserved
17F1
01
9B830420
Reserved
5
Introduction of
Functions
Table 5.8: Mode 417 TPDO communication Parameter
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
H03
RW
0
1800
5
80000000
FF
1801
2
500 + Node Id
FF *1)
5
40000400
FF
1802 to 18FF
C0000182
FF
5
C0000180
FF
5
C0000200
FF
1912
5
C0000192
FF
5
C0000190
FF
5
C0000210
FF
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
8
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
9
C00001A2
FF
5
C00001A0
FF
Reserved
Reserved
5
C0000220
FF
10
Reserved
5
C00001B2
FF
Command
Interface
1933
0
CAN Layer 2
Mode
5
1929 to 1931
1932
0
Reserved
1925 to 1927
1928
Reserved
Reserved
1923
1924
7
0
Reserved
1919 to 1921
1922
0
Reserved
1915 to 1917
1918
Reserved
Reserved
1913
1914
0
Reserved
1909 to 1911
6
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
5
1905 to 1907
1908
0
Reserved
1903
1904
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1901
1902
H05
RW
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1900
H04
-
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Index
(hex)
Introduction
Index
(hex)
Reserved
51
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
Index
(hex)
1934
H00
R
H01
RW
H02
RW *1)/R
H03
RW
H04
-
H05
RW
5
C00001B0
FF
0
Reserved
0
5
C0000230
FF
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
1935 to 1937
Reserved
1938
1939 to 1941
Reserved
1942
5
C00001C2
FF
1943
Reserved
1944
5
C00001C0
FF
5
C0000240
FF
1945 to 1947
Reserved
1948
1949 to 1951
Reserved
1952
5
C00001D2
FF
1953
Reserved
1954
5
C00001D0
FF
1955 to 1957
Reserved
1958
5
C0000250
FF
1959 to 1961
Reserved
1962
5
C00001E2
FF
5
C00001E0
FF
1963
Reserved
1964
1965 to 1967
Reserved
1968
5
C0000260
FF
1969 to 1971
Reserved
1972
5
C00001F2
FF
5
C00001F0
FF
1973
Reserved
1974
1975 to 1977
Reserved
1978
5
C0000270
FF
Table 5.9: Mode 417 TPDO mapping Parameter part 1
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Index
(hex)
1A00
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
RW
H01
RW
H02
RW
H03
RW
H04
RW
H05
RW
H06
RW
H07
RW
H08
RW
4
A1000110
A1000210
A1000310
A1000410
0
0
0
0
H06
R
H07
R
H08
R
Table 5.10: Mode 417 TPDO mapping Parameter part 2
R: Read access, W: Write access, Reserved: Not existing Index or Sub-index
Index
(hex)
1A01
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
R
H02
R
H03
R
FF
Reserved
01
60110030
Reserved
1B01
1B02
Reserved
04
64000010
64030008
67FE0008
1B03
1B04
02
64200020
64230020
1B13
52
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
04
63000110
63000210
63000310
63000410
04
6C000010
6C300008
67FE0008
6C000020
1B09 to 1B11
1B12
64300020
Reserved
1B05 to 1B07
1B08
H05
R
Reserved
1A02 to 1AFF
1B00
H04
R
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
1B14
Default value of Sub-Index (hex)
H00
R
H01
R
H02
R
02
6C000020
6C300020
04
6B000110
6B000210
H03
R
74000010
74030008
67FE0008
02
74200020
74230020
04
73000110
73000210
7C000010
7C300008
67FE0008
02
7C000020
Reserved
7B000110
7B000210
7C000310
7C000410
04
84000010
84030008
67FE0008
84300020
02
84200020
84230020
83000110
83000210
83000310
83000410
04
8C000010
8C300008
87FE0008
8C000020
02
8C000020
8C300020
Reserved
Reserved
6
Reserved
8B000110
8B000210
8C000310
8C000410
Reserved
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
04
Reserved
04
94000010
94030008
67FE0008
94300020
Reserved
Reserved
02
94200020
94230020
Reserved
7
Reserved
93000110
93000210
93000310
93000410
04
9C000010
9C300008
67FE0008
9C000020
Reserved
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
04
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
02
9C000020
9C300020
Reserved
1B75 to 1B77
8
Reserved
04
9B000110
9B000210
9C000310
9C000410
Reserved
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
1B78
Reserved
Reserved
1B73
1B74
Introduction of
Functions
04
1B69 to 1B71
1B72
5
Reserved
Reserved
1B65 to 1B67
1B68
Reserved
Reserved
1B63
1B64
Reserved
Reserved
1B59 to 1B61
1B62
4
Reserved
Wiring
04
1B55 to 1B57
1B58
Reserved
Reserved
1B53
1B54
7C000020
7C300020
1B49 to 1B51
1B52
3
Reserved
Reserved
1B45 to 1B47
1B48
73000410
Installation
04
1B43
1B44
Reserved
Reserved
1B39 to 1B41
1B42
74300020
Reserved
73000310
1B35 to 1B37
1B38
2
Reserved
Reserved
1B33
1B34
6C000410
Reserved
1B29 to 1B31
1B32
H08
R
Specifications
04
1B25 to 1B27
1B28
H07
R
Reserved
1B23
1B24
H06
R
Reserved
6C000310
1B19 to 1B21
1B22
H05
R
Reserved
1B15 to 1B17
1B18
H04
R
Introduction
Index
(hex)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
53
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6.1
5.6 Communication Profile Area
CAN-ID / COB-ID
Each message type on each device has a unique 11-bit identifier for bus arbitration and identification on the
CAN bus. The lowest CAN-ID wins the bus arbitration. CAN-IDs with lower priority (higher CAN-ID) will wait
until the bus is free.
For easier configuration, one CAN-ID scheme exists for all CANopen® devices. By default four TPDO and
four RPDO are reserved for every Node-ID. To use more PDO for one node, it is necessary to use CAN-IDs
of other nodes.
11-bit Identifier
0 to 8 Data Bytes
Bit 10 ... 7
Bit 6 ... 0
Function Code*1
*1.
CAN Message
Node-ID
11-bit CAN-ID
Function code is shown below.
1. Broadcast objects (Node-ID = 0)
COB
Function Code (Binary)
Resulting CAN-ID
NMT
0000b
H0
SYNC
0001b
H80
TIME
0010b
H100
2. Peer-to-peer objects (Node-ID = 1 to 127)
COB
Function Code (Binary)
Resulting CAN-ID
EMCY
0001b
H81 to HFF
H181 to H1FF
TPDO1
0011b
RPDO1
0100b
H201 to H27F
TPDO2
0101b
H281 to H2FF
RPDO2
0110b
H301 to H37F
TPDO3
0111b
H381 to H3FF
RPDO3
1000b
H401 to H47F
H481 to H4FF
TPDO4
1001b
RPDO4
1010b
H501 to H57F
TSDO
1011b
H581 to H5FF
RSDO
1100b
H601 to H67F
NMT error control
1110b
H701 to H77F
3. Restricted CAN-IDs
In a self defined CAN-ID scheme, use of the following CAN-IDs are restricted and shall not be used as a
CAN-ID by any configurable communication object.
CAN-ID (hex)
54
Used by COB
0
NMT
1 to 7F
Reserved
101 to 180
Reserved
581 to 5FF
Default TSDO
601 to 67F
Default RSDO
6E0 to 6FF
Reserved
701 to 77F
NMT Error Control
780 to 7FF
Reserved
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Error Register
The object H1001 provides error information. The CANopen® device maps internal errors into this object. It is
a part of the emergency object.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Manufacturer
specific*1
H0
Device
profile
specific
Communication
error (overrun,
error state)*1
Temperature
Voltage
Current
Generic
error*1
3
Used by the FX3U-CAN Firmware.
5.6.3
Pre-defined error field
This object H1003 provides the errors that occurred on the module and were signalled via the emergency
object.
SDO
Client
Server
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
An SDO provides direct access to object entries of a CANopen® device's object dictionary. These object
entries may contain data of arbitrary size and data type. SDO is used to transfer multiple data sets from a
client to a server and vice versa. The client controls which data set to transfer via a multiplexer (index and
sub-index of the object dictionary). By using the CIF, it is possible to make an SDO access to other
CANopen® devices or to the FX3U-CAN itself. In the Object Dictionary, no configuration needed.
For CIF, refer to Chapter 10
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
2) Sub-index H01 to H0F: Standard error fields
List of the last 15 EMCY Errors sent by FX3U-CAN. Sub-index H01 contains the newest Message and
Sub-index H0F contains the oldest Message.
For Emergency error codes, refers to Section 6.23
5
Introduction of
Functions
1) Sub-index H00: Number of errors
The Sub-index H00 displays the number of errors that are recorded. Writing H0 to this Sub-index deletes
the entire history. Write values other than H0 are not allowed.
5.6.4
4
Wiring
The Generic error bit will always be set as long as the EMCY error code is bigger than H00FF.
The Error Register can be cleared by clearing the Pre-defined error field in object H1003.
All of these bits can be set by the Emergency message transmission command in the Command Interface.
For EMCY, refer to Subsection 5.6.13
For pre-defined error field, refer to Subsection 5.6.3
For emergency message transmission command, refer to Section 10.5
Installation
*1.
2
Specifications
7
Introduction
5.6.2
5.6 Communication Profile Area
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Request
Indication
Response
9
Confirmation
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
55
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6.5
5.6 Communication Profile Area
RPDO / TPDO
Real-time data transfer is performed by means of Process Data Objects (PDO). PDO transfer is performed
with no protocol overhead.
PDOs correspond to objects in the object dictionary and provide the interface to the application objects. Data
type and mapping of application objects into a PDO is determined by a corresponding default PDO mapping
structure within the object dictionary. The variable mapping of PDO and the mapping of application objects
into a PDO may be transmitted to a CANopen® device during the configuration process by applying the SDO
services to the corresponding objects of the object dictionary.
The PDO communication parameter describes the communication capabilities of the PDO. The PDO
mapping parameter contains information about the contents of the PDO.
PDO producer
PDO consumers
Inhibit time
Request
Process data
0<L≤8
Request
Process data : L bytes of application data
Indication
Indication
Indication
With the transmission type Parameter, two transmission modes are configurable:
• Synchronous transmission
• Event-driven transmission
Use the following procedure to change the PDO communication or mapping parameter:
1) The PDO must be set to invalid (Communication Parameter Sub-index H01 bit 31).
2) Set the communication Parameters
3) Set the mapping Parameters
- Set Sub-Index H00 to the value H00.
- Modify the mapping at Sub-Indexes H01 to H08.
- Enable the mapping by setting the Sub-index H00 to the number of mapped objects.
4) Set the PDO to valid (Communication Parameter Sub-index H01 bit 31).
For unneeded data in an RPDO, a dummy mapping entry can be made to the data type definition Indexes to
make the RPDO length fit the length of the TPDO accordingly.
For data type definitions indexes, refer to Section 5.5
56
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
Introduction
1. Object H1400 to H144F
1) Sub-index H01: RPDO COB-ID
31
30
29
28 ... 11
10 ... 0
Valid
Reserved
H0
H0000
11-bit CAN-ID
Item
Description
Bit 0 to 10
11-bit CAN-ID
11-bit CAN-ID of the CAN base frame
For COB-ID, refer to Subsection 5.6.1
Bit 11 to 28
-
Bit 11 to 28 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 29
-
Bit 29 fixed to OFF (0).
Specifications
Bit No.
2
3
Bit 30
Bit 31
Installation
Reserved
This bit fixed to OFF (0).
OFF (0): Valid
ON (1): Invalid
Valid
2) Sub-index H02: RPDO transmission type
4
Description
00 to F0
Synchronous
Received PDO data will be processed after the next SYNC message,
independent of the transmission rate specified by the transmission type.
F1 to FD
Reserved
FE
Event-driven (Function Mode 405)
FF
Event-driven (Function Mode 417)
Wiring
Value (hex)
5
2. Object H1600 to H164F Sub-index H01 to H08: RPDO mapping parameter
The default mapping is to unsigned 16 bit objects.
Refer to Subsection 7.1.2
15 ... 8
7 ... 0
Index
Sub-index
Length
Item
Description
Index of the mapped Object
Sub-index
Sub-index of the mapped Object
Length
Bit length of the mapped Object
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Example:
To map the first unsigned 16bit data of RPDO1 to BFM0, set Index H1600 Sub-index H01 to HA5800110.
This stands for Object Dictionary Index HA580, Sub-index H01 and a data size of 16bit.
Index
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
31 ... 16
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
4) Sub-index H05: RPDO event-timer
The RPDO event timer is used for deadline monitoring.
When the time elapsed without receiving an event driven object (transmission type is set to HFE or HFF)
an EMCY with the error code H8250 will be sent.
The value is a multiple of 1ms. The value 0 disables the event-timer.
For emergency error code, refer to Section 6.23
Introduction of
Functions
3) Sub-index H03: RPDO inhibit time
For RPDOs, the inhibit time has no function.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
57
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
3. Object H1800 to H184F
1) Sub-index H01: TPDO COB-ID
Bit No.
31
30
29
28 ... 11
10 ... 0
Valid
RTR
H0
H00000
11-bit CAN-ID
Item
Description
Bit 0 to 10
11-bit CAN-ID
11-bit CAN-ID of the CAN base frame
For COB-ID, refer to Subsection 5.6.1
Bit 11 to 28
-
Bit 11 to 28 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 29
-
Bit 29 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 30
RTR
Bit 31
valid
OFF (0):
ON (1):
Remote transmission request (RTR) allowed
Remote transmission request (RTR) not allowed
This bit is constantly set to ON in the FX3U-CAN.
OFF (0):
ON (1):
Valid
Invalid
2) Sub-index H02: TPDO transmission type
00
Synchronous (acyclic)
The PDO will be transmitted once (acyclic) after occurrence of the SYNC
if an event occurred before the SYNC.
01
Synchronous (cyclic every SYNC)
02
Synchronous (cyclic every 2nd SYNC)
03
Synchronous (cyclic every 3rd SYNC)
F0
F1 to FD
…...
Description
…...
Value (hex)
Synchronous (cyclic every 240th SYNC)
Reserved
FE
Event-driven (Function Mode 405)
FF
Event-driven (Function Mode 417)
3) Sub-index H03: TPDO inhibit time
This object configures the minimum time between two PDO transmissions if the transmission type is set
to HFE or HFF. PDO transmission request over BFM #20 will be dismissed during this time. Unit of this
value is 100 μs (FX3U-CAN counting resolution: 1 ms). The value 0 disables the inhibit time.
For BFM #20, refer to Section 6.4
4) Object H1800 to H184F Sub-index H05: TPDO event-timer
If the event timer elapses and an event driven transmission is not sent in that time (transmission type is
set to HFE or HFF), a message will be sent with the current value of the Object dictionary. Unit of this
value is ms. The value 0 disables the event-timer.
Note
If the inhibit time is active, no PDO will be transmitted.
58
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
The default mapping is to unsigned 16 bit objects.
Refer to Subsection 7.1.1
31 ... 16
15 ... 8
7 ... 0
Index
Sub-index
Length
2
Item
Description / set range
Sub-index of the mapped Object
Length
Bit length of the mapped Object
Timing chart
H0001
H5374
H2102
H3528
6
BFM #20 bit0
H0000
H0001
H5374
H2102
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
OD data
H3528
TPDO 1
Inhibit time
7
H0001
H5374
H2102
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
TPDO 1
Event timer
CAN Bus
TPDO 1
5
Introduction of
Functions
Example 1: Inhibit time = 0, Event time = 0
The BFM data will be copied into the Object dictionary and a PDO will be sent every time when the data are
changed and a data exchange is triggered. If the data are not changed, no PDO will be sent if a data
exchange is triggered by BFM #20.
4
Wiring
The following figures show the relation between Transmit Process Data BFM's (BFM data), BFM #20 bit 0,
PDO Inhibit time, PDO Event timer and CAN bus data in NMT state Operational for event driven PDO's.
Note that the event and inhibit timer are started every time when PDO transmission is started.
BFM data
3
Installation
Index of the mapped Object
Sub-index
Specifications
Example:
To map unsigned 16bit data of BFM0 to the first 16 bits of TPDO 1, set Index H1A00 Sub-index H01 to
HA1000110.
This stands for Object Dictionary Index HA100, Sub-index H01 and a data size of 16bit.
Index
Introduction
4. Object H1A00 to H1A4F Sub-index H01 to H08: TPDO mapping parameter
H3528
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
59
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Example 2: Inhibit time > 0, Event time = 0
The BFM data will be copied into the Object dictionary and a PDO will be sent every time when the data are
changed and the inhibit time is not running. If the inhibit time is active and the data are changed before the
inhibit time elapsed, the former data will not be sent as PDO.
• Before FX3U-CAN firmware version 1.10
If the data are not changed, no PDO will be sent if a data exchange is triggered by BFM #20.
• FX3U-CAN firmware version 1.10 or later
If a data exchange is triggered by BFM #20 and at the last data exchange the inhibit time was active, a
PDO will be sent, otherwise no PDO will be sent as long as the data did not change.
BFM data
H0001
H5374
H2102
H3528
BFM #20 bit0
OD data
H0000
H0001
H5374
H2102
H3528
TPDO1
Inhibit time
F/W < Ver. 1.10
TPDO1
Inhibit time
F/W >= Ver. 1.10
TPDO1
Event timer
CAN Bus
TPDO1
F/W < Ver. 1.10
H0001
H2102
CAN Bus
TPDO1
F/W >= Ver. 1.10
H0001
H2102
H3528
Example 3: Inhibit time = 0, Event time > 0
The BFM data will be copied into the Object dictionary and a PDO will be sent every time when the data are
changed. Even if no data exchange with new data is triggered by BFM #20, a PDO with the actual object
dictionary data will be sent when the event timer elapsed.
H0001
BFM data
H2102
H3528
BFM #20 bit0
OD data
H0000
H0001
H2102
H3528
TPDO1
Inhibit time
TPDO1
Event timer
CAN Bus
TPDO1
60
H0001
H0001
H2102
H2102
H3528
H3528
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
• Before FX3U-CAN firmware version 1.10
If the data are not changed, no PDO will be sent if a data exchange is triggered by BFM #20.
2
H0001
H5374
H2102
4
H3528
Wiring
BFM #20 bit0
OD data
3
Installation
If no data exchange with new data is triggered by BFM #20, a PDO with the actual object dictionary data will
be sent when the event timer elapsed and the inhibit time is not active.
The inhibit time in combination with the event timer allows new PDO data to be sent without the need to
retrigger the data exchange by BFM #20 for the case that during the first data exchange of new data the
inhibit time was active.
Specifications
• FX3U-CAN firmware version 1.10 or later
If a data exchange is triggered by BFM #20 and at the last data exchange the inhibit time was active, a
PDO will be sent, otherwise no PDO will be sent as long as the data did not change.
BFM data
1
Introduction
Example 4: Inhibit time > 0, Event time > 0, Inhibit time < Event time
The BFM data will be copied into the Object dictionary. A PDO will be sent every time when the data are
changed and the inhibit time is not running. If the inhibit time is active and the data are changed before the
inhibit time elapsed, the former data will not be sent as PDO.
H0000
H0001
H5374
H2102
H3528
5
Introduction of
Functions
TPDO1
Inhibit time
F/W < Ver. 1.10
TPDO1
Inhibit time
F/W >= Ver. 1.10
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
TPDO1
Event timer
F/W < Ver. 1.10
TPDO1
Event timer
F/W >= Ver. 1.10
7
H5374
CAN Bus
TPDO1
F/W >= Ver. 1.10
H0001
H5374
H3528
H2102
H3528
8
H3528
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
H0001
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
CAN Bus
TPDO1
F/W < Ver. 1.10
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
61
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Example 5: Inhibit time > 0, Event time > 0, Inhibit time > Event time
The BFM data will be copied into the Object dictionary and a PDO will be sent every time when the data are
changed and the inhibit time is not running. If the inhibit time is active and the data are changed before the
inhibit time elapsed, the former data will not be sent as PDO.
If the data are not changed, no PDO will be sent if a data exchanged is triggered by BFM #20.
If no data exchange with new data is triggered by BFM #20, a PDO with the actual object dictionary data will
be sent when the event timer elapsed and the inhibit time is not active. If the inhibit time is active the event
timer starts running again without a PDO being sent.
The inhibit time in combination with the event timer allows new PDO data to be sent without the need to
retrigger the data exchange by BFM #20 for the case that during the first data exchange of new data the
inhibit time was active.
BFM data
H0001
H5374
H3528
BFM #20 bit0
OD data
H0000
H0001
H5374
H3528
TPDO1
Inhibit time
TPDO1
Event timer
CAN Bus
TPDO1
62
H0001
H5374
H3528
H3528
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
MPDO
A Multiplexed PDO, like an SDO, provides direct write access to objects of a CANopen® device's object
dictionary. The size of the data of these objects is limited to a maximum of 4 bytes.
The MPDO service can only be used in the CiA® 417 Lift Application Mode and does not have to be
configured.
MPDO consumers
Request
3
Process data
Installation
Address data
2
Specifications
MPDO producer
Introduction
5.6.6
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Indication
Indication
Indication
4
Wiring
Process data:
Data less than 4 bytes is filled with H0 to make it 32 bits.
5
Introduction of
Functions
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
63
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6.7
5.6 Communication Profile Area
SYNC
The SYNC producer broadcasts the synchronization object periodically. The SYNC message provides the
basic network synchronization mechanism. The time period between SYNC messages is specified by the
standard parameter communication cycle period. There may be a time jitter in transmission by the SYNC
producer corresponding approximately to the latency from some other message being transmitted just before
the SYNC.
SYNC producer
SYNC consumers
Request
0 byte
Indication
Indication
Indication
SYNC Object
SYNC triggered PDO Objects
Time
Communication cyclic period
1. Object H1005: COB-ID SYNC message
In order to guarantee timely access to the network, the SYNC is given a very high priority CAN-ID.
For the COB-ID, refer to Subsection 5.6.1
Bit No.
31
30
29
26 ... 11
10 ... 0
X
gen.
H0
H00000
11-bit CAN-ID
Item
Description / set range
Bit 0 to 10
11-bit CAN-ID
11-bit CAN-ID of the CAN base frame
Bit 11 to 28
-
Bit 11 to 28 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 29
-
Bit 29 fixed to OFF (0).
OFF (0): Don't generate SYNC message
ON (1): Generate SYNC message
Bit 30
gen.
Bit 31
X
Note:
• The device needs to be active NMT Master to produce SYNC messages.
• The Index H1006 needs to be set to enable SYNC producing.
Do not care
2. Object H1006: Communication cycle period
This object provides the communication cycle period. This period defines the SYNC interval. The 32 bit value
is in units of μs (FX3U-CAN counting resolution: 1 ms).
The FX3U-CAN counting resolution is 1ms, values smaller than 1ms will be set internally to 1ms, values
starting from 1ms will be divided by 1000.
The value 0 disables SYNC producing. The module needs to be active NMT Master to produce SYNC
messages.
Setting range: K0 to K4,294,967,295
For NMT Master, refer to Subsection 5.8.5
64
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Node guarding
NMT master:
• The NMT master does not receive confirmation after the Guarding request within the node life time.
3
NMT slave:
• The NMT guarding slave did not receive the NMT master Guarding request polling for time set in H100C
and H100D.
• As Slave, the FX3U-CAN (firmware Ver. 1.10 or later) supports Node Guarding.
Use the heartbeat service for FX3U-CAN not supporting Node Guarding.
5
s
6
Indication
Confirmation
Response
t
s:
NMT slave state
4
Stopped
5
Operational
127 Pre-Operational
Toggle Bit
8
1. Slave Setting
2. Master Setting
1) Object H1F81: NMT slave assignment
65
10
Command
Interface
2) Object H100D: Life time factor
The 8bit life time factor value multiplied by the guard time gives the life time for which the NMT Master
has to send the guarding request. The value 0 disables life guarding.
Both Objects have to be set to activate Node guarding. The order in which Guard time and Life time factor
are set does not matter.
Applicable for FX3U-CAN firmware Ver. 1.10 or later.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
1) Object H100C: Guard time
The 16bit guard time in units of ms is the time limit for which the response must be sent. The value 0
disables life guarding.
Applicable for FX3U-CAN firmware Ver. 1.10 or later.
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
t:
s
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Request
H100D : Life time factor
t
H100C : Guard time
Confirmation
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
H1F81 : Guard time
Response
NMT Slave
Request
H1F81 : Retry factor
Indication
Introduction of
Functions
• Node guarding produces a high bus load. It is recommended to use heartbeat instead.
COB-ID = 1792 + Node-ID
4
Wiring
If a remote error occurred previously but the errors in the guarding protocol have disappeared, it will be
indicated that the remote error has been resolved through the NMT service node guarding event and the NMT
service life guarding event.
If Heartbeat is activated, the Node guarding settings will be ignored.
Note
Installation
• The response of the NMT guarding slave state does not match the expected state.
NMT Master
2
Specifications
This protocol is used to detect remote errors in the network. Each NMT slave serves one requests message
for the node guarding protocol.
The NMT master polls each NMT guarding slave at regular time intervals. This time-interval is called the
guard time and may be different for each NMT slave. The response of the NMT slave contains the NMT state
of that NMT slave. The node lifetime is given by guard time multiplied by lifetime factor. The node lifetime may
be different for each NMT slave. If the NMT slave has not been polled during its lifetime, a remote node error
is indicated through the NMT service life guarding event. A remote node error is indicated through the NMT
service node guarding event if:
Introduction
5.6.8
5.6 Communication Profile Area
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
Refer to Subsection 5.8.7
5.6.9
Heartbeat
The heartbeat protocol defines an error control service that does not use requests. A heartbeat producer
transmits a heartbeat message cyclically. One or more heartbeat consumers receive the indication. The
relationship between producer and consumer is configurable via the object dictionary. The heartbeat
consumer guards the reception of the heartbeat within the heartbeat consumer time. If the heartbeat is not
received within the heartbeat consumer time, a heartbeat event will be generated.
If the FX3U-CAN module is configured as Flying Master, Heartbeat producing and consuming is automatically
activated between it and other FX3U-CAN modules also set up as Flying Masters.
For Flying Master, refer to Subsection 5.8.11
Note
Heartbeat produces a high bus load, but only half that of node guarding.
Heartbeat consumers
Heartbeat producer
COB-ID = 1792 + Node-ID
Indication
s
Request
Indication
Indication
Indication
s
s:
Indication
Indication
H1016 : Consumer heartbeat time
H1017 : Producer heartbeat time
Request
NMT slave state
4
Stopped
5
Operational
127
Pre-Operational
0
Boot-Up Event
1. Object H1016 sub-index H01 to H7F: Consumer heartbeat time
The consumer heartbeat time object indicates the expected heartbeat cycle times. Monitoring of the heartbeat
producer starts after reception of the first heartbeat. The consumer heartbeat time should be higher than the
corresponding producer heartbeat time. Before reception of the first heartbeat, the status of the heartbeat
producer is unknown.
31 ... 24
23 ... 16
15 ... 0
H00
Node-ID
Heartbeat time
If the heartbeat time is 0 or the node-ID is 0 or greater than 127, the corresponding object entry is not used.
The unit of heartbeat time is ms.
2. Object H1017: Producer heartbeat time
The unit of 16bit producer heartbeat time is ms. The value 0 disables the producer heartbeat.
66
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
3
Installation
TIME producer
2
Specifications
The TIME producer broadcasts the time stamp object. This TIME provides the simple network clock. The time
stamp contains the Time of day, which is represented by a 48 bit sequence. These sequences represent the
time in milliseconds after midnight (28 bits) and the number of days since 1984-01-01 (16 bits). Only one
Timestamp producer is allowed in the Network.
The time and the date have to be configured by setting BFM #51 to #57 (clock data).
In order to guarantee timely access to the network, the TIME is given a very high priority CAN-ID. CANopen®
devices that operate a local clock may use the TIME object to adjust their own time base to that of the time
stamp object producer.
The consuming and producing setting can be directly changed by BFM #50.
In case of time overflow (time later than 31st December 2099 23:59.59), the time returns to 1st January 2000
00:00:00. Buffer memory display for year will be 00 to 99 in all cases.
Note for TIME consuming: A received Time stamp before 1st January 2000 00:00.00 is set to 1st January
2000 00:00:00.
For time stamp BFM #50 to #59, refer to Section 6.19
Introduction
5.6.10 TIME
TIME consumers
4
Request
Wiring
Time stamp
Indication
5
Indication
Object H1012: COB-ID time stamp object
31
30
29
26 ... 11
10 ... 0
consume
produce
H0
H00000
11-bit CAN-ID
Item
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Bit No.
For the resulting COB-ID, refer to Subsection 5.6.1
Description
Bit 0 to 10
11-bit CAN-ID
Bit 11 to 28
-
Bit 11 to 28 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 29
-
Bit 29 fixed to OFF (0).
11-bit CAN-ID of the CAN base frame
produce
Bit 31
consume
OFF (0): Do not consume TIME Messages
ON (1): Consume TIME Messages
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Bit 30
OFF (0): Do not produce TIME Messages
ON (1): Produce TIME Messages
Note:
The FX3U-CAN needs to be active NMT
Master to produce TIME messages.
8
5.6.11 Store parameters
Note
Description
Bit 1
OFF (0): Device does not save parameter without user request. (FX3U-CAN)
ON (1): Device saves parameter without user request.
Bit 2 to 31
Reserved
10
Command
Interface
Bit 0
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
For CDCF files stored on Object H1F22, the store parameter command is not necessary.
On read access, the CANopen® device gives back information about its storage functionality:
OFF (0): Device does not save parameter on command.
ON (1): Device saves parameter on command. (FX3U-CAN)
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
To store all parameters to non-volatile memory, write SDO H65766173 (ISO8859 String code: "save") to
Object Index H1010, Sub-Index H01 or use the store command in the CIF. After each power-up or reset, the
saved parameters will be valid.
For the store command in the CIF, refer to Section 10.6
Bit No.
Introduction of
Functions
Indication
67
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
5.6.12 Restore default parameters
To restore factory default parameters, write SDO H64616F6C (ISO8859 code: daol ("load")) to Object Index
H1011, Sub-Index H01 or use the restore command in the CIF. The stored parameters are then overwritten to
factory default settings.
For the restore command in the CIF, refer to Section 10.7
Restore procedure:
Restore default
parameter command
Reset command
Factory default
parameter valid
Note
• Do not execute a store parameter command before executing the reset command.
Otherwise the factory default parameters will be overwritten with the previous settings.
• CDCF files stored on Object H1F22 will be also cleared and will be cleared directly before the Reset
command.
On read access, the CANopen® device gives back information about its restoring functionality:
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1 to 31
Description / set range
OFF (0): Device is not able to restore factory default parameters on command.
ON (1): Device is able to restore factory default parameters on command. (FX3U-CAN)
Reserved
5.6.13 EMCY
Emergency objects are triggered by the occurrence of a CANopen® device internal error. An emergency object
is transmitted only once per "error event." No further emergency objects are transmitted as long as no new
errors occur on a CANopen® device. Zero or more emergency consumers may receive the emergency object.
The received EMCY Messages will be displayed in BFM #750 to #859. A transmission of EMCY Messages is
possible over the CIF.
For BFM #750 to #859 Emergency Message Buffer, refer to Section 6.23
For sending an CIF EMCY Message in the CIF, refer to Section 6.23
EMCY consumers
EMCY producer
Inhibit time
Request
0...1
2
3...7
eec
er
msef
Request
eec:
Emergency error code (2 Byte)
er:
Error register (1 Byte)
msef:
68
Indication
Indication
Indication
For Emergency error code, refer to Section 6.23
For Error register (object H1001), refer to Subsection 5.6.2
Manufacturer-specific error code (5 Byte)
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.6 Communication Profile Area
1
31
30
29
28 ... 11
10 ... 0
valid
H0
H0
H00000
11-bit CAN-ID
Introduction
1. Object H1014: COB-ID EMCY
For the resulting COB-ID, refer to Subsection 5.6.1
Item
Description
11-bit CAN-ID
Bit 11 to 28
-
Bit 11 to 28 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 29
-
Bit 29 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 30
-
Bit 30 fixed to OFF (0).
11-bit CAN-ID of the CAN base frame
3
OFF (0): EMCY producing is valid
ON (1): EMCY producing is not valid
valid
Installation
Bit 31
Specifications
Bit No.
Bit 0 to 10
2
Note
On the FX3U-CAN, the setting is fixed and can not be changed.
4
2. Object H1015: Inhibit time EMCY
3. Object H1028 sub-index H01 to H7F: Emergency consumer object
31
30
29
28 ... 11
10 ... 0
valid
H0
H0
H00000
11-bit CAN-ID
Bit No.
Item
Description
11-bit CAN-ID
11-bit CAN-ID of the CAN base frame
Bit 11 to 28
-
Bit 11 to 28 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 29
-
Bit 29 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 30
-
Bit 30 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 31
valid
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Bit 0 to 10
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
For the resulting COB-ID, refer to Subsection 5.6.1
5
Introduction of
Functions
This Object configures the COB-IDs for the EMCY objects that the module is consuming. The Sub-index
refers to the related node-ID.
Wiring
This object configures the minimum time between two EMCY messages. The unit of the 16 bit value is 100
μs. The value 0 disables the inhibit time.
The FX3U-CAN counting resolution is 1ms, values smaller than 1ms will set internally to 1ms, values starting
from 1ms will be divided by 1000.
OFF (0): EMCY consuming of remote Node is valid
ON (1): EMCY consuming of remote Node is not valid
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
69
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.7
5.7 Error Behaviour
Error Behaviour
If a serious CANopen® device failure is detected in NMT state Operational, the CANopen® device
automatically shifts to the NMT state Pre-operational by default. Alternatively, the CANopen® device can be
configured to change to NMT state Stopped or remain in the current NMT state.
CANopen® device failures include the following communication errors:
• Bus-off conditions of the CAN interface
• Only as NMT Slave: Life guarding event with the state 'occurred' and the reason 'time out'
• Only as NMT Slave: Heartbeat event with state 'occurred' and the reason 'time out'
• PLC RUN → STOP: If the setting value is H01, the FX3U-CAN will change into Pre-operational but can be
set again to Operational when the PLC is in STOP.
With the setting value H00 or H02, the FX3U-CAN can not set into Operational as long as the PLC is in
STOP.
• FROM/TO Watchdog error: If the setting value is H01, the FX3U-CAN will change into Pre-operational but
can be set again to Operational when the BFM #29 bit 7 is set.
With the setting value H00 or H02, the FX3U-CAN can not set into Operational as long as the BFM #29 bit
7 is set.
For FROM/TO Watchdog, refer to Section 6.9
For FROM/TO Watchdog error, refer to Section 14.2
Severe CANopen® device errors also may be caused by CANopen® device internal failures.
Object H1029 sub-index H01: Error behaviour object
Error class values
Value (hex)
00
Change to NMT state Pre-operational (only if currently in NMT state Operational)
01
No change of the NMT state.
Refer to different behaviour in case of PLC RUN → STOP.
02
Change to NMT state Stopped
03 to FF
70
Description
Not used
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Network Management
5.8.1
CANopen® Boot-Up Procedure and NMT states
Power on
1
4
Wiring
9
Initialization
3
Installation
CANopen® devices shift to the NMT state Pre-operational directly after finishing device initialization. In this
NMT state, CANopen® device parameterization and CAN-ID-allocation via SDO (e.g. using a configuration
tool) is possible. Then the CANopen® devices may be switched directly or by the NMT startup master into the
NMT state Operational.
2
Specifications
The NMT provides services for controlling the network behaviour of CANopen® devices. All CANopen®
devices of a network referred to as NMT slaves are controlled by services provided by an NMT master. The
NMT master is typically also the Application master at the same time, but it is not necessary.
The FX3U-CAN supports the master functions NMT startup master, Flying master, Configuration manager,
SYNC producer, TIME producer and LSS master which are described in the sections before and below.
Introduction
5.8
5.8 Network Management
2
Pre-Operational
5
Introduction of
Functions
7
5
3
4
Stopped
6
6
8
State Change
Description
At Power on, shifts to the NMT state initialization automatically.
2
After the NMT state initialization finishes, shifts to the "NMT state Pre-operational" automatically and
sends a Boot-Up message
Refer to Subsection 5.8.2
3
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1
4, 7
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Operational
NMT service start remote node indication
NMT service enter pre-operational indication
5, 8
NMT service stop remote node indication
6
NMT service start remote node indication
9
NMT service reset node indication or reset communication indication
8
In the NMT state Pre-operational, communication via SDO is possible. PDO communication is not allowed.
Configuration of PDO, parameters and also the allocation of application objects (PDO mapping) may be
performed by a configuration application. The CANopen® device may be switched into the NMT state
Operational directly by sending the NMT service start remote node.
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
1. NMT state Pre-operational
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
2. NMT state Operational
In the NMT state Operational, all communication objects are active.
10
Command
Interface
71
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
3. NMT state Stopped
By switching a CANopen® device into the NMT state Stopped, it is forced to stop all communication.
Furthermore, this NMT state may be used to achieve certain application behaviour.
4. NMT States and communication object relation
The relation between NMT states and communication objects is shown in the following table. Services in the
listed communication objects may only be executed if the CANopen® devices involved in the communication
are in the appropriate NMT states.
In case of trying to send a communication object which is not allowed in the specific NMT state, no error
information will be displayed.
Pre-operational
PDO
Operational
Stopped
-
-
SDO
-
SYNC
-
EMCY
-
TIME
-
Node control and error control
5.8.2
Protocol Boot-Up
This protocol is used to signal that a NMT slave has switched to the NMT state Pre-operational after the NMT
state Initialization. The protocol uses the same CAN-ID as the error control protocols.
One data byte is transmitted with value 0.
Boot-up producer
Boot-up consumers
Request
CAN-ID = 1792 + Node-ID
0
Indication
5.8.3
Protocol NMT (Node control)
This Protocol is used by the NMT Master to control the NMT state of remote Nodes. Producing is allowed only
by the NMT Master.
If the module is the active NMT master, the module is ignoring NMT messages with the Node-ID 0 (All Nodes).
NMT Master
NMT Slaves
Request
CAN-ID = 0
Command
specifier
Node-ID
Indication
Indication
Indication
72
Command specifier (1 byte)
Node-ID (1 byte)
1
Start
0
All Nodes
2
Stop
1 to 127
Selected Node
128
Pre-Operational
129
Reset Application
130
Reset Communication
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
NMT slave identification
1. Object H1F84 Sub-index H01 to H7F: Device Type
2
Specifications
The NMT startup master and the LSS master are using the NMT slave identification data to identify the NMT
slave before configuring the NMT slave.
If the configured identification data on the NMT master are different than responded from the NMT slave, the
NMT startup master service will stop the startup of this NMT slave.
The Sub-index corresponds to the NMT slave Node-ID. The default value 0 has the meaning not configured,
and the NMT master will skip this entry.
For the LSS Master all NMT slave Identification data need to be configured! For the NMT Startup Master, the
NMT slave identification entries are optional.
Introduction
5.8.4
5.8 Network Management
3
Installation
The sub-index corresponds to the Node-ID.
The value refers to the object H1000 sub-index 00 of the corresponding Node-Id.
2. Object H1F85 Sub-index H01 to H7F: Vendor identification
The sub-index corresponds to the Node-ID.
The value refers to the object H1018 sub-index 01 of the corresponding Node-Id.
4
3. Object H1F86 Sub-index H01 to H7F: Product code
Wiring
The sub-index corresponds to the Node-ID.
The value refers to the object H1018 sub-index 02 of the corresponding Node-Id.
4. Object H1F87 Sub-index H01 to H7F: Revision number
The sub-index corresponds to the Node-ID.
The value refers to the object H1018 sub-index 03 of the corresponding Node-Id.
5
Introduction of
Functions
5. Object H1F88 Sub-index H01 to H7F: Serial number
The sub-index corresponds to the Node-ID.
The value refers to the object H1018 sub-index 04 of the corresponding Node-Id.
6
NMT master startup
Figure 5.1: NMT Master startup process
Come from Power-on or Reset
8
no
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
OD Index
H1F80 Bit 0
Configured as
NMT master?
9
yes
CAN Layer 2
Mode
OD Index
H1F80 Bit 5
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
The NMT startup master behaves according to the NMT state machine as defined in Subsection 5.8.1. Before
the NMT master transitions from NMT state Pre-operational to NMT state Operational, all assigned NMT
slaves shall be booted.
The Main flow chart for the NMT master startup is shown in Figure 5.1
Figure 5.2 is a simple startup overview to show the influence of the BFM #70 setting. It is recommended not to
use the simple startup because it can not be guaranteed that every NMT Slave will be set into Operational
state. Setup the NMT slave startup values for every connected NMT slave on the NMT master instead.
For NMT slave startup, refer to Subsection 4.7.6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
5.8.5
NMT flying master lost
process
won
10
Command
Interface
Switch to NMT
slave mode
To the next page
73
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 4
5.8 Network Management
Keep NMT Slaves
in Operational?
yes
no
NMT service Reset
communication
all devices
OD Index
H1F89
NMT service Reset communication for
each individual CANopen® device whose
Reset communication bit is not set
Note: If the Flying Master function is
used, a Reset Communication
all Nodes will be sent during
the Flying Master negotiation.
Start Boot Timer
for mandatory
NMT slaves
Wait 1s before restart
NMT Slave startup
OD Indexes
H1F84 to
H1F88
Start NMT
Slave startup
process
Note: NMT Slave startup of
optional NMT Slaves continues.
no
no
Response from
NMT Slave
received?
All optional NMT
Slaves once
processed?
no
Mandatory NMT
Slave and Boot
time elapsed?
yes
Signal to continue NMT Master startup process
yes
Response from
NMT Slave OK?
no
no
For
mandatory devices,
are all Identification
data set?
yes
Start LSS Master
All mandatory NMT
Slaves booted?
no
yes
OD Index
H1F80 Bit 2
Switch NMT
master automatically
into NMT state
OPERATIONAL?
yes
To the next page
74
no
Enter NMT
state Operational from
PLC received?
(OD Index 1F82)
yes
OD Index
H1F89
yes
yes
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 0, 3
OD Index
H1F81
Bit 0, 3
no
Serious Problem in the network or faulty
configuration of the NMT Master.
Halt startup procedure.
Disable NMT Startup Master.
NMT Master needs to be Reset to
restart the Boot process.
OD Indexes
H1F85 to
H1F88
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
1
Introduction
Switch to NMT state
OPERATIONAL
2
yes
Start NMT slaves with
NMT start all nodes?
All optional NMT slaves
started successfully?
Specifications
OD Index
H1F80 Bit 1, 3
no
3
NMT service Start
remote node with
node-ID = 0
Installation
yes
no
NMT service Start
remote for each
NMT slave
individually
4
Wiring
Network startup finished
without failures
Power on / Reset
Keep NMT Slaves
in Operational?
6
yes
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
OD Index
H1F81
Bit 0, 4
5
Introduction of
Functions
Figure 5.2: NMT Master simple startup
This overview is a more simple overview of the total NMT master startup without any NMT Slave setting in
Object Dictionary Index H1F81. Refer to the other figure to see the whole process.
no
7
Time delay between Reset
Communication and Start
remote all Nodes
OD Index H1F80
Bit 1
Start remote all
Nodes?
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
BFM #70
(default: 500ms)
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
NMT service Reset
communication all
Nodes
no
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
yes
NMT service Start
remote all Nodes
10
Command
Interface
End startup
75
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
Object H1F80: NMT startup
This object configures the start up behaviour of a CANopen® device via SDO access. If the node is set as
Master without the flying master capability, the node starts as NMT master and ignores "all Nodes" NMT
commands from the network. After the FX3U-CAN has been configured as the NMT master, parameters have
to be stored, and the FX3U-CAN has to be restarted by BFM #25 bit 0 or NMT request Reset Node.
For storing parameters, refer to Subsection 5.6.11
For module restart (BFM #25 bit 0), refer to Section 6.8
31...7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
H0
Stop all
nodes
Flying
master
Reset all
nodes
Start nodes
NMT
master
start
Start all
nodes
NMT
master
Bit No.
Bit 0
Item
NMT master
Description
OFF (0): Module is NMT Slave
ON (1): Module is NMT Master
Note:
• If it's set to 0, all other settings of Object H1F80 and H1F81 are ignored.
•
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
In a CANopen® network, only one (active) NMT Master allowed!
Start all nodes
OFF (0): NMT master sends during the NMT startup the NMT service Start remote node for each
assigned NMT slave. The NMT slaves will be started during the NMT startup individually.
ON (1): NMT master sends during the NMT startup the NMT service Start all remote nodes. The
NMT slaves will be started during the NMT master startup all at the same time.
Notes if setting is ON (1):
• Note Figure 5.2 NMT Master simple startup.
• Don't use this setting to start remote nodes which are not assigned to the master via Index H1F81.
Refer to Subsection 5.8.6
NMT master start
OFF (0): NMT Master switch during NMT master startup automatically into NMT state Operational
ON (1): NMT Master does not switch during NMT master startup automatically into NMT state
Operational
Notes if setting is ON (1):
The NMT Master has to be set manually with the SDO write command in the CIF over the Object
H1F82 into NMT state Operational. The startup process will be suspended as long as the Device is not
set into NMT State Operational.
Refer to Section 10.2
Start node
OFF (0): The NMT master shall start the NMT slaves.
ON (1): The NMT master shall not start the NMT slaves and the PLC application may start the NMT slaves.
Notes if setting is ON (1):
Note the resulting behaviour shown in Figure 5.2 NMT Master simple startup and Figure 5.3 NMT
Slave startup process.
OFF (0): In case of error control event of an assigned NMT slave defined as mandatory, the NMT
ON (1):
Bit 4
Reset all nodes
service reset communication with node-ID of the CANopen® device that caused the error
control event shall be executed.
In case of error control event of an assigned NMT Slave defined as mandatory, the NMT
service reset communication all Nodes shall be executed.
Refer to Subsection 5.8.6
Note:
• In case of optional NMT Slaves, the NMT service reset communication with node-ID of the
•
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 to 31
76
CANopen® device that caused the error control event will always be executed.
If bit 6 is set to 1, this bit setting will be ignored for mandatory NMT slaves.
Flying master
OFF (0): Do not use Flying master service.
ON (1): Use Flying master service
Note:
• If the device loses the Flying Master negotiation, the device works as NMT slave.
• If the Flying Master Service is used, all NMT Master in the network need to be set as Flying Master!
• If the setting is 1, additional settings need to be considered.
Refer to Subsection 5.8.11
Stop all nodes
OFF (0): Do not Stop all nodes in case of an NMT error control event of an assigned Mandatory NMT
Slave
ON (1): Stop all nodes in case of an NMT error control event of an assigned Mandatory NMT Slave
Note:
• If the setting is 1, the bit 4 setting is ignored.
• To restart the network, the NMT master has to be reset manually with BFM #25 bit 0 or with the
SDO write command in the CIF over the Object H1F82 into NMT state Reset Communication or
Application all Nodes.
Refer to Section 6.8 and Section 10.2
-
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
NMT slave startup
Figure 5.3: NMT Slave startup process
5
NMT Slave startup process
Node is assigned
NMT Slave?
Introduction of
Functions
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 0
no
6
NMT Slave startup
finished without failures
yes
NMT Slave
shall be start by
NMT Master?
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
no
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 2
7
yes
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Request OD Index
H1000 from NMT Slave
Response received?
no
To the next page
To the next page
no
End NMT Slave
boot-up with NMT
Slave response
not OK and BFM #25
bit 11 or 14 error,
BFM #29 bit 10 and
BFM Area #900 to
#963 bit 4 error
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
yes
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
NMT Slave
device type equal
or don’t care?
8
End boot-up with no
NMT Slave response
received
yes
OD Index
H1F84
4
Wiring
For correct functioning of the CANopen® network, it is recommended to assign all CANopen® devices which
are NMT Slave to the NMT Master.
3
Installation
Note
2
Specifications
If the NMT Master shall startup the NMT Slave, the NMT startup Master uses the Indexes H1F84 to H1F88 to
identify the NMT Slaves during Boot-up. The Setting of these Indexes is optional.
The NMT startup Master will request the Index H1000 of the NMT slave to check if the NMT Slave is available
in the network. If there is no response on the request, the NMT Master retries every 1s after the request until
the NMT Slave responds to the request or the boot time for a mandatory Slave elapses without response.
The Index H1F89 Boot time shall be set to a value which is higher than the maximum NMT startup time of the
slowest mandatory slave. This time has to be measured from Power-on/Reset of the NMT master to the point
where the last mandatory slave becomes NMT state Operational.
If identification data of NMT Slaves do not match with the setting on the NMT Master, it will result in a
termination of the whole NMT Startup process and the NMT startup Master will be disabled.
After a successful Identification, the Configuration Manager configures the NMT Slave at the time when
configuration data are stored on the NMT Master.
At last depending on the setting, the NMT Master sets the NMT Slave into NMT state Operational.
For NMT Slave identification, refer to Subsection 5.8.4
For NMT Master startup process, refer to Figure 5.1
For Configuration Manager, refer to Subsection 5.8.13
Introduction
5.8.6
5.8 Network Management
10
Command
Interface
77
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
OD Indexes
H1F85 to
H1F88
OD Indexes
H1F85 to
H1F88
Identity check
required?
yes
Request OD Index
H1018 from NMT
Slave
no
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 4
Keep alive bit
for this NMT
Slave set?
no
Response received
and OK?
yes
yes
Check Node state
no
Node state received?
yes
no
NMT Service Reset
Communication for
this Node
Check
Configuration
no
Node state Operational?
yes
Configuration check OK?
no
yes
Start NMT error
control service
Start NMT error control
service OK?
no
End NMT Slave
boot-up with NMT
Slave response
not OK and BFM #25
bit 11 or 14 error,
BFM #29 bit 10 and
BFM Area #900 to
#963 bit 4 error
yes
OD Index
H1F80 Bit 1
OD Index
H1F80 Bit 3
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 2
NMT Slave
shall be started by
NMT Master?
no
yes
CANopen® devices
shall be started?
no
yes
CANopen® devices
shall be started i
ndividually?
yes
yes
NMT Service Start Remote
Node for this Node
NMT Slave startup
finished without failures
78
no
NMT Master
is in NMT state
Operational?
no
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
NMT slave assignment
This object configures on the NMT Master for each node-ID (corresponding to the sub-index), the node
guarding values and the NMT Slave Configuration. Each sub-index of this object corresponds to the node-ID
of a CANopen® device in the network. The sub-index which corresponds to the node-ID of the NMT Master is
ignored.
15 ... 8
7 ... 0
Guard time
Retry factor
Configuration
4
3
Reset
Reserved
Mandatory
communication
Bit 0
NMT slave
NMT boot slave
0
Reserved
NMT
slave
6
Description
OFF (0): Remote Node is NMT Master or not assigned.
ON (1): Remote Node is NMT Slave and assigned to this NMT Master.
Note:
• It's mandatory to set this bit if the NMT Master shall startup and/or Node guard the NMT Slave.
• If the Flying Master Service is used, it shall be considered as Flying Master switching into NMT
Slave mode if they are not the active NMT Master and may need to be startup by the active NMT
Master.
Refer to Subsection 5.8.11
OFF (0): Configuration and NMT service Start remote node are not allowed in case of error control
event or NMT service Boot up.
ON (1): Configuration and NMT service Start remote node execute in the case of error control event
or NMT service Boot up.
Refer to Subsection 5.8.1, 5.8.2 and 5.8.13
OFF (0): CANopen® device may be present prior to network start up (CANopen® device is optional)
Bit 3
Mandatory
(CANopen®
ON (1):
device is present prior to network start up
device is mandatory)
Note:
• For mandatory slaves consider at Object H1F80 also the bits 4 and 6
Refer to Subsection 5.8.5
• For LSS Slave this bit has to be set to 1 to enable LSS service for this NMT Slave.
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
CANopen®
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Bit 2
Item
1
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Bit No.
2
NMT
boot slave
5
Introduction of
Functions
3) Configuration field:
4
Wiring
2) Retry factor field
The value for the retry factor indicates the number of retries the NMT master issues in case of a Node
Guarding event. The value 0 disables Node Guarding for the CANopen® device. Bit 0 in the Configuration
field and the Guardtime needs to be set also to enable node guarding.
Setting range: K0 to K255
3
Installation
1) Guard time field:
The value for the guard time indicates the cycle time for node guarding of the CANopen® device. The
value is in units of ms. The value 0 disables Node Guarding for the CANopen ® device. Bit 0 in the
Configuration field and the Retry factor needs to be set also to enable node guarding. If the heartbeat
consumer object is configured to a value ≠ 0, then the heartbeat mechanism will have priority over node
guarding.
Setting range: K0 to K65535
7...5
2
Specifications
1. Object H1F81 Sub-index H01 to H7F: NMT slave assignment
31 ... 16
Introduction
5.8.7
5.8 Network Management
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
79
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Bit No.
5.8 Network Management
Item
Description
OFF (0): NMT service Reset communication may be executed for the CANopen® device at any time
ON (1):
Bit 4
Reset
communication
Bit 1,
Reserved
Bit 5 to 7
NMT service Reset communication is not executed for the CANopen® device in case the
CANopen® device is in NMT state Operational
Note when using this function:
• If the Flying Master Service is used in the Network, there will be an all Node Reset communication
command executed during the Flying Master negotiation Process
• If no Heartbeat consuming is configured for this node, the NMT startup Master starts with Node
Guarding, which has to be answered within 100ms.
• In the case that no Heartbeat is used or supported, confirm that the NMT Slave supports Node
guarding.
• Take care that the NMT Master is also configured for Node Guarding if the NMT Slave is
configured for life guarding of the NMT Master. Otherwise the NMT Slave will go in an NMT error
state.
• If within the Heartbeat consuming time no Heartbeat is received or no Node Guard confirmation is
received after the Node Guarding RTR message, the NMT Slave startup ends with an error.
Default value: 0.
If set to ON (1), FX3U-CAN will respond with SDO access error.
2. Object H1F89 : Boot time
The object defines the time out in ms between start of the process Start process boot NMT slave and
signalling of successful boot of all mandatory NMT slaves. If the Boot time elapses before all mandatory
Slaves are started, the NMT startup will be stopped and the NMT startup Master will be disabled.
The value 0 disables the timer.
Setting range: K0 to K4,294,967,295
3. Object H102A: NMT inhibit time
This object configures the minimum time between two NMT messages. The 16bit value is given in multiples of
100 μs (Lowest counting resolution of FX3U-CAN: 1ms). The value 0 disables the inhibit time.
Setting range: In the FX3U-CAN, the value is fixed to 0.
80
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
NMT Bootup / Error Event handling
Figure 5.4: NMT error handler
Start NMT error handler
Node is assigned
NMT Slave?
3
Installation
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 0
no
4
yes
NMT service Stop
all devices
5
Introduction of
Functions
OD Index
H1F80 Bit 6
Node is
mandatory and all nodes
shall be stopped?
Wiring
yes
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 3
no
6
Node is
mandatory and all nodes
shall be reset?
yes
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
OD Index
H1F81 Bit 3
OD Index
H1F80 Bit 4
2
Specifications
When Consumer Heartbeat time elapses, Node Guarding failed or the NMT Slave responds a unexpected
Node state, the NMT Master handles the NMT Slave as shown in Figure 5.4.
If the NMT Master receives at any time a Boot-Up message from an assigned NMT Slave, the NMT Slave will
be startup by the NMT startup Master. If the NMT Master is in NMT state stopped, the NMT startup Master will
not be able to start the NMT Slave.
For protocol boot-up, refer to Subsection 5.8.2
Introduction
5.8.8
5.8 Network Management
NMT service Reset
communication all
devices
7
no
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
NMT service Reset
communication
faulty node
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Start startup
Handler for faulty
device
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
End error handler
10
Command
Interface
81
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8.9
5.8 Network Management
Request NMT
This object indicates at the NMT Master the current NMT state of a unique CANopen® device in the network.
The sub-index corresponds to the node-ID of the CANopen® devices in the network. The sub-index H80
represents all nodes. Only the NMT Master is allowed to send NMT node control messages.
The NMT state is shown in BFM #601 to #727.
At the NMT Master, an NMT message can be requested can be via an SDO write access. Consider using this
carefully because the NMT Startup Master will not set the Target Node automatically back to Operational
until the next reset if the request is a Stop or Pre-Operational request!
For the BFM assignment corresponding to the NMT state of each node, refer to Section 6.22
Note
If a Node for Heartbeat consuming is activated and a boot-up Message is received from this node, the NMT
state Pre-operational will be displayed for this node until the next Heartbeat is received for this node.
Object H1F82 Sub-index H01 to H80: Request NMT
Description
Value (hex)
SDO write
00
NMT state unknown
Reserved
01
CANopen® device missing
Reserved
02 to 03
Reserved
04
NMT state Stopped
NMT service Stop remote node
05
NMT state Operational
NMT service Start remote node
06
Reserved
NMT service Reset node
07
Reserved
NMT service Reset communication
08 to 7E
Reserved
7F
80 to 83
82
SDO read
NMT state Pre-operational
NMT service Enter pre-operational
Reserved
84
Reserved
NMT service Stop remote node excluding NMT master
With this Value the NMT Slave will be set into the requested
NMT State Stopped, but the NMT Master will stay in its
current NMT State.
85
Reserved
NMT service Start remote node excluding NMT master
With this Value the NMT Slave will be set into the requested
NMT State Operational, but the NMT Master will stay in its
current NMT State.
86
Reserved
NMT service Reset node excluding NMT master
With this Value the NMT Slave will be set into the requested
NMT State Reset Node, but the NMT Master will stay in its
current NMT State.
87
Reserved
NMT service Reset communication excluding NMT master
With this Value the NMT Slave will be set into the requested
NMT State Reset communication, but the NMT Master will
stay in its current NMT State.
88 to 8E
Reserved
8F
Reserved
90 to FF
Reserved
NMT service Enter Pre-operational excluding NMT master
With this Value the NMT Slave will be set into the requested
NMT State Pre-operational, but the NMT Master will stay in
its current NMT State.
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
1
This object indicates the node guarding state for a unique CANopen® device in the network. The sub-index
corresponds to the node-ID of the CANopen® devices in the network. The sub-index H80 represents all
nodes.
Note
2
Specifications
If Node Guarding is not set, then Node Guarding will not start.
Object H1F83 Sub-index H01 to H80: Request node guarding
Description
Value (hex)
Read
3
Write
Node guarding stopped
Stop node guarding
01
Node guarding started
Start node guarding
Installation
00
02 to FF
Introduction
5.8.10 Request node guarding
Reserved
5.8.11 Flying Master
4
Note
• If the module has enabled the Flying Master function and no Heartbeat producing is set, the Heartbeat
producing is automatically set to 1000 ms.
6
• If the Heartbeat producing and consuming is set manually, set a different value for the consuming time of
one Node-ID on the other Flying masters so that multiple masters will not initiate at the same time a new
Flying master negotiation when the active NMT master times out.
• All Flying Masters should have the same configuration for the Slaves.
• Configure in the Flying master negotiation response wait time of all Flying Master.
Formula for the Flying Master negotiation response wait time:
8
• During the Flying master negotiation process, an NMT service Reset communication message will be sent
to all nodes.
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Flying Master negotiation response wait time =
(NMT master priority)  (Priority time slot) + (Node-ID)  (Node time slot)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
Hot Stand-by
NMT-Master
Terminating
resistor
Terminating
resistor
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
• If a Flying Master is in the Network which is not a FX3U-CAN, ensure that this node has Heartbeat
producing enabled, otherwise the FX3U-CAN with activated Flying Master function will send endless Reset
Communication NMT Messages!
For the Communication Status (BFM #25), refer to Section 6.8
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
• If the module loses the negotiation and no Heartbeat consuming is set for the active NMT master,
Heartbeat consuming is automatically set to (1500 + 10  Node-ID) ms.
Active
NMT-Master
5
Introduction of
Functions
The Flying Master mechanism provides services for a hot stand-by NMT Master within a CANopen network.
All Flying Masters shall monitor the Heartbeat of all masters in the network. A new negotiation is automatically
started if the active master fails. The master with the highest priority and the lowest node-ID wins the
negotiation. A new negotiation is started when a new NMT master with a higher priority than the active NMT
Master join the network. The Flying NMT master priority is defined by (NMT master priority level  128 +
Node-Id), the lower value has the higher priority.
BFM #25 bit 15 indicates if the module is the current NMT Master.
Wiring
®
10
Command
Interface
Hot Stand-by
NMT-Master
83
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
Point
When using the Flying Master function, please consider the following points:
• The Network communication will be reset after the Active NMT Master fails which will result in an
Interruption of the System Application.
• Application data will be not synchronized by the Flying Master mechanisms. This has to be handled by a
proper CANopen® configuration and CANopen® system planning.
• Be careful with the setting of the NMT flying master timing parameters. An inappropriate setting will result
in a Malfunction of the Flying Master negotiation. Test the System Configuration before field use.
Figure 5.5: NMT flying master process
Power on / BFM #25 bit 0 Reset
Initialization
OD Index H1F90
Sub-index H02
OD Index H1F90
Sub-index H01
NMT master negotiation time
This time should be set so that all
Flying masters finish in nearly the
same time as the negotiation time.
Service active master detection.
The active master has to
answer within the NMT master
time out time.
Active Master
found?
yes
no
From power-on /
BFM #25 bit 0
Reset
NMT service Reset
communication all
Nodes
yes
no
Start NMT flying
master negotiation
OD Index H1F90
Sub-index H03
Wait time before sending Service
Confirmation NMT flying master negotiation
and become active NMT master.
Time = Priority level  Priority time slot +
Node-Id  CANopen® device time slot
The first flying master where this time
elapse shall have the highest priority.
Flying master priority =
Priority level  128 + Node-Id
The lower the number is, the
higher the priority!
Service
Confirmation
NMT flying master
negotiation
received?
OD Index H1F90
Sub-index H04
OD Index H1F90
Sub-index H05
BFM #27
no
yes
From the next page
84
To the next page
To the next page
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
1
Introduction
To the previous page
Flying master priority =
Priority level  128 + Node-Id
The lower the number is, the
higher the priority!
OD Index H1F90
Sub-index H03
priority > own priority
BFM #27
yes
2
Specifications
Send Service
Confirmation
NMT flying master
negotiation
3
Installation
no
Send Service Force
NMT flying master
negotiation
NMT slave mode
NMT master mode
Continue with NMT
master startup
4
Wiring
1. Object H1F80: NMT startup
Set H1F80 bit 5 to ON to participate in NMT flying master negotiation.
For NMT startup, refer to Subsection 5.8.5
2. Object H1F90: NMT flying master timing parameter
5
Introduction of
Functions
This object defines the parameters for the NMT flying master negotiation process.
3. Object H1F90 Sub-index H01: NMT master timeout
The value is in units of ms.
4. Object H1F90 Sub-index H02: NMT master negotiation time delay
6
The value is in units of ms.
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
5. Object H1F90 Sub-index H03: NMT master priority
15 ... 8
7 ... 0
Reserved
NMT master priority level
7
0000
Description
Priority high
0001
Priority medium
0002
Priority low
0003 to FFFF
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Value (hex)
8
Reserved
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
6. Object H1F90 Sub-index H04: Priority time slot
The value is in units of ms.
Formula for the Priority time slot:
Priority time slot > 127  {CANopen® device time slot (Sub-index H05)}
9
device time slot
CAN Layer 2
Mode
7. Object H1F90 Sub-index H05:
CANopen®
The value is in units of ms.
8. Object H1F90 Sub-index H06 Multiple NMT master detect cycle time
The value is in units of ms.
10
Command
Interface
85
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
5.8.12 LSS
The FX3U-CAN uses the layer setting services and protocols, to configure via the CAN network the Baud Rate
and the Node Address of an LSS slave device that is sealed against harsh environments and that does not
have any hardware components like DIP-switches for setting the node-ID or bit timing parameters.
Within a CANopen® network, only one LSS-Master is allowed to exist. For the LSS-Master Mode the module
has to be the active NMT-Master.
To activate the LSS Master, configure in the Object dictionary:
• Index H1F89:
The Boot time out. The time shall be longer than the boot time of the NMT-Client, which needs the longest
time for boot-up (Power On until Boot-up message).
• Indexes H1F84 to H1F88, the Sub-index which corresponds to the Node-Id which shall be set at the LSSClient:
The Identification information which is available at the Object dictionary Indexes H1000 and H1018 at the
LSS-Client.
• Index H1F81, the Sub-index which corresponds to the Node-Id which shall be set at the LSS-Client:
Set bit 0 NMT Slave, bit 2 NMT boot slave and bit 3 Mandatory device.
If the LSS Slave is not found on the configured baud rate, the FX3U-CAN changes automatically the baud rate
to find the LSS Slave. Through communication with a different baud rate, it can come to a Bus off condition at
the other devices in the network. If the device does not support automatically recovering from Bus off or
needs too much time for recovering, it's not possible to configure the LSS-Client.
It is recommended to establish a Point to Point connection for the configuration and to delete the Serial
number entry (Index H1F88) after configuration to prevent an unwanted start of the LSS Master.
For Boot time, refer to Object Dictionary Index H1F89 in Section 5.6
For NMT slave identification, refer to Object Dictionary Index H1F84 to H1F88 in Subsection 5.8.4
For configuration, refer to Object Dictionary Index H1F81 in Subsection 5.8.7
Note
Check if the LSS-Client has activated an internal Bus termination. If necessary, deactivate the Bus
termination first to prevent unwanted behaviour of the connected nodes on the bus.
5.8.13 Configuration manager
The Configuration manager provides mechanisms for configuration of CANopen® devices in a CANopen®
network. For saving and requesting the CANopen® device Configuration, the following Objects are used.
The sub-indexes are according to node-ID. The Configuration manager can be only used on the active NMT
Master.
Note
If during the Configuration upload to the NMT slave a failure other than SDO access failure at read only
Indexes and Sub indexes occurs, the configuration will be stopped.
86
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.8 Network Management
1
2. Object H1F22 Sub-index H01 to H7F: Concise DCF
3
Installation
These objects save a configuration file with the Concise DCF format into the node-ID corresponding subindex. A CANopen® configuration software and a CAN-Bus PC-Interface is necessary for the generation of a
CANopen® configuration and saving over the CAN Bus.
Up to 60 Concise DCFs can be stored on the FX3U-CAN. The maximum size for each entry is 65531 byte.
2
Specifications
This object indicates the downloaded configuration date and time on the NMT Slave. A configuration manager
uses this object to verify the configuration after a reset to check if a reconfiguration is necessary. If on a NMT
Slave the Object dictionary configuration is changed, the Sub-indexes H01 and H02 values will be set to H0.
At the time of NMT Slave boot-up, the Configuration manager compares the corresponding entries of H1020
on the Slave with its own setting in the Indexes H1F26 and H1F27 (see below) and decides if a
reconfiguration is necessary or not. This mechanism reduces the time of NMT Slave bootup.
Sub-index H01: Configuration date; contains the number of days since 1984-01-01.
Sub-index H02: Configuration time; contains the number of ms after midnight.
Introduction
1. Object H1020: Verify configuration
Note
4
Wiring
• To delete a Sub-index entry write "0" to this Sub-index. Erasing an entry requires 2 to 10 seconds. During
this time, it is not possible to write a new file.
If the Flash ROM is busy, an SDO write access error H06060000 will occur.
• When the FX3U-CAN responds to an SDO write access to a Sub-index with SDO Error H06010002, this
Sub-index already had been used. Delete the Sub-index entry by using the aforesaid method.
• If the used CANopen® configuration Software has a problem with the automatic transfer of the Concise
DCF be cause of Flash ROM busy errors, please use the selective download of the files if supported.
• All H1F22 Sub-indexes can also be deleted by the Restore default parameter command.
5
Introduction of
Functions
• When the FX3U-CAN responds to an SDO write access to a Sub-index with SDO access Error H06070010,
the CDCF File is bigger than 65531 bytes, or this Sub-index has already been used. Check the File size
and delete the Sub-index entry by using the aforesaid method.
6
• Self-configuration over the Sub-Index of the entry corresponding to own Node-Id is not supported.
3. Object H1F25 Sub-index H01 to H80: Configuration request
This object is used by CANopen® configuration software for verification of the configuration date of the
CANopen® devices in the network. The value contains the number of days since 1984-01-01.
This object is used by CANopen® configuration software for verification of the configuration time of the
CANopen® devices in the network. The value contains the number of ms after midnight.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
5. Object H1F27 Sub-index H01 to H7F: Expected configuration time
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
4. Object H1F26 Sub-index H01 to H7F: Expected configuration date
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
To initiate a configuration request for a CANopen® node, use the SDO write command in the CIF and write
H666E6F63 (ISO8859 String code: "conf") to the corresponding sub-index of the FX3U-CAN. The sub-index
H80 initiates a configuration request for all CANopen® devices in the network for which CDCF data are
stored. A configuration request to the self node-ID will be ignored and no error response will be generated.
For Sub-index H01 to H7F, a SDO failure H08000024 will occur if no data are stored for this Node-Id.
A configuration request to the Sub-index of the entry corresponding to own Node-Id will be ignored.
For SDO write command in the CIF, refer to Subsection 10.2.3
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
• The Concise DCF data will be directly stored on the Flash ROM. A Store parameters command over
Object Dictionary Index H1010 is not necessary (Refer to Section 4.6.11).
For Store parameters, refer to Subsection 5.6.11
For Restore default parameters, refer to Subsection 5.6.12
10
Command
Interface
87
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.9
5.9 Device Profile
CiA®
405 V2.0 for IEC 61131-3 Programmable Devices
Device Profile CiA® 405 V2.0 for IEC 61131-3 Programmable Devices
This section describes the Device Profile for IEC 61131-3 programmable devices. The objects for data read/
write support signed 8bit, unsigned 8bit, signed 16bit, unsigned 16bit, signed 32bit, unsigned 32bit and float
32bit. The corresponding Objects in the Object dictionary can be directly accessed via the BFM from the PLC.
Refer to Section 7.1
Inverter
Encoder
CiA ® 402
device
FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC
CiA ® 406
device
FX3U-CAN
CiA ® 405
device
Terminating
resistor
Terminating
resistor
FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC
FX3U-CAN
I/O Module
I/O Module
CiA ® 405
device
CiA ® 401
device
CiA ® 401
device
Pump
CiA ® 450
device
The table below provides a brief description and reference information for the FX3U-CAN CANopen® Object
Dictionary.
Index
(hex)
A000
A001
A002
A040
A041
A042
A0C0
A0C1
A0C2
A100
A101
A102
A1C0
88
Sub-index
(hex)
00
01 to F0
00
01 to F0
00
01 to A0
00
01 to F0
00
01 to F0
00
01 to A0
00
01 to 78
00
01 to 78
00
01 to 50
00
01 to 78
00
01 to 78
00
01 to 50
00
01 to A0
Object
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Input network variables
Description
Highest sub-index
Data
type
Initial
value
Read/
Write
U8
HF0
R
R
Signed Integer 8 bit
I8
K0
Highest sub-index
U8
HF0
R
Signed Integer 8 bit
I8
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
HA0
R
Signed Integer 8 bit
I8
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
HF0
R
R
Unsigned Integer 8 bit
U8
K0
Highest sub-index
U8
HF0
R
Unsigned Integer 8 bit
U8
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
HA0
R
Unsigned Integer 8 bit
U8
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
H78
R
Signed Integer 16 bit
I16
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
H78
R
Signed Integer 16 bit
I16
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
H50
R
Signed Integer 16 bit
I16
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
H78
R
Unsigned Integer 16 bit
U16
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
H78
R
Unsigned Integer 16 bit
U16
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
H50
R
Unsigned Integer 16 bit
U16
K0
R
Highest sub-index
U8
HA0
R
Signed Integer 32 bit
I32
K0
R
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.9 Device Profile
CiA®
405 V2.0 for IEC 61131-3 Programmable Devices
1
A200
A240
A481
A482
A4C1
A4C2
A541
A542
A581
A582
A680
A6C0
00
01 to F0
00
01 to A0
00
01 to F0
00
01 to F0
00
01 to A0
00
01 to 78
00
01 to 78
00
01 to 50
00
01 to 78
00
01 to 78
00
01 to 50
00
01 to A0
00
01 to A0
00
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
Output network variables
U8
HA0
R
Unsigned Integer 32 bit
U32
K0
R
Highest sub-index
Float 32 bit
Highest sub-index
U8
HA0
R
Real32
K0
R
U8
HF0
R
R/W
Signed Integer 8 bit
I8
K0
Highest sub-index
U8
HF0
R
Signed Integer 8 bit
I8
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
HA0
R
Signed Integer 8 bit
I8
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
HF0
R
Unsigned Integer 8 bit
U8
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
HF0
R
R/W
Unsigned Integer 8 bit
U8
K0
Highest sub-index
U8
HA0
R
Unsigned Integer 8 bit
U8
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
H78
R
Signed Integer 16 bit
I16
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
H78
R
Signed Integer 16 bit
I16
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
H50
R
Signed Integer 16 bit
I16
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
H78
R
Unsigned Integer 16 bit
U16
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
H78
R
Unsigned Integer 16 bit
U16
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
H50
R
Unsigned Integer 16 bit
U16
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
HA0
R
Signed Integer 32 bit
I32
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
U8
HA0
R
Unsigned Integer 32 bit
U32
K0
R/W
U8
HA0
R
Real32
K0
R/W
Highest sub-index
Float 32 bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
01 to A0
Output network variables
Highest sub-index
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
A640
01 to F0
Read/
Write
Introduction of
Functions
A580
00
Input network variables
Initial
value
Wiring
A540
00
01 to A0
Input network variables
Data
type
Description
Installation
A4C0
00
01 to A0
Object
Specifications
A480
Sub-index
(hex)
Introduction
Index
(hex)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
89
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
Application Profile CiA® 417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
This application profile describes the virtual devices (hereinafter called VD) of lift control systems. The virtual
controllers (e.g. call, car door, and car drive controller) perform dedicated control functions of the lift
application. The virtual units (e.g. input and output panels, car door, light barrier, car position, car drive, loadmeasuring) are implemented each in single CANopen® devices or combined in one or more CANopen®
devices. The FX3U-CAN implements the VD call controller, car drive controller and the car door controller.
The VD Call controller receives all call requests from these VD input panels, and transmits the corresponding
acknowledgements to the VD output panels. The VD car door controller transmits commands to the VD car
door unit and the VD light barrier unit. The VD car driver controller transmits commands to the VD car drive
unit. It receives status information from the VD car drive unit and the VD load-measuring unit. If the profile
position mode is used, additional status information from the VD car position unit is needed. It is
recommended to give the Call controller the lowest node-ID.
The lift control system application profile shares the Object Dictionary area from H6000 to H9FFF. The area
from H6000 to H60FF is related to the CANopen® device and not to one of the lift-control applications. The
area from H6100 to H62FF is related to the VD input panel units, they do not belong to a specific lift control.
The Indexes H6010 and H6011 are related to the VD Call controller and do not belong to a specific lift control.
It is possible to realize up to 8 lift-control applications. For the specific lift control application 1, the area H6200
to H67FE is used. For other lift control applications, the area H6200 to H67FE is shifted as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
H6200 to H67FE lift control application 1
H6A00 to H6FFE lift control application 2
H7200 to H77FE lift control application 3
H7A00 to H7FFE lift control application 4
H8200 to H87FE lift control application 5
H8A00 to H8FFE lift control application 6
H9200 to H97FE lift control application 7
H9A00 to H9FFE lift control application 8
CiA® 417 Application
Car door unit 1
Car input
panel
Light barrier 1
Car drive unit
Car position 1
Car output
panel
Load
measuring
Terminating
resistor
Terminating
resistor
FX3U-CAN
Input panel
Input panel
Input panel
Car drive
Controller
Output panel
Output panel
Output panel
Car door
Controller
1st floor
2nd floor
3rd floor
Call
Controller
FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC
90
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
1
Object
Introduction
The table below provides a brief description and reference information for the FX3U-CAN
Dictionary.
CANopen®
Note: Stored to Flash ROM
Subindex
(hex)
1 to 8:
6000
01
02
Initial value
Number of supported VD
U8
H03
R
-
Call controller
U16
H100
R
-
Car door controller
U16
H400
R
-
Car drive controller
U16
H800
R
-
U8
H1
R/W
4
Object
00
Supported virtual
device types
03
Stored
Read/
to Flash
Write
ROM
Data
type
Installation
Index
(hex)
Description
00
Lift number
1 to 8:
6008
00
Specification version
-
U16
H2021
R
-
Refer to Subsection 5.10.2
Note:
• SDO read access does not return the actual
data of the input buffer.
• SDO write access does not write to the input
buffer.
U48
H0
R/W
-
Refer to Subsection 5.10.3
U48
H0
R
-
U8
H04
R
-
Door 1
U16
H0
R
-
Door 2
U16
H0
R
-
03
Door 3
U16
H0
R
-
04
Door 4
U16
H0
R
-
U8
H04
R
-
Door 1
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
Door 2
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
03
Door 3
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
04
Door 4
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
Virtual input mapping
1 to 8:
6011
00
Virtual output mapping
00
Highest sub-index
01
02
Door control word
Refer to Subsection 5.10.4
Highest sub-index
00
Highest sub-index
U8
H04
R
-
01
Door 1
The value is in units of mm.
Door 2
H0:
Closed
HFFFF: Not available or not
Door 3
requested
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
Door 4
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
1: 6310
2: 6B10
3: 7310
4: 7B10
5: 8310
6: 8B10
7: 9310
8: 9B10
00
U8
H04
R
-
Door 1
U8
HFF
R/W
-
Door 2
U8
HFF
R/W
-
03
Door 3
U8
HFF
R/W
-
04
Door 4
U8
HFF
R/W
-
02
02
Door status word
Door position
03
Refer to Subsection 5.10.5
04
Highest sub-index
01
02
Light barrier status
Refer to Subsection 5.10.6
7
8
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
1: 6302
2: 6B02
3: 7302
4: 7B02
5: 8302
6: 8B02
7: 9302
8: 9B02
01
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
00
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1: 6301
2: 6B01
3: 7301
4: 7B01
5: 8301
6: 8B01
7: 9301
8: 9B01
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
1: 6300
2: 6B00
3: 7300
4: 7B00
5: 8300
6: 8B00
7: 9300
8: 9B00
5
Introduction of
Functions
00
Refer to Subsection 5.10.1
3
Wiring
1 to 8:
6001
1 to 8:
6010
2
Specifications
Data will be saved to the Flash ROM by using the Store Parameter command in Index H1010. Be careful with
write handling. The maximum number of writes to the built-in flash ROM is 10,000 times.
10
Command
Interface
91
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Index
(hex)
Object
Description
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
Data
type
Initial value
Stored
Read/
to Flash
Write
ROM
1: 6383
2: 6B83
3: 7383
4: 7B83
5: 8383
6: 8B83
7: 9383
8: 9B83
00
Highest sub-index
U8
H04
R
-
01
Position unit 1
The position value from the car
position units.
Position unit 2
The values shall be equivalent
to Object H6004 of the CiA® Position unit 3
U32
HFFFF FFFF
R/W
-
U32
HFFFF FFFF
R/W
-
U32
HFFFF FFFF
R/W
-
U32
HFFFF FFFF
R/W
-
1: 6390
2: 6B90
3: 7390
4: 7B90
5: 8390
6: 8B90
7: 9390
8: 9B90
00
Highest sub-index
U8
H04
R
-
01
Position unit 1
I16
H0
R/W
-
Position unit 2
I16
H0
R/W
-
Position unit 3
I16
H0
R/W
-
04
The speed value from the car
position units.
The measuring step is defined
in multiples of 0.1 mm/s in the
object H6384 of the car position
unit.
Position unit 4
I16
H0
R/W
-
1: 6391
2: 6B91
3: 7391
4: 7B91
5: 8391
6: 8B91
7: 9391
8: 9B91
00
Highest sub-index
U8
H04
R
-
01
The acceleration value from the Position unit 1
car position units.
The measuring step is defined Position unit 2
I16
H0
R/W
-
I16
H0
R/W
-
in multiples of 1
in the Position unit 3
object H6384 of the car position
unit.
Position unit 4
I16
H0
R/W
-
I16
H0
R/W
-
02
Position value
03
406 specifications.
04
02
Speed value car
03
02
Acceleration value car
Position unit 4
mm/s2
03
04
1: 6400
2: 6C00
3: 7400
4: 7C00
5: 8400
6: 8C00
7: 9400
8: 9C00
00
Control word
Refer to Subsection 5.10.7
U16
H0
R
-
1: 6401
2: 6C01
3: 7401
4: 7C01
5: 8401
6: 8C01
7: 9401
8: 9C01
00
Status word
Refer to Subsection 5.10.8
U16
H0
R/W
-
1: 6403
2: 6C03
3: 7403
4: 7C03
5: 8403
6: 8C03
7: 9403
8: 9C03
00
Modes of operation
Refer to Subsection 5.10.9
I8
H0
R
-
1: 6404
2: 6C04
3: 7404
4: 7C04
5: 8404
6: 8C04
7: 9404
8: 9C04
00
Modes of operation
display
Refer to Subsection 5.10.10
I8
H0
R/W
-
This object shall contain the breaking point or
breaking distance depending on the target
position given respectively as absolute value or
relative value. The value shall be given in userdefined position units.
I32
H0
R/W
-
1: 6406
2: 6C06
3: 7406
4: 7C06
5: 8406
6: 8C06
7: 9406
8: 9C06
92
Subindex
(hex)
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
00
Control effort
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
1
Object
Description
1: 6407
2: 6C07
3: 7407
4: 7C07
5: 8407
6: 8C07
7: 9407
8: 9C07
00
Position actual value
1: 6420
2: 6C20
3: 7420
4: 7C20
5: 8420
6: 8C20
7: 9420
8: 9C20
00
Target position
1: 6423
2: 6C23
3: 7423
4: 7C23
5: 8423
6: 8C23
7: 9423
8: 9C23
00
Profile velocity
HFFFF FFFF
R/W
-
Refer to Subsection 5.10.11
I32
H0
R
-
U32
H0
R
-
402-2 V3.0 specifications.
The value is in units of mm/s.
5
This object is equivalent to object H60FF in the
00
CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications.
The value is in units of mm/s.
Target velocity
I32
H0
R
-
6
Velocity actual value
00
Load value
R/W
-
Highest sub-index
U8
H02
R
-
Absolute load
value
U16
HFFFF
R/W
-
SI unit
U16
H2
R/W
-
00
U8
H02
R
-
U8
H0
R/W
-
U8
H0
R/W
-
Highest sub-index
Load signal
Refer to Subsection
5.10.13 Load signal
interrupt
Load signalling
02
7
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
H0
Refer to Subsection
5.10.12
02
01
I32
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
01
CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specification.
The value is in units of mm/s.
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
This object is equivalent to object H606C in the
00
3
4
This object is equivalent to object H6081 in the
CiA®
2
Introduction of
Functions
1: 6482
2: 6C82
3: 7482
4: 7C82
5: 8482
6: 8C82
7: 9482
8: 9C82
CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications, and shall
contain the position of the drive shaft. This
information is used to calculate the slippage of
the position unit. The value shall be given in
user-defined position units.
Wiring
1: 6480
2: 6C80
3: 7480
4: 7C80
5: 8480
6: 8C80
7: 9480
8: 9C80
U32
This object is equivalent to object H6064 in the
Installation
1: 6433
2: 6C33
3: 7433
4: 7C33
5: 8433
6: 8C33
7: 9433
8: 9C33
Initial value
Specifications
1: 6430
2: 6C30
3: 7430
4: 7C30
5: 8430
6: 8C30
7: 9430
8: 9C30
Stored
Read/
to Flash
Write
ROM
Data
type
Introduction
Subindex
(hex)
Index
(hex)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
5.10.1 Lift number
This Object contains the lift number to which the FX3U-CAN is assigned.
The Bit for the assigned lift number is set to ON (1).
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Lift 8
Lift 7
Lift 6
Lift 5
Lift 4
Lift 3
Lift 2
Lift 1
Command
Interface
7
93
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
5.10.2 Virtual input mapping
This Object contains the last received input data from one of the digital input panel group objects.
47 ... 40
39 ... 32
31 ... 24
23 ... 16
15 ... 8
7 ... 0
Function data
Door
Floor
Lift
Sub-function
Basic function
1. Basic function field
Bit 0 to 7
Value (hex)
Bit 0 to 7
Value (hex)
Description
Description
00
Reserved
0D
High priority call to destination floor
01
Generic input
0E
Special function
02
Standard hall call request
0F
Access code upload request
03
Low priority hall call request
10
Speech connection request
04
High priority hall call request
11
Area monitoring connection request
05
Standard car call request
12
06
Low priority car call request
07
High priority car call request
08
Standard destination call
Fire detector
13 to 15
Reserved
Status of safety-related circuitries
(This is not safety-related information.)
16
09
Low priority destination call
17 to 1F
0A
High priority destination call
20
Reserved
Guest call
0B
Standard call to destination floor
21 to 7F
Reserved
0C
Low priority call to destination floor
80 to FF
Manufacturer-specific
2. Sub-function field
The Sub-function field is interpreted differently depending on the basic function field value.
Basic function Sub-function
field Bit 0 to 7
field Bit 8 to
value (hex)
15 value (hex)
02 to 04
0E
94
Description
Reserved
12
Special service
01
Generic input 1
13
Service run
14
Dogging service enable
…
00
FE
Generic input 254
15
Dogging service up
FF
Reserved
16
Dogging service down
00
Reserved
17
Fire alarm (external fire alarm system)
01
Hall call up
18
Provide priority
19
Lift attendant start button
1A
Lift attendant drive through button
02
Hall call down
03
Hall call
04
Hall call extra up
1B
Security run
05
Hall call extra down
1C
Second call panel
06
05 to 0D
Basic function Sub-function
field Bit 0 to 7
field Bit 8 to
value (hex)
15 value (hex)
…
01
Description
0E
Hall call extra
1D
Door enable
07 to FF
Reserved
1E
Call cancel button fire operation
00
Reserved
1F
Fire alarm reset
Floor number 1 to 254
20
Body detector (e.g. person in car)
Earthquake detector
01 to FE
FF
Reserved
21
00
Reserved
22 to FF
Reserved
01
Request fan 1
00 to FF
Reserved
02
Request fan 2
00
Reserved
03
Request load time 1
04
Request load time 2
05
Key lock 1
06
Key lock 2
00
07
Key lock 3
01 to 03
08
Key lock 4
09
Request door open
0A
Request door close
0B
Fire recall (key switch hall panel)
0C
Fire service (key switch car panel)
0D
Hall call disable
0E
Attendant service
0F
VIP service
0F to 11
12
13 to 15
16
17 to 1F
20
01 to FE
Fire detector 1 to 254
FF
Reserved
00 to FF
Reserved
Reserved
Safety-related circuitry 1 to 3
04
Hall/swing door
05
Car door
06
Door lock
07 to FF
Reserved
00 to FF
Reserved
00
Reserved
01 to FE
Guest call 1 to 254
FF
Reserved
10
Out of order
21 to 7F
00 to FF
Reserved
11
Bed passenger service
80 to FF
00 to FF
Manufacturer-specific
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
1
Introduction
3. Lift field
The Bit for the requested lift number is set to ON (1).
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Lift 8
Lift 7
Lift 6
Lift 5
Lift 4
Lift 3
Lift 2
Lift 1
2
Bit 24 to 31 Value (hex)
Specifications
4. Floor field
Description
00
Car panel
01 to FE
Panel of floor 1 to 254
FF
3
Reserved
This value provides the door number to which the sending virtual device is assigned. The structure of the field
depends on the value of the basic function field.
Installation
5. Door field
• When the basic function field is H08 to H0D, the structure of the door field is shown below:
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
Destination
door 4
Destination
door 3
Destination
door 2
Destination
door 1
Source
door 4
Source
door 3
Source
door 2
Source
door 1
4
Wiring
39
• When the basic function field is H00 to H07 or H0E to HFF, the structure of the door field is shown below:
35
34
33
32
H0
Door 4
Door 3
Door 2
Door 1
5
Introduction of
Functions
39 ... 36
6. Function data field
The function data provides the input state of a virtual input.
41 ... 40
lock
Reserved
Input state
Item
Input state
Reserved
Bit 47
lock
Description
Bit 41
Bit 40
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
Input state is OFF.
OFF (0)
ON (1)
Input state is ON.
ON (1)
OFF (0)
Function is defective
ON (1)
ON (1)
Function is not installed
7
Description
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Bit 42 to 46
6
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Bit 40 and 41
46 ... 42
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Bit No.
47
OFF (0): Button or key-button has no locking function
ON (1): Button or key-button has locking function
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
95
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
5.10.3 Virtual output mapping
This Object contains the output data for one of the digital output group objects.
47 ... 40
39 ... 32
31 ... 24
23 ... 16
15 ... 8
7 ... 0
Function data
Door
Floor
Lift
Sub-function
Basic function
1. Basic function field
Bit 0 to 7
Value (hex)
Description
Bit 0 to 7
Value (hex)
00
Call controller commands
01
Generic output
11
02
Standard hall call acknowledgement
03
Low priority hall call acknowledgement
21 to 3F
04
High priority hall call acknowledgement
40
Description
Area monitoring connection acknowledgement
12 to 1F
20
Reserved
Guest call acknowledgement
Reserved
Position indication
05
Standard car call acknowledgement
41
Hall lantern
06
Low priority car call acknowledgement
42
Direction indication
07
High priority car call acknowledgement
43
Special indication
08
Standard destination call acknowledgement
44
Arrival indication
09
Low priority destination call acknowledgement
45
Operation data
0A
High priority destination call acknowledgement
46
Publicity indication
0B
Standard call to destination floor acknowledgement
0C
Low priority call to destination floor acknowledgement
47
Speech synthesis
0D
High priority call to destination floor acknowledgement
0E
Special function acknowledgement
4B to 7F
Reserved
0F
Access code upload acknowledgement
80 to FF
Manufacturer-specific
10
Speech connection acknowledgement
48 to 49
4A
Reserved
Miscellaneous outputs
2. Sub-function field
The Sub-function field is interpreted differently depending on the basic function field value.
Basic function field
Bit 0 to 7 value
(hex)
00
Sub-function field
Bit 8 to 15 value
(hex)
00
Reserved
01
Request all active hall calls
02
Request all special inputs (basic functions 0E and 12)
03 to FF
01
02 to 04
05 to 0D
96
Reserved
00 to FF
Reserved
00
Reserved
01
Hall call up acknowledgement
02
Hall call down acknowledgement
03
Hall call acknowledgement
04
Hall call extra up acknowledgement
05
Hall call extra down acknowledgement
06
Hall call extra acknowledgement
07 to FF
Reserved
00
Reserved
01 to FE
FF
0E
Description
Target stop acknowledgement 1 to 254
All target stop buttons
00
Reserved
01
Request fan 1 acknowledgement
02
Request fan 2 acknowledgement
03
Request load time 1 acknowledgement
04
Request load time 2 acknowledgement
05
Request key lock 1 acknowledgement
06
Request key lock 2 acknowledgement
07
Request key lock 3 acknowledgement
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
1
Sub-function field
Bit 8 to 15 value
(hex)
08
Request door open acknowledgement
0A
Request door close acknowledgement
0B
Fire recall (key switch hall panel) acknowledgement
0C
Fire service (key switch hall panel) acknowledgement
0D
Hall call disable acknowledgement
0E
Attendant service acknowledgement
0F
VIP service acknowledgement
10
Out of order acknowledgement
11
Bed passenger service acknowledgement
12
Special service acknowledgement
13
Service run acknowledgement
14
Dogging service enable acknowledgement
Dogging service up acknowledgement
16
Dogging service down acknowledgement
17
Fire alarm (external fire alarm system) acknowledgement
18
Provide priority acknowledgement
19
Lift attendant start button acknowledgement
1A
Lift attendant drive through button acknowledgement
1B
Security run acknowledgement
Door enable acknowledgement
1E
Call cancel button fire operation
1F
Fire alarm reset acknowledgement
20
Body detector (e.g. person in car)
21
Earthquake detector
Reserved
00 to FF
Reserved
00
Reserved
FF
00 to FF
00
40
01 to FE
6
Guest call acknowledgement 1 to 254
Reserved
Reserved
Clear the floor data
7
Floor number 1 to 254
Reserved
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
FF
5
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
22 to FF
4
Introduction of
Functions
Second call panel acknowledgement
1D
01 to FE
21 to 3F
3
15
1C
2
Wiring
20
Request key lock 4 acknowledgement
09
Installation
0F to 1F
Description
Specifications
0E
Introduction
Basic function field
Bit 0 to 7 value
(hex)
This sub-function shows the arrow display direction up/down.
41
15 ... 10
9
8
H0
Down
Up
OFF (0): Do not display the arrow
ON (1): Display the arrow
8
This sub-function shows the arrow display direction up/down, and the transfer direction display of car.
•
12
11 ... 10
9
8
H0
Moving
down
Moving
up
H0
Down
Up
Bit 8 and 9 show the arrow display direction up/down.
OFF (0): Do not display the arrow
ON (1): Display the arrow
Bit 12 and 13 show the transfer direction display of car.
OFF (0): Not moving
ON (1): Moving
00
43
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
•
13
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
42
15 ... 14
Used for instruction → all displays off
No load
02
Full load
03
Over load
04
Fire
10
Command
Interface
01
97
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Basic function field
Bit 0 to 7 value
(hex)
5.10 Application Profile
Sub-function field
Bit 8 to 15 value
(hex)
43
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
Description
05
Fire brigade service
06
Help is coming
07
Special service
08
Load time
09
Occupied
0A
Out of order
0B
Close door
0C
Case of fire
0D
Hall call disable
0E
Travel to evacuation floor
0F
Travel to fire recall floor
10 to FF
CiA®
Reserved
This sub-function shows the arrival indication up/down.
44
15 ... 10
9
8
H0
Down
Up
45 to 46
00 to FF
Reserved
00
Switch off speech synthesis on all output panels
47
01 to FE
48 to 49
00 to FF
Announce floor number 1 to 254
Reserved
00
Reserved
FF
4A
OFF (0): Not arrived
ON (1): Arrived
Announce current floor number
01
Hall call enable
02
Lift operational
03 to FF
Reserved
4B to 7F
00 to FF
Reserved
80 to FF
00 to FF
Manufacturer-specific
3. Lift field
This value provides the lift number or the group of lifts, to which the output is assigned.
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Lift 8
Lift 7
Lift 6
Lift 5
Lift 4
Lift 3
Lift 2
Lift 1
4. Floor field
Bit 24 to 31 Value (hex)
00
01 to FE
FF
Description
Car panel
Floor number 1 to 254
All floor panels
5. Door field
This value provides the door number to which the output is assigned. The structure of the field depends on
the value of the basic function field. If the bits of the door field are set to 1, this shall indicate an assignment of
the output to this door.
• When the basic function field is H08 to H0D, the structure of the door field is shown below:
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
Destination
door 4
Destination
door 3
Destination
door 2
Destination
door 1
Source
door 4
Source
door 3
Source
door 2
Source
door 1
• When the basic function field is H00 to H07 or H0E to HFF, the structure of the door field is shown below:
98
39 ... 36
35
34
33
32
H0
Door 4
Door 3
Door 2
Door 1
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
1
Introduction
6. Function data field
The function data provides the input state of a virtual input.
46 ... 44
43 ... 41
40
Predicate
Property parameter
Property
Status
Item
Bit 40
Description
Status
OFF (0): No data indicated
(Does not apply for basic function H40)
ON (1): Data indicated
Property
Bit 41 to 43 value (hex)
H0: No action (default)
H1: Output continuously
H2: Output pulsed
H3: Output flashing
H4: Output coloured
H5: Output with volume
H6: Output with scroll rate
H7: Reserved
3
Installation
Bit 41 to 43
2
Specifications
Bit No.
47
4
Property parameter
Refer to table below
Bit 47
Predicate
OFF (0): Acknowledgement is not affirmed
ON (1): Acknowledgement is affirmed
Wiring
Bit 44 to 46
Value definition of the property parameter field (Bit 44 to 46)
5
Description
No action
Continuous
Pulsed
Flashing
Colour
Volume
Scroll rate
0
< 0.5 s
10 Hz
White
Minimum
Automatic
1
1s
7.5 Hz
Yellow
Vary
1 line/s
2
1.5 s
5 Hz
Reserved
Vary
2 line/s
3
2s
2 Hz
Green
Vary
3 line/s
3s
1. 5Hz
Reserved
Vary
4 line/s
No action
4
Reserved
5s
1 Hz
Red
Vary
5 line/s
6
10 s
0.5 Hz
Reserved
Vary
6 line/s
7
> 15 s
0.25 Hz
Blue
Maximum
7 line/s
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
5
Introduction of
Functions
Bit 44 to 46
value (hex)
5.10.4 Door control word
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
This Object contains the door commands and other control data.
15 ... 12
11 ... 10
9 ... 8
7 ... 6
5 ... 4
3 ... 2
1 ... 0
Command
Door
velocity
Motion
detector
Finger
protector
Door lock
Battery
power
H3
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
1. Battery power field
Bit 2 to 3 Value (hex)
Description
Battery power supply disabled
1
Battery power supply enabled
2
Reserved
3
Do not care / take no action
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
0
2. Door lock field
Bit 4 to 5 Value (hex)
Description
Enable door lock
1
Disable door lock
2
Reserved
3
Do not care / take no action
10
Command
Interface
0
99
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
3. Finger protector field
Bit 6 to 7 Value (hex)
Description
0
Enable finger protector
1
Disable finger protector
2
Reserved
3
Do not care / take no action
4. Motion detector field
Bit 8 to 9 Value (hex)
Description
0
Enable motion detector
1
Disable motion detector
2
Reserved
3
Do not care / take no action
5. Door velocity field
Bit 10 to 11 Value (hex)
Description
0
Move door with standard speed
1
Move door with reduced speed
2
Reserved
3
Do not care / take no action
6. Command field
Bit 12 to 15 Value (hex)
Description
0
Close door without limit force (Not allowed for EN-81 compliant lifts)
1
Close door with limit force
2
Nudging
(Forced closing of car door with reduced speed without reversal devices due to the door being blocked for too
long)
3
Open door without limit force (Not allowed for EN-81 compliant lifts)
4
Open door with limit force
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Stop door without torque
8
Stop door with torque
9 to C
Reserved
D
Tech-in drive
E
Reset door
F
Do not care / take no action
5.10.5 Door status word
This Object contains the car door status and other status information.
15 ... 12
11 ... 10
9 ... 8
7 ... 6
5 ... 4
3 ... 2
1 ... 0
Status
Force
limit
Motion
detector
Finger
protector
Door lock
Battery
power
Safety
contact
1. Safety contact field
Bit 0 to 1 Value (hex)
0
100
Description
Contact not closed
1
Contact closed
2
Error indicator
3
Not available or not installed
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
1
Bit 2 to 3 Value (hex)
0
Introduction
2. Battery power field
Description
No battery power used
Battery power used
2
Error indicator
3
Not available or not installed
2
Specifications
1
3. Door lock field
Bit 4 to 5 Value (hex)
0
Description
Door not locked
Door locked
2
Error indicator
3
Not available or not installed
3
Installation
1
4. Finger protector field
Bit 6 to 7 Value (hex)
4
Description
No finger detected
1
Finger detected
2
Error indicator
3
Not available or not installed
Wiring
0
5. Motion detector field
5
Description
0
Motion not detected
1
Motion detected
2
Error indicator
3
Not available or not installed
Introduction of
Functions
Bit 8 to 9 Value (hex)
6
Bit 10 to 11 Value (hex)
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
6. Force limit field
Description
0
Force limit not reached
1
Force limit reached
Error indicator
3
Not available or not installed
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
2
7. Status field
Bit 12 to 15 Value (hex)
Description
Door closed without torque
2
Door is closing
3
Door opened with torque
4
Door opened without torque
5
Door is opening
6
Door is re-opening
7
Door stopped with torque
(not in an end position)
8
Door stopped without torque
(not in an end position)
9 to C
8
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
Door closed with torque
1
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
0
Reserved
D
Tech-in drive
E
Error indicator
F
Not available or not installed
10
Command
Interface
Note
If the door is in an open or closed end position, this shall have higher priority than stopped status.
101
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
5.10.6 Light barrier status
This Object contains the status information of the VD light barrier unit for up to four doors.
Bit 6 to 7 Value (hex)
0
7 ... 6
5 ... 0
Status
H3F
Description
No subject detected
1
Subject detected
2
Error indicator
3
Not available or not installed
5.10.7 Control word
This object is based on object H6040 of the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications.
Note
• Bits 9, 6, 5, and 4 of the control word are operation mode specific.
• The halt function (bit 8) behaviour is operation mode specific.
If the bit is ON (1), the commanded motion shall be interrupted; the Power drive system shall behave as
defined in the halt option code.
After releasing the halt function, the commanded motion shall be continued if possible.
15
14
13 ... 11
10
9
8
7
6 ... 4
3
2
1
0
insp
rcl
ms
H0
oms
h
fr
oms
eo
qs
ev
so
Bit
Description
Bit 0
so
Switch on
Bit 1
ev
Enable voltage
Bit 2
qs
Quick stop
Bit 3
eo
Enable operation
Bit 4 to 6
102
Item
oms
Operation mode specific
(Show in the Users Manual of the remote device)
Bit 7
fr
Fault reset
Bit 8
h
Halt
Bit 9
oms
Bit 10
-
Operation mode specific
(Show in the Users Manual of the remote device)
Bit 10 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 11 to 13
ms
Manufacturer-specific
(Show in the Users Manual of the remote device)
1Bit 4
rcl
OFF (0): Emergency recall operation mode inactive
ON (1): Emergency recall operation mode active
Bit 15
insp
OFF (0): Car top inspection operation mode inactive
ON (1): Car top inspection mode active
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
1
Introduction
Status transition
Number: Transition No.
Power
disabled
Fault
Start
13
2
0
Specifications
Fault reaction
active
14
Not ready to
switch on
Fault
1
15
3
9
2
10
7
Installation
Switch on
disabled
12
Ready to
switch on
8 3
4
Wiring
Power
enabled
6
Switched on
4
5
11
Command
16
5
Quick stop
active
Introduction of
Functions
Operation
enabled
Bits of the control word
Transition No.
Bit 7
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Shutdown
0
X
1
1
0
Switch on
0
0
1
1
1
3
Switch on + enable operation
0
1
1
1
1
3 + 4 (Note)
X
X
0
X
7, 9, 10, 12
0
X
0
1
X
7, 10, 11
Disable operation
0
0
1
1
1
5
Enable operation
0
1
1
1
1
4, 16
0→1
X
X
X
X
15
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
0
Quick stop
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Disable voltage
Fault reset
6
2, 6, 8
Note
• At the following Transition numbers occur a automatic status transition: 0, 1, 13, 14
8
• Automatic transition to enable operation state after executing SWITCHED ON state functionality.
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
103
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
5.10.8 Status word
This object is equivalent to object H6041 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specification.
15 ... 14
13 ... 12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ms
oms
ila
tr
rm
ms
w
sod
qs
ve
f
oe
so
rtso
Bit No.
Bit 0
Item
rtso
Description / set range
Ready to switch on
Bit 1
so
Switched on
Bit 2
oe
Operation enabled
Bit 3
f
Fault
Bit 4
ve
Voltage enabled
ON when high voltage is applied to the Power drive system.
Bit 5
qs
Quick stop
OFF When the Power drive system is reacting on a quick stop request.
Bit 6
sod
Switch on disabled
Bit 7
w
Bit 8
ms
Manufacturer-specific
Bit 9
rm
Remote
When this bit is ON, the control word is processed. If it is off (local), the control word is not processed.
Bit 10
tr
Target reached
• ON when the Power drive system has reached the set-point. The set-point is operation mode specific. This Bit
is set to on, if the operation mode has been changed.
• ON if the quick stop option code is 5, 6, 7 or 8, when the quick stop operation is finished and the Power drive
system is halted.
• ON when halt occurred and the Power drive system is halted.
Bit 11
ila
Internal limit active
ON when an internal limit is active.
Warning
ON when being a warning condition. The status of the Power drive system Finite state automaton does not be
changed as warning is not an error or fault.
Bit 12 to 13
oms
Operation mode specific
(Show in the Users Manual of the remote device)
Bit 14 to 15
ms
Manufacturer-specific
(Show in the Users Manual of the remote device)
Status Word
104
Power Drive System Finite State Automaton State
xxxx xxxx x0xx 0000 b
Not ready to switch on
xxxx xxxx x1xx 0000 b
Switch on disabled
xxxx xxxx x01x 0001 b
Ready to switch on
xxxx xxxx x01x 0011 b
Switched on
xxxx xxxx x01x 0111 b
Operation enabled
xxxx xxxx x00x 0111 b
Quick stop active
xxxx xxxx x0xx 1111 b
Fault reaction active
xxxx xxxx x0xx 1000 b
Fault
5 Introduction of Functions
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5.10 Application Profile
CiA®
417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems
1
Introduction
5.10.9 Modes of operation
This object is equivalent to object H6060 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications.
Value
-128 to -1
Description
No mode change or no mode assigned
Profile position mode
+2
Velocity mode
+3
Profile velocity mode
+4
Torque profile mode
+5
Reserved
3
Homing mode
+7
Interpolated position mode
+8
Cyclic sync position mode
+9
Cyclic sync velocity mode
Installation
+6
4
Cyclic sync torque mode
Reserved
Wiring
+11 to +127
Specifications
0
+1
+10
2
Manufacturer-specific operation modes
5.10.10 Modes of operation display
5.10.11 Target position
5.10.12 Load value
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
This object is equivalent to object H607A in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications. This object contains the
commanded position that the drive should move to in position profile mode using the current settings of
motion control parameters such as velocity, acceleration, deceleration, motion profile type etc. The value of
this object shall be interpreted as absolute or relative depending on the 'abs/rel' flag in the control word. It
shall be given in user-defined position units and shall be converted to position increments.
5
Introduction of
Functions
This object is equivalent to object H6061 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications. This object provides the
actual operation mode.
The value description can be shown in the Modes of operation object.
Refer to Subsection 5.10.9
7
SI unit structure
7 ... 0
Prefix
SI unit
8
The default SI unit is kg. The SI unit and prefix field values shall use the coding defined in the CiA® 303-2
specifications.
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
15 ... 8
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
This object contains the load value (sub-index H01) and the related SI unit (sub-index H02). The load value is
the absolute value of the load (payload). It is in units of the configured SI unit. The load value of HFFFF shall
be an error value that is applied if the sensor is in error state or does not have an actual value.
9
5.10.13 Load signalling
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Overload
Full load
Norm load
Zero load
10
Command
Interface
7 ... 4
CAN Layer 2
Mode
This object contains load signal information. It is used to signal measuring values of the load measuring
system. Sub-index H01 contains different kinds of load signals. If one of the load bits (for zero load, norm
load, full load, and overload) is set to ON (1), the related condition is true. If the bit is set to 0, the related
condition is not true. Sub-index H02 contains the information regarding whether the related load bit shall be
processed (1) or not (0).
105
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.
6.1
6.1 Buffer Memories (BFM) Lists
Allocation of Buffer Memories
Buffer Memories (BFM) Lists
Caution
• Do not access buffer memory (BFM) that is marked as "Reserved" (Ex. BFM #23, #28, #31 to #34, #40 to
#49, #60 to #99, #400, #443 to #600, etc.) by FROM/TO instructions, etc. There is a possibility to cause
abnormal behavior to the operation of the FX3U-CAN if accessing these buffer memories.
• When BFM #21, #24, #26, #27, #59, #70, #71, #100 to #399, #1100 to #1267, #1900 to #1955 are written
to, FX3U-CAN stores the state of the corresponding BFM in the built-in flash ROM. The maximum number
of writes to the built-in flash ROM is 10,000 times.
While BFM #25 bit7 is ON, any TO access is prohibited and will generate a BFM #29 bit5 failure!
Note
• When writing to a BFM that contains any bits marked as "Reserved" (Ex. BFM #20 bit 1 to bit 15, BFM #22
bit 2 to bit 15, etc), set such bits to OFF.
There is a possibility to cause abnormal behavior to the operation of the FX3U-CAN if setting these flags to
ON.
• Use BFM #22 to store the configuration.
BFM No.
BFM #0 to #19
Receive/Transmit Process Data
(CANopen® modes only)
BFM #20
Data Exchange Control
BFM #21
Function mode
BFM #22
Save/Restore Configuration
BFM #23
Reserved
BFM #24
Baud Rate
BFM #25
BFM #26
BFM #27
106
Description
Default
value
Read/
Write
Stored to
Flash ROM
Reference
H0
R/W
-
*1
-
H0
R/W
K405
R/W
H0
R/W
-
-
-
-
K250
R/W
Communication Status
K0
R/W
FROM/TO Watchdog
K20
R/W
Section 6.9
K127
R/W
Section 6.10
Node Address
(CANopen® modes only)
BFM #28
Reserved
BFM #29
Error Status
BFM #30
Module ID code
BFM #31 to #34
Reserved
Section 6.4
Section 6.5
Section 6.6
Section 6.7
-
Section 6.8
-
-
-
-
H0
R/W
-
Section 14.2
K7170
R
-
Section 6.12
-
-
-
-
BFM #35
CAN transmission error counter
H0
R
-
Section 6.13
BFM #36
CAN reception error counter
H0
R
-
Section 6.14
BFM #37
Baud Rate display
K2500
R
-
Section 6.15
BFM #38
Sampling Point display
K875
R
-
Section 6.16
BFM #39
BFM setting error display
H0
R
-
Section 6.17
BFM #40
BFM initialisation/online mode write error display
H0
R
-
Section 6.18
BFM #41 to #49
Reserved
-
-
-
-
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.1 Buffer Memories (BFM) Lists
1
BFM #50
BFM #51
BFM #53
BFM #54
BFM #56
BFM #57
BFM #59
BFM #60 to #69
BFM #70*3
BFM #72 to #99
(CANopen® modes only)
Time stamp month
(CANopen® modes only)
Time stamp day
(CANopen® modes only)
Time stamp hour
(CANopen® modes only)
Time stamp minute
(CANopen® modes only)
Time stamp second
(CANopen® modes only)
Time stamp Day-of-the-week
(CANopen® modes only)
Time stamp transmission interval
(CANopen® modes only)
Daily correction
(CANopen® modes only)
Reserved
NMT Start all Nodes delay
(CANopen® modes only)
SDO Time out
(CANopen® modes only)
Reserved
K1
R/W
-
K12
R/W
-
K3
R/W
-
K1
R/W
-
K0
R/W
-
K0
R/W
-
K0
R/W
-
K4
R
-
K0
R/W
-
K0
R/W
-
-
K500
R/W
Section 6.20
K500
R/W
Section 6.21
-
-
Reference
2
Section 6.19
-
*2
4
-
-
BFM #100 to #399
Receive/Transmit Process Data
BFM #400
Reserved
BFM #401 to #442
Message Slot error code list
(Layer 2 function modes only)
BFM #443 to #600
Reserved
-
BFM #601 to #726
NMT State
H0
BFM #727
(CANopen® modes only)
H7F
R
-
BFM #728 to #749
Reserved
-
-
-
-
H0
-
-
Section 6.23
-
-
-
-
H0
R/W
-
Section 6.24
BFM #900 to #963
(CANopen modes only)
Reserved
NMT Error Control Status
(CANopen® modes only)
Reserved
BFM #1000 to #1066
Command Interface
BFM #1067 to #1099
Reserved
BFM #1100 to #1267
Pre-defined Layer 2 message configuration
(Layer 2 modes only)
BFM #1270 to #1272
BFM #1273 to #1279
Reserved
BFM #1280 to #1282
Message transmit trigger flags
(Layer 2 modes only)
BFM #1283 to #1899
Reserved
BFM #1900 to #1955
PLC RUN>STOP and power down messages
(Layer 2 modes only)
BFM #1956 to #2999
Reserved
BFM #3000 to #3539
Lift Application
(CANopen® 417 Mode only)
*1
-
H0
R/W
-
Section 9.2
-
-
-
R
-
6
Section 6.22
7
-
-
-
-
H0
R/W
-
Chapter 10
-
-
-
-
H0
R/W
-
-
-
-
H0
R
-
Section 9.4
-
-
-
-
H0
R/W
-
Section 9.5
-
-
-
-
H0
R/W
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Chapter 8
*2
*2
Section 9.3
Section 9.6
107
8
9
10
Command
Interface
Reserved
Layer 2 RTR flags
(Layer 2 modes only)
-
CAN Layer 2
Mode
BFM #1268 to #1269
-
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
BFM #964 to #999
R/W
-
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
BFM #860 to #899
®
H0
5
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
BFM #750 to #859
EMCY Message Buffer
3
Introduction of
Functions
BFM #71*3
Time stamp year
Stored to
Flash ROM
Wiring
BFM #58
(CANopen® modes only)
Read/
Write
Installation
BFM #55
Time stamp producer/consumer
Default
value
Specifications
BFM #52
Description
Introduction
BFM No.
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
BFM No.
BFM #3540 to #9999
BFM #10000 to #10319*3
6.1 Buffer Memories (BFM) Lists
Description
Reserved
Receive Process Data (RPDO)
(CANopen® 405 Mode only)
BFM #10320 to #10999 Reserved
BFM #11000 to #11319*3
Transmit Process Data (TPDO)
(CANopen® 405 Mode only)
BFM #11320 to #11999 Reserved
BFM #12000 to #12539*3
Lift Application Receive Data (RPDO)
(CANopen® 417 Mode only)
BFM #12540 to #12999 Reserved
BFM #13000 to #13539*3
From #13540
108
Lift Application Transmit Data (TPDO)
(CANopen® 417 Mode only)
Reserved
Default
value
Read/
Write
Stored to
Flash ROM
Reference
-
-
-
-
H0
R
-
Section 7.1
-
-
-
-
H0
R/W
-
Section 7.1
-
-
-
-
-
R
-
Chapter 8
-
-
-
-
-
R/W
-
Chapter 8
-
-
-
-
*1.
Refer to the following items for each function mode.
When using CANopen® 405 mode, refer to Chapter 7
When using CANopen® 417 mode, refer to Chapter 8
When using the 11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode or 29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode,
refer to Chapter 9
*2.
Only in Layer 2 mode. The configuration area of the BFM is stored into the Flash ROM.
For further information, refer to the following section.
Refer to Section 9.1
*3.
Applicable for FX3U-CAN firmware Ver.1.10 or later.
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
How to Read/Write from/to Buffer Memory
6.2.1
Direct specification of buffer memory (FX3U/FX3UC only)
U \G
Unit No. (0 to 7)
is substituted with a number
Buffer memory No. (0 to 32766)
4
If the following program is created, 1 point of data will be read out from buffer memory BFM #30 of unit No.1
to data register D10.
READ command
FNC 12
MOV
U1\G30
D10
5
Transfer result
2. Writing PLC data into BFM (MOV instruction)
If the following program is created, 1 point of data (H0001) will be written to buffer memory BFM #21 of unit
No.1.
H0001
U1\G21
Buffer memory No.
Transfer source
Unit No.
7
FROM/TO instructions
Use the FROM instruction to read the data from the buffer memory.
If the following program is created, 1 point of data will be read out from buffer memory BFM #30 of unit No.1
to data register D10.
K1
K30
D10
K1
Unit No.
Buffer memory No.
Number of transfer data points
Destination register
2. TO instruction (Writing PLC data into BFM)
FNC 79
TO
K21
H0001
K1
10
Number of transfer data points
Transfer source
Command
Interface
Unit No.
Buffer memory No.
K1
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
Use the TO instruction to write data to buffer memory.
If the following program is created, 1 point of data (H0001) will be written to buffer memory BFM #21 of unit
No.1.
WRITE command
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
FNC 78
FROM
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1. FROM instruction (Reading out BFM data to PLC)
READ command
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
FNC 12
MOV
Introduction of
Functions
Unit No.
Buffer memory No.
WRITE command
Wiring
1. Reading out BFM data to PLC (MOV instruction)
6.2.2
3
Installation
When directly specifying the buffer memory, specify the following device in the source or destination area of
the applied instruction as follows:
2
Specifications
To read/write from/to buffer memory in the FX 3U -CAN, use the FROM/TO instructions or the applied
instructions that directly specify the buffer memory.
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC applicable software is required to perform direct specification of the buffer memory
and bit specification of word devices.
For further information on applied instructions, bit specification of word devices, direct specification of buffer
memory or special extension unit/block unit number, refer to following manual.
Refer to Programming manual
Introduction
6.2
6.2 How to Read/Write from/to Buffer Memory
109
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.3
6.3 Receive/Transmit Process Data
Receive/Transmit Process Data
BFM #10000 to #10319 and #11000 to #11319 locations in the FX3U-CAN module are used for data
communication to the CAN bus. The mapping for where each data is sent/received is explained in the
following chapter.
When using CANopen® 405 mode, refer to Chapter 7
When using CANopen® 417 mode, refer to Chapter 8
When using the 11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode or 29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode,
refer to Chapter 9
Note
In the CANopen® 417 Mode (BFM #21 = K417), only BFM #0 to #3, BFM #10000 to #10003 and BFM #11000
to #11003 (TPDO1/RPDO1) are usable. BFM #4 to #399, BFM #10004 to #10319 and BFM #11004 to
#11319 are not accessible.
6.4
[BFM #20] Data Exchange Control
To ensure that the FX3U-CAN module can handle the CANopen® data in a consistent way, it is necessary to
set in BFM #20 the corresponding Bit to ON before reading data (FROM) and after writing data (TO). The
data exchange control signal ensures, by internal buffer exchange, that TO data from the PLC will be
transmitted by PDO.
PDO transmit data will only be sent to the CAN bus if the module is in NMT state Operational and after setting
the corresponding bits in BFM #20 to ON. As long as the reading of the previous data is not finished and a
new exchange command to BFM #20 has not been sent, FROM data will not be overwritten by further PDO.
If the module is in NMT state Operational, PDO data received from other nodes can be read by the FX3G/
FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series PLC by using a FROM instruction, and transmit PDO data can be written to the
module and sent to the network by using a TO instruction.
The exchange data bit's will be reset automatically when the data exchange between BFM and Object
Dictionary/Data exchange buffer is finished.
Note
• BFM #20 bit 0 will be reset automatically.
• During an active data exchange (BFM #20 bit 0 is ON), new write access to this BFM will be ignored.
Description
Bit
Bit 0
FROM (Read Access)
TO (Write Access)
Data exchange status
Data exchange mode Control
OFF: Data exchange between BFM's and Data Exchange OFF: No data exchange between BFMs and CANopen®
Buffer completed
object dictionary / Layer 2 message buffer
ON: Module exchanges data between BFM's and Data ON: Activate data exchange between BFMs and
exchange buffer
CANopen® object dictionary / Layer 2 message buffer
Note: This bit has the same function as Bit 8
Notes:
• This bit merges the function of Bit 8, 9 and 12.
•
Bit 1 to 7
Bit 8
Reserved
Only in CANopen® modes:
Only in CANopen® modes:
Data exchange status (only OD data)
Data exchange mode setting (only OD data)
OFF: Data exchange between BFM's and Data Exchange OFF: No data exchange between BFM and CANopen®
Buffer completed
object dictionary
ON: Module exchanges data between BFM's and Data
ON: Activate data exchange between BFM and CANopen®
exchange buffer
object dictionary
Note: This bit has the same function as Bit 0
Notes:
• The RPDO data of the Virtual Input mapping BFMs are
not included in this data exchange. It can be handled
separately by Bit 9.
• The data will be also exchanged by setting Bit 0
•
110
If the bit is set and the Module is not in CANopen® state
Pre-Operational or Stopped, the PDO data will be
exchanged after going into Operational state.
If the bit is set and the Module is not in CANopen® state
Operational, the PDO data will be exchanged after going
into Operational state.
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.5 [BFM #21] Function Mode
1
TO (Write Access)
Only in 417 Function mode (Refer to BFM #21):
Data exchange for the Virtual Input mapping BFMs.
With this bit it's possible to read the Receive Buffer of the
Virtual Input mapping without exchanging the data of all data
exchange BFMs.
OFF: No data exchange
ON: Exchange data
For FROM access of BFM #3001 to 3003,
refer to Section 8.3
Note:
The data will be also exchanged by setting Bit 0
Reserved
Bit 10 to 11 Reserved
Reserved
[BFM #21] Function Mode
5
Note
• For the CANopen® profile (CiA® 405 or CiA® 417) mode, all saved OD settings will be deleted after mode
change restart.
7
Function Mode
K11
11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode
This mode supports the 11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Message.
K29
29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode
This mode supports the 29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Message.
CANopen®
This mode supports the CANopen CiA® 405 IEC 61131-3 Programmable Device Profile.
K417
Other value
CANopen® 417 mode
Description
This mode supports the CANopen CiA® 417 Lift Application Profile.
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Set Value
405 mode
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
• The BFM setting needs to be stored by BFM #22 bit 0 and afterwards be restarted by BFM #25 bit 0 to
make the new settings effective.
Refer to Section 6.8
Introduction of
Functions
Function mode of FX3U-CAN is set up. FX3U-CAN chooses the communication function corresponding to the
function mode set in BFM #21.
K405 (default)
4
Wiring
Bit 13 to 15 Reserved
6.5
3
Installation
Bit 12
OFF: No data exchange between Emergency Message
BFMs and EMCY Receive Buffer
ON: Exchange data between Emergency Message BFMs
and EMCY Receive Buffer
For Emergency Message Buffer,
refer to Section 6.23
Note:
The data will be also exchanged by setting Bit 0
2
Specifications
Bit 9
FROM (Read Access)
Introduction
Description
Bit
8
All other settings will generate a BFM #29 bit 6 failure.
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
111
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.6
6.6 [BFM #22] Save/Restore Configuration
[BFM #22] Save/Restore Configuration
This BFM supports two bits that allow the default configuration of the BFMs to be restored and the
configuration from BFMs to be stored into Flash ROM. Both bits will be reset automatically if the restore or
save procedure is completed.
Note
• If both flags are set simultaneously, the corresponding BFMs and Flash ROM will be reset to factory default
settings.
• If only bit 1 is set, corresponding BFM areas are restored to factory default values but not stored in Flash
ROM.
After changing the configuration, BFM #22 bit 0 has to be set ON to store these changed configuration
BFMs to Flash ROM.
Object dictionary settings can be stored in Flash ROM and Object dictionary default settings can be restored
using CIF commands.
For CIF command, refer to Section 10.6 and Section 10.7
Description
Bit
FROM (Read Access)
TO (Write Access)
Bit 0
ON when in store process.
Save configuration*1 to Flash ROM.
When operation is completed, FX3U-CAN will automatically reset this bit.
Bit 1
ON when in restore process.
Restore factory default configuration (not saved to Flash ROM).
When operation is completed, FX3U-CAN will automatically reset this bit.
Bit 2 to 15
Reserved
*1.
The stored/restored BFM configurations correspond to the function mode as shown in the table below;
112
11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode
29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode
CANopen® 417 mode
CANopen® 405 mode
Mode
Description
Reference
Saved
Saved
Function mode in BFM #21.
Section 6.5
Saved
Saved
Baud Rate in BFM #24.
Section 6.7
Saved
Saved
Saved
Not saved
FROM/TO Watchdog in BFM #26.
Section 6.9
Node Address in BFM #27.
Section 6.10
Saved
Not saved
Daily correction in BFM #59.
Section 6.19
Not saved
Saved
The CAN ID and data length for transmitting message in BFM #100 to #399.
Section 9.1
Not saved
Saved
Pre-defined Layer 2 message configuration in BFM #1100 to #1267.
Section 9.3
Not saved
Saved
PLC RUN>STOP and power down message in BFM #1900 to #1955.
Section 9.6
Saved
Not saved
NMT start all Nodes delay in BFM #70
Section 6.20
Saved
Not saved
SDO Time Out in BFM #71
Section 6.21
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
[BFM #24] Baud Rate
Introduction
6.7
6.7 [BFM #24] Baud Rate
Set the baud rate in this BFM. The current baud rate can be found in BFM #37.
Note
2
• The new value needs to be stored by BFM #22 and the Module has to be restarted to make the new setting
effective.
BFM Value
Baud Rate 20kbps
K50
Baud Rate 50kbps
K100
Baud Rate 100kbps
K125
Baud Rate 125kbps
K250
Baud Rate 250kbps
K500
Baud Rate 500kbps
K800
Baud Rate 800kbps
K1000
Baud Rate 1000kbps
4
Wiring
K20
Installation
Baud Rate 10kbps
Setting prohibited
If an invalid baud rate is written to BFM #24, the BFM will keep its former value and BFM #29 bit 11 will be set.
Other value
[BFM #25] Communication Status
Displays the FX3U-CAN communication status.
6
Note
• If a configuration BFM is written to while in online mode (BFM #25 bit 4 is ON), BFM #29 bit 5 will be set
ON.
Module restart
When restarting the module, set BFM #25 Bit 0 to ON.
In this case, set data that was not saved will be lost.
8
FROM (Read Access)
Module online/offline
Layer 2 modes:
OFF: Offline
ON:
Online
OFF:
ON:
OFF:
modes:
Not in Operational State
Operational State
The error counter is below the warning level, in error
passive or in bus-off.
The error counter of the CAN controller has reached Reserved
the warning level.
Refer to and Section 6.13 and 6.14
ON:
Bit 2, 3
Reserved
10
Command
Interface
Bit 1
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
CANopen®
TO (Write Access)
Module restart
A restart is necessary to activate a new setting of the function
mode (BFM #21), the baud rate (BFM #24), the Node-Id
(BFM #27) or to activate the NMT master setting.
Refer to Subsection 5.8.5 and
Section 6.5, 6.7 and 6.10
All not saved settings will be lost.
OFF: Normal operation
ON:
Restart module
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Description
Bit
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
• When BFM #25 bit 7 is ON, the Module is initializing the internal data structures and the BFM, and any TO
command (write access) prohibited. If the BFM is written to, BFM #29 bit 5 will be set to ON.
When BFM #25 bit 7 is bit ON, the only access allowed is to read (FROM) BFM #25 and BFM #29.
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
• A change of the function mode, the baud rate, or Node ID requires a restart of the FX3U-CAN to become
effective.
Bit 0
5
Introduction of
Functions
6.8
3
Description
K10
Specifications
• The Baud Rate must be equal for all nodes in the network.
113
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.8 [BFM #25] Communication Status
Description
Bit
FROM (Read Access)
TO (Write Access)
Bit 4
CANopen® mode:
Reserved
Layer 2 mode:
OFF: Layer 2 request configuration mode
ON:
Layer 2 request online mode
This bit must be set to ON to start data exchange with other network nodes. The configuration of the module can only be
changed while this bit is OFF.
Note:
If a configuration BFM was changed during online mode, BFM #29 bit 5 is set to ON.
Bit 5
Reserved
OFF:
No NMT Reset received.
The CANopen® Application was reset by an NMT Reset communication or NMT Reset Application command. All
unsaved changes in the Object dictionary are lost and are set to factory default or to the former stored value.
Write a 0 to reset the bit.
Refer to Subsection 5.6.11
The Bit is set to 0 in the beginning of the reset process.
ON:
Bit 6
Module initialisation state
In the case of a module restart request over BFM #25 bit 0 or
Bit 7
over a CANopen® NMT command, this bit will set. This bit
shall be monitored in the PLC program at all times to prohibit Reserved
BFM #29 failures.
OFF:
ON:
Module initialisation finished
Module is in initialisation state
CANopen® Network state
Bit 9, 8
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
OFF
OFF
Stopped State
OFF
ON
Pre-operational State
ON
OFF
Operational State
ON
ON
Reserved
Bit 12
Reserved
OFF: LSS Master routine inactive
ON:
LSS Master routine active
Reserved
This bit is only on when the LSS Master is searching and
configuring LSS Slaves.
OFF:
ON:
Bit 11
Description
No failure
Mandatory NMT Slave startup failure, NMT Master
startup stopped, Reset the NMT Master to restart the
NMT Startup process
Note:
If all Mandatory Slaves are available and this failure occurs,
the NMT Master configuration may be faulty. Check the NMT
Master settings of the assigned Mandatory Slaves.
Reserved
OFF:
ON:
No Time Stamp object received
Time Stamp object received (Only if Consumer is set)
Write a 0 to this bit to reset it.
OFF:
ON:
No failure
Optional NMT Slave startup failure, if the bit 14 is
also 0 at the same time, the NMT Master startup
stopped and the NMT Master needs to be Reset to
restart the NMT Startup process
Reserved
Refer to Subsection 5.6.10 and Section 6.19
Bit 13
Note:
If all Optional Slaves are available and this failure occurs, the
NMT Master configuration may be faulty. Check the NMT
Master settings of the assigned Optional Slaves.
OFF:
ON:
Bit 14
Bit 15
114
NMT Start-up Master: No Slave start-up in progress
NMT Start-up Master: Slave start-up in progress
Refer to Subsection 5.8.5
Note:
Reserved
This bit goes on during the NMT master/slave startup and
any time when a NMT slave error occurs and the NMT
startup master tries to re-start the faulty NMT slave
OFF:
ON:
Module works as NMT Slave
Module works as NMT Master
Reserved
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
[BFM #26] FROM/TO Watchdog
Note
• If the watchdog function is not required, it can be deactivated by writing K0 to BFM #26.
6.10
[BFM #27] Node Address
5
This BFM sets CANopen® Node-ID. The setting value range is 1 to 127.
• The BFM setting needs to be stored by BFM #22 bit 0 and afterwards be restarted by BFM #25 bit 0 to
make the new setting effective.
• A setting out of the above range or a write access in Layer-2 function mode will generate a Failure
Message in BFM #29 bit 6.
Refer to Section 14.2
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
The identification code for FX3U-CAN is available using a FROM instruction. The identification code for the
FX3U-CAN is K7170. By reading this identification code, the user may create built-in checking routines in the
PLC program to check whether the physical position of the FX3U-CAN on the special function unit bus
matches the program.
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
[BFM #30] Module ID Code
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
6.12
6
[BFM #29] Error Status
For further information on error status, refer to the following section.
Introduction of
Functions
Note
6.11
4
Wiring
• The FROM/TO watchdog can be restarted by writing the setting value to BFM #26 again, which will also
reset the error flag in BFM #29.
3
Installation
• If the watchdog expires, bit 7 in BFM #29 is set to ON, and the messages defined in the BFM #1900 to
#1927 "PLC RUN>STOP messages" area or an EMCY Object are transmitted on the network. If the
module is in a CANopen® Mode, the module will react according to the value set in the Error behavior
object (Index H1029) in the object dictionary.
For PLC RUN>STOP messages, refer to Section 9.6
For EMCY Object, refer to Subsection 5.6.13
 For Error behaviour object, refer to Section 5.7
2
Specifications
The FROM/TO Watchdog can be used when the Module is online to monitor if the PLC program accesses
data BFM #0 to BFM #19, BFM #100 to #399 or BFM #3000 to BFM #3539 cyclically.
After the first FROM/TO on the data BFM, the Watchdog will check if the next access to the data BFM takes
place before the time set in BFM #26 expires.
BFM #26 sets the Watchdog timer in 10 ms steps (default value K20 equals 200 ms).
Introduction
6.9
6.9 [BFM #26] FROM/TO Watchdog
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
115
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.13
6.13 [BFM #35] CAN Transmission Error Counter
[BFM #35] CAN Transmission Error Counter
FX3U-CAN stores the current value of the CAN transmit error counter. The CAN transmit message error
counter counts up to K256.
The counter counts 1 or 8 up if a transmission error is detected. For each transmission without error, the
counter counts 1 down.
Value
K0 to K127
K128 to K255
K256
Description
Error active status
Warning level if value is K96 to K127.
Error passive status
BUS-OFF status
Note
The Warning Level is also shown in BFM #25 bit 1, Error Passive and Bus OFF are shown in BFM #29.
6.14
[BFM #36] CAN Reception Error Counter
FX3U-CAN stores the current value of the CAN reception error counter. The CAN reception error counter
counts up to K128.
The counter counts 1 or 8 up if a reception error is detected. For each reception without error, the counter
counts 1 down.
However, when FX3U-CAN is in BUS-OFF status, K256 is stored in this BFM.
Value
K0 to K127
Description
Error active status
Warning level if value is K96 to K127.
K128
Error passive status
K256
BUS-OFF status
Note
The Warning Level is also shown in BFM #25 bit 1, Error Passive and Bus OFF are shown in BFM #29.
6.15
[BFM #37] Baud Rate Display
Displays the current baud rate of the CAN Controller in units of 0.1 kbps.
6.16
[BFM #38] Sampling Point Display
Displays the current sampling point of the CAN Controller in units of 0.1%.
6.17
[BFM #39] BFM Setting Error Display
BFM #29 bit 6 is set to ON if an attempt to write an invalid value into a Buffer Memory is detected.
BFM #39 displays the address of the target BFM of the invalid write attempt. In case an irregular value was
written to more than one BFM, only the address of the first BFM is displayed. BFM #39 is reset by writing K0
to BFM #29.
6.18
[BFM #40] BFM Initialisation/Online Mode Write Error Display
BFM #29 bit 5 is set to ON if an attempt to write into a Buffer Memory while module is in initialisation mode or
in Layer 2 online mode is detected.
BFM #40 displays the target BFM address of the invalid write attempt. In case an irregular write access is
made to more than one BFM, only the address of the first BFM is displayed. When BFM #29 bit 5 is set to
OFF, BFM #40 will be reset to K0.
116
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
[BFM #50 to #59] Time Stamp
• When the FX3U-CAN is set up as Consumer, the clock starts counting after receiving the first Time stamp
object.
• When the FX3U-CAN is set up as Producer, the clock starts after setup of BFM #50 to #58.
3
Installation
• The FX3U-CAN will only produce the Time stamp if it is the current Network Master and in CANopen® state
Operational or Pre-operational.
2
Specifications
CANopen® devices which operate a local clock may use the TIME object to adjust their own time base to the
time of the time stamp producer.
After power up or reset of the FX3U-CAN, the clock data is set to default values, and the clock is stopped.
FX3U-CAN sets up producer or consumer of Time stamp by BFM #50. When FX3U-CAN is the current
Network Master or Producer, set the clock data to BFM #51 to #59. The current Time stamp of CANopen®
network can read the clock data from BFM #51 to #57.
Introduction
6.19
6.19 [BFM #50 to #59] Time Stamp
Note
• After power up or reset of the FX3U-CAN, the clock data is set to default values, and the clock is stopped.
Wiring
• The data and time will be checked when BFM #56 is written. If value is outside of the allowed range BFM
#29 bit 6 will be set to ON.
For BFM #29 bit 6, refer to Section 14.2
4
• When the FX3U-CAN is set up as consumer, write access to BFM #51 to #59 will be ignored.
• When FX3U-CAN is the current Network Master and Producer, the first time stamp will be sent after setting
BFM #58.
• A leap year correction is provided.
• Clock tolerance: ±132 sec/month (at 25°C)
Note: When handling built in clock data of PLC
• FX Series PLC built-in RTC
K80 to K99 correspond to "1980 to 1999", and "00 to 79" correspond to "2000 to 2079".
Examples:
"80" indicates 1980. "99" indicates 1999. "00" indicates 2000. "79" indicates 2079.
BFM #50
Time stamp producer/consumer
9
Description
Sets the Time stamp producer/consumer.
The BFM directly accesses the Consumer/Producer bits of the Time COB-ID
in the Object Dictionary.
For Time object, refer to Subsection 5.6.10
Setting range:
K0: Time stamp disabled
K1: Consumer
K2:
Producer*1
K3:
Producer*1/Consumer
10
Command
Interface
*1.
Name
CAN Layer 2
Mode
BFM No.
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
• CAN network
K0 to K99 in Time stamp year corresponds to year 2000 to 2099.
The higher two digits is ignored. If writing K1984, the module will send a Time stamp with the year 2084.
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
The FX3U-CAN can handle built-in clock data of the PLC using TRD (FNC166) and TWR (FNC167) instructions.
However, be careful of different year data specifications.
For further information on the TRD (FNC166) and TWR (FNC167) instructions and built-in clock data
specifications of the PLC, refer to the following manual.
Refer to Programming manual
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
• The resolution of the Time stamp object in the FX3U-CAN is in units of second. All values outside of the
Setting range will be ignored, and the old value will persist. If a Time stamp object is received, BFM #25 bit
12 will be set.
For communication status (BFM #25), refer to Section 6.8
Introduction of
Functions
• There is always a delay in time due to latency during writing to the BFM and during the transmission over
the CAN bus.
5
Time stamp will be only produced if the module is active NMT Master.
117
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
BFM No.
6.20 [BFM #70] NMT Start all Nodes delay
Name
Description
Time stamp year
K0 to K99 (lower two digits)
K0 to K99 in Time stamp year corresponds to 2000 to 2099 year.
The higher two digits is ignored. If writing K1984, the module will send a Time
stamp with the year 2084.
BFM #52
Time stamp month
K1 (January) to K12 (December)
BFM #53
Time stamp day
K1 (1st) to K31 (31st)
BFM #54
Time stamp hour
K0 (0 o'clock) to K23 (23 o'clock)
BFM #55
Time stamp minute
K0 (00 minutes) to K59 (59 minutes)
BFM #56
Time stamp second
K0 (00 seconds) to K59 (59 seconds)
BFM #57
Time stamp Day-of-the-week
BFM #51
K0 (Sunday) to K6 (Saturday)
This BFM is read only.
The Day of the week will be calculated during setup of the RTC automatically.
BFM #58
Time stamp transmission interval
Set the transmission time interval for the Time stamp Object in multiples of
minutes. The first time stamp will be sent after setting this BFM.
If the FX3U-CAN is configured as Consumer, this setting will be ignored.
Setting range;
K0:
Time stamp transmission disabled
K1 to K1440: 1 minute to 1440 minutes (24 hours)
BFM #59
Daily correction
A constant miscount of the Clock can be corrected in steps of 1 sec / day.
Setting range: -60 to +60
Time stamp setting procedure
To keep the consistency of Time stamp data, clock data should be set by the following procedure.
1) Set Time stamp producer/consumer in BFM #50.
2) Set clock data of Year, Month, Day, Hour and Minute in BFM #51 to #55. (Producer only)
3) Set clock data of Second in BFM #56.
All clock data will be written to the RTC and checked for validity when BFM #56 is written to. If the data is
not valid, the RTC will not be set.
4) Set Time stamp transmission interval in BFM #58.
The first time stamp will be sent after BFM #58 is written to.
Time stamp read procedure
To keep the consistency of Time stamp data, clock data should be read by the following procedure.
1) Read clock data of Year from BFM #51.
All clock data will be read from the RTC and written to BFMs #51 to #57 when BFM #51 is read.
2) Read clock data of Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second and Day-of-the-week from BFM #52 to #57.
6.20
[BFM #70] NMT Start all Nodes delay
During the NMT master startup, the NMT master sends a NMT Reset communication all Nodes and NMT
Start all Nodes depending on the configuration.
This BFM value sets the minimum time between these two NMT messages, to ensure that a slow NMT Slave
recognizes the NMT Start all Nodes message.
The value can be set in ms (default: 500ms).
The setting range is 0ms to 65535ms.
For NMT Startup process, refer to Subsection 5.8.4
6.21
[BFM #71] SDO Time out
The Time out for SDO communication set with this BFM.
The value can be set in ms (default: 500ms).
The setting range is 50ms to 32767ms.
118
For SDO, refer to Subsection 5.6.4
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
[BFM #601 to #727] NMT State
Node 1
BFM #602
Node 2
BFM #603
Node 3
BFM #726
Node 126
BFM #727
Node 127
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
...........
Description
...........
BFM No.
BFM #601
5
Introduction of
Functions
• If no error control service is configured or if error control messages are missing, it is possible that an NMT
state other than the actual remote NMT state will displayed. Use these BFMs and BFM #900 to #963 NMT
Error Control Status and BFM #29 to detect error control service failures.
For BFM #900 to #963, refer to Section 6.24
For BFM #29, refer to Section 14.2
4
Wiring
• If a NMT state request is made to all nodes, all BFM displays will change.
To activate the display of a missing mandatory device, configure the Boot time out (refer to Object
Dictionary Index H1F89) and set this Node-Id as a mandatory CANopen® device (refer to Object Dictionary
Index H1F81).
For Object Dictionary Index H1F89, refer to Section 5.6
For Object Dictionary Index H1F81, refer to Subsection 5.8.7
3
Installation
Note
2
Specifications
This BFM displays the NMT status of the CANopen® nodes (index H1F82, Sub index 01 to 127 of the
CANopen® Object Dictionary). Use the SDO Command in the CIF to set the NMT state of the whole network
or of one specific node. For NMT Slaves, the NMT Status is only displayed for Nodes for which Heartbeat
Consuming is configured.
If the NMT Master is using Heartbeat Consuming or Node Guarding, the current NMT State of an NMT Slave
will display its actual NMT State as long as error control messages are received. For Nodes for which no error
control service is configured, the NMT Master will display the NMT state from the last request.
For Object H1F82, refer to Subsection 5.8.9
For Heartbeat, refer to Subsection 5.6.9
For SDO Command, refer to Section 10.2
Introduction
6.22
6.22 [BFM #601 to #727] NMT State
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
119
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.23
6.23 [BFM #750 to #859] Emergency Message Buffer
[BFM #750 to #859] Emergency Message Buffer
The FX3U-CAN will store the Emergency messages which are received from the bus to an internal buffer. This
buffer can store up to 22 emergency messages and is separated into an 11 message stack buffer (BFM #750
to #804) and an 11 message ring buffer (BFM #805 to #859). The stack buffer will store the first 11
emergency messages received after Power On or after the Emergency message buffer was cleared the last
time. The ring buffer will store the next eleven Emergency messages; all further received Emergency
telegrams will overwrite the oldest message in the ring buffer. The stack buffer will not be overwritten.
Note
To ensure that the EMCY data is handled in a consistent way, it is necessary to set in BFM #20 bit 0 or 12 to
ON before reading the EMCY data (FROM).
When clearing the entire buffer, write H0 to BFM #750.
BFM No.
High Byte
Low Byte
The Node-ID number which sent the emergency message to the network is displayed.
BFM #751
EMERGENCY data
Emergency error code*1 (oldest message)
BFM #752
EMERGENCY data
BFM #753
EMERGENCY data
BFM #754
EMERGENCY data
1st byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2
Error register
For Error register (object H1001),
refer to Subsection 5.6.2
3rd byte of Manufacturer-specific error 2nd byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2
code*2
5th byte of Manufacturer-specific error 4th byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2
stack
buffer
code*2
.....
.....
Node ID
.....
BFM #750
Node ID
The Node-ID number which sent the emergency message to the network is displayed.
BFM #801
EMERGENCY data
Emergency error code*1
BFM #802
EMERGENCY data
1st byte of Manufacturer-specific error Error register
For Error register (object H1001),
code*2
refer to Subsection 5.6.2
BFM #803
EMERGENCY data
BFM #804
EMERGENCY data
BFM #805
Node ID
The Node-ID number which sent the emergency message to the network is displayed.
(oldest message)
BFM #806
EMERGENCY data
Emergency error code*1
BFM #807
EMERGENCY data
BFM #808
EMERGENCY data
BFM #809
EMERGENCY data
3rd byte of Manufacturer-specific error 2nd byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2
code*2
5th byte of Manufacturer-specific error 4th byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2 (newest message)
1st byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2
code*2 (newest message)
Error register
For Error register (object H1001),
refer to Subsection 5.6.2
3rd byte of Manufacturer-specific error 2nd byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2
code*2
5th byte of Manufacturer-specific error 4th byte of Manufacturer-specific error
ring
buffer
code*2
code*2
.....
.....
BFM #800
.....
120
Description
Name
BFM #855
Node ID
The Node-ID number which sent the emergency message to the network is displayed.
BFM #856
EMERGENCY data
Emergency error code*1
BFM #857
EMERGENCY data
1st byte of Manufacturer-specific error Error register
For Error register (object H1001),
code*2
refer to Subsection 5.6.2
BFM #858
EMERGENCY data
BFM #859
EMERGENCY data
3rd byte of Manufacturer-specific error 2nd byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2
code*2
5th byte of Manufacturer-specific error 4th byte of Manufacturer-specific error
code*2 (newest message)
code*2 (newest message)
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Emergency error codes
In different CiA® Device/Application Profiles, more EMCY Error Codes are defined.
For EMCY Error Codes that are not in the following table,
refer to the manual of the device which sent the message
7000
0010
CiA®
8000
Monitoring – generic error
1000
Generic error
8100
Communication – generic
2000
Current – generic error
8110
CAN overrun (objects lost)
8120
CAN in error passive mode
Life guard error or heartbeat error
Current,
CANopen®
device input side – generic
CANopen®
Additional modules – generic error
3
Installation
Error reset or no error
417: CAN warning level
2
Description
0000
2100
Current inside the
device – generic
8130
2300
Current, CANopen® device output side –
generic
8140
Recovered from bus off
3000
Voltage – generic error
8150
CAN-ID collision
3100
Mains voltage – generic
8F01
to
8F7F
Life guard error or heartbeat error caused by Node-ID 1 to
Node-ID 127.
3111
CiA® 417: Mains Over voltage
8200
Protocol error – generic
3121
CiA® 417: Mains Under voltage
8210
PDO not processed due to length error
8220
PDO length exceeded
CANopen®
Voltage inside the
3211
CiA®
8230
DAM MPDO not processed, destination object not available
3221
CiA® 417: Under voltage (device internal)
8240
Unexpected SYNC data length
3300
Output voltage – generic
8250
RPDO timeout
4000
Temperature – generic error
9000
External error – generic error
4100
Ambient temperature – generic
F000
Additional functions – generic error
4200
Device temperature – generic
FF00
Device specific – generic error*2
5000
CANopen® device hardware – generic error
FF01
CiA® 417: Light barrier defect*2
6000
CANopen®
FF02
CiA® 417: Finger protector defect*2
6100
Internal software – generic
FF03
CiA® 417: Motion detection defect*2
6200
User software – generic
FF04
CiA® 417: Application error, Manufacturer-specific error
code: Byte 0 and 1 contain a Text error code, Byte 2 to 4 are
417: Over voltage (device internal)
Data set – generic
6
reserved*2
7
5th Byte 4th Byte 3rd Byte 2nd Byte 1st Byte
Description
46
58
30
30
31
"FX001": Main unit/CPU error occurs
FF00
46
58
30
30
32
"FX002": Main unit state changed from RUN to STOP
Also occurs when the main unit is powered ON
in the STOP state.
6200
46
58
30
30
33
"FX003": FROM/TO Watchdog expired
6200
46
58
30
30
34
"FX004": Module reset by BFM #25 bit 0
 For module reset, refer to Section 6.8
8250
50
44
4F
XX
XX
"PDO"X: RPDO Nr HXXXX Event Timer expired
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
FF00
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Manufacturer Specific Error code (hex)
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
EMCY Manufacturer specific error codes
EMCY Manufacturer specific error codes of the FX3U-CAN are shown below. EMCY Manufacturer
Specific error codes are expressed by five ASCII code characters. However, the lower 2 bytes of the
Manufacturer Specific Error code corresponding to Emergency Error Code "8250" uses four
hexadecimal digits instead of ASCII code.
Emergency
Error Code
(hex)
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
device software – generic error
5
Introduction of
Functions
3200
device – generic
4
Wiring
2200
6300
*2.
Error
Code
(hex)
Description
Specifications
Error
Code
(hex)
1
Introduction
*1.
6.23 [BFM #750 to #859] Emergency Message Buffer
10
Command
Interface
121
6 Allocation of Buffer Memories
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
6.24
6.24 [BFM #900 to #963] NMT Error Control Status
[BFM #900 to #963] NMT Error Control Status
This BFM displays the Node Guarding and Heartbeat status.
Note
• When resetting the local NMT error latch, write H0 to the corresponding bit of this BFM.
• If bit 2 to 7 of any node is ON, BFM #29 bit 10 will be set.
• If the bit 10 in BFM #29 is reset to OFF, all failure bits in BFM #900 to #963 will be reset to OFF.
Description
BFM No.
Node 1 status
BFM #901
Node 4 status
Node 3 status
BFM #902
Node 6 status
Node 5 status
BFM #903
Node 8 status
Node 7 status
......
Node 2 status
......
Low Byte
BFM #900
......
High Byte
BFM #962
Node 126 status
Node 125 status
BFM #963
Unused (H0)
Node 127 status
Status Flags
Bit No.
122
Description
Bit 0
Node guarding
Node Guarding is active
Bit 1
Heartbeat
Heartbeat is active. This bit is set after reception of the first Heartbeat message.
Bit 2
Node guarding
One node guarding message is missed or Toggle Bit error.
Bit 3
Node guarding
No response and Lifetime elapsed
Bit 4
NMT startup failed.
Bit 5
Node guarding
The node does not have the expected state.
Bit 6
Node guarding
Guarding failed. Node Guarding remote requests of the NMT Master was not received in the expected time.
Bit 7
Heartbeat
Heartbeat is missing
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.1 Data Transfer Location for CANopen® 405 Mode
1
Introduction
7.
CANopen® 405 Mode
2
Data Transfer Location for CANopen® 405 Mode
This section explains data transfer locations for CANopen® 405 mode. BFM #10000 to #10319 and #11000 to
#11319 are used as data transfer locations.
• The data will be exchanged only when the module is in OPERATIONAL State.
4
Wiring
• To ensure that the FX3U-CAN module can handle the CANopen® data in a consistent way, it is necessary
to use the data exchange by BFM #20 bit 0 or 8 to ON before reading PDO data (FROM) and after writing
PDO data (TO) to the module.
The data exchange control signal ensures, by internal buffer exchange, that TO data from the PLC will be
transmitted with its corresponding PDO at the same time.
Direct TO BFM Access to the CANopen® 405 Object
Note
Index
HA0C0
signed
16 bit
object
Index
HA040
unsigned
8 bit
object
Index
HA000
signed
8 bit
object
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
..…
..…
01
01
BFM #0 and #11000, lower 8 bit
02
02
BFM #0 and #11000, higher 8 bit
03
03
BFM #1 and #11001, lower 8 bit
04
04
BFM #1 and #11001, higher 8 bit
05
05
BFM #2 and #11002, lower 8 bit
06
06
BFM #2 and #11002, higher 8 bit
07
07
BFM #3 and #11003, lower 8 bit
08
08
BFM #3 and #11003, higher 8 bit
09
09
BFM #4 and #11004, lower 8 bit
0A
0A
BFM #4 and #11004, higher 8 bit
0B
0B
BFM #5 and #11005, lower 8 bit
0C
0C
BFM #5 and #11005, higher 8 bit
9
10
..…
03
8
..…
03
02
Assigned BFM
..…
03
02
01
..…
02
01
..…
01
7
Command
Interface
Index
HA100
unsigned
16 bit
object
CAN Layer 2
Mode
Index
HA1C0
signed
32 bit
object
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Index
HA200
unsigned
32 bit
object
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Index
HA240
float
32 bit
object
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
The data which are written to the BFM will only be copied into the Object Dictionary when they are mapped
into a PDO. Example: BFM #11000 is assigned to the Object Dictionary Indexes/Sub-indexes HA240/H01,
HA200/H01, HA1C0/H01, HA100/H01, HA0C0/H01, HA040/H01, H02 and HA000/H01, H02. If none of these
Indexes are mapped into a TPDO, the data will not be copied from the BFM into any of the assigned Object
Dictionary Indexes/Sub-indexes.
5
Introduction of
Functions
Use the TO instruction to write data to the following locations. The default TPDO mapping is assigned to
unsigned 16 bit objects (Index HA100).
To change this setting, use the SDO command in the CIF or a CANopen® configuration software.
For SDO command in the CIF, refer to Section 10.2
®
For the CANopen configuration software, refer to the manual of the software to be used
..…
7.1.1
3
Installation
Note
Specifications
7.1
123
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Index
HA240
float
32 bit
object
Index
HA200
unsigned
32 bit
object
Index
HA1C0
signed
32 bit
object
Index
HA100
unsigned
16 bit
object
Index
HA0C0
signed
16 bit
object
Index
HA040
unsigned
8 bit
object
Index
HA000
signed
8 bit
object
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
13
13
25
25
BFM #18 and #11018, lower 8 bit
26
26
BFM #18 and #11018, higher 8 bit
27
27
BFM #19 and #11019, lower 8 bit
28
28
BFM #19 and #11019, higher 8 bit
16
16
0B
77
77
78
78
3C
29
29
BFM #100 and #11020, lower 8 bit
2A
2A
BFM #100 and #11020, higher 8 bit
2B
2B
BFM #101 and #11021, lower 8 bit
2C
2C
BFM #101 and #11021, higher 8 bit
ED
ED
BFM #198 and #11118, lower 8 bit
EE
EE
BFM #198 and #11118, higher 8 bit
EF
EF
BFM #199 and #11119, lower 8 bit
F0
F0
BFM #199 and #11119, higher 8 bit
..…
15
..…
15
Assigned BFM
..…
14
..…
3C
14
..…
3C
0B
0A
..…
..…
0B
0A
..…
0A
Index
HA240
float
32 bit
object
Index
HA200
unsigned
32 bit
object
Index
HA1C0
signed
32 bit
object
Index
HA101
unsigned
16 bit
object
Index
HA0C1
signed
16 bit
object
Index
HA041
unsigned
8 bit
object
Index
HA001
signed
8 bit
object
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
01
01
01
01
BFM #200 and #11120, lower 8 bit
02
02
BFM #200 and #11120, higher 8 bit
03
03
BFM #201 and #11121, lower 8 bit
04
04
BFM #201 and #11121, higher 8 bit
..…
77
77
78
78
78
ED
ED
BFM #318 and #11238, lower 8 bit
EE
EE
BFM #318 and #11238, higher 8 bit
EF
EF
BFM #319 and #11239, lower 8 bit
F0
F0
BFM #319 and #11239, higher 8 bit
..…
02
..…
..…
02
..…
78
3D
Assigned BFM
..…
78
3D
..…
..…
3D
Index
HA240
float
32 bit
object
Index
HA200
unsigned
32 bit
object
Index
HA1C0
signed
32 bit
object
Index
HA102
unsigned
16 bit
object
Index
HA0C2
signed
16 bit
object
Index
HA042
unsigned
8 bit
object
Index
HA002
signed
8 bit
object
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
01
01
01
01
BFM #320 and #11240, lower 8 bit
02
02
BFM #320 and #11240, higher 8 bit
02
02
03
03
BFM #321 and #11241, lower 8 bit
04
04
BFM #321 and #11241, higher 8 bit
50
50
A0
9D
9D
BFM #398 and #11318, lower 8 bit
9E
9E
BFM #398 and #11318, higher 8 bit
..…
4F
..…
4F
Assigned BFM
..…
..…
..…
A0
79
..…
A0
79
..…
..…
79
124
7.1 Data Transfer Location for CANopen® 405 Mode
9F
9F
BFM #399 and #11319, lower 8 bit
A0
A0
BFM #399 and #11319, higher 8 bit
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
®
Direct FROM BFM access to the CANopen 405 Object
Note
If data is written with an SDO into the Object Dictionary to one of the BFM corresponding Indexes/Subindexes, only the last data written is visible in the BFM. The data of the corresponding Indexes/Sub-indexes
are not synchronized to each other.
Index
HA580
unsigned
16 bit
object
Index
HA540
signed
16 bit
object
Index
HA4C0
unsigned
8 bit
object
Index
HA480
signed
8 bit
object
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
01
01
02
02
03
03
0A
14
14
15
15
16
16
..…
0B
77
77
3C
78
78
05
05
BFM #2 and #10002, lower 8 bit
06
06
BFM #2 and #10002, higher 8 bit
07
07
BFM #3 and #10003, lower 8 bit
08
08
BFM #3 and #10003, higher 8 bit
09
09
BFM #4 and #10004, lower 8 bit
0A
0A
BFM #4 and #10004, higher 8 bit
0B
0B
BFM #5 and #10005, lower 8 bit
0C
0C
BFM #5 and #10005, higher 8 bit
25
25
BFM #18 and #10018, lower 8 bit
26
26
BFM #18 and #10018, higher 8 bit
27
27
BFM #19 and #10019, lower 8 bit
28
28
BFM #19 and #10019, higher 8 bit
29
29
BFM #100 and #10020, lower 8 bit
2A
2A
BFM #100 and #10020, higher 8 bit
2B
2B
BFM #101 and #10021, lower 8 bit
2C
2C
BFM #101 and #10021, higher 8 bit
5
6
..…
13
BFM #1 and #10001, higher 8 bit
ED
ED
BFM #198 and #10118, lower 8 bit
EE
EE
BFM #198 and #10118, higher 8 bit
EF
EF
BFM #199 and #10119, lower 8 bit
F0
F0
BFM #199 and #10119, higher 8 bit
7
8
..…
..…
13
BFM #1 and #10001, lower 8 bit
04
..…
06
03
04
..…
06
..…
..…
03
03
..…
05
..…
..…
05
BFM #0 and #10000, higher 8 bit
..…
3C
04
BFM #0 and #10000, lower 8 bit
02
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
3C
0B
04
01
02
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
0B
0A
02
..…
0A
03
01
01
4
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
..…
03
02
..…
02
01
..…
01
Assigned BFM
Introduction of
Functions
Index
HA640
signed
32 bit
object
Wiring
Index
HA680
unsigned
32 bit
object
3
Installation
Index
HA6C0
float
32 bit
object
2
Specifications
Use the FROM instruction to read data from the following locations. The default RPDO mapping is assigned
to unsigned 16 bit objects (Index HA580).
To change this setting, use the SDO command in the CIF or a CANopen® configuration software.
For SDO command in the CIF, refer to Section 10.2
®
For the CANopen configuration software, refer to the manual of the software to be used
Introduction
7.1.2
7.1 Data Transfer Location for CANopen® 405 Mode
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
125
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.1 Data Transfer Location for CANopen® 405 Mode
Index
HA6C0
float
32 bit
object
Index
HA680
unsigned
32 bit
object
Index
HA640
signed
32 bit
object
Index
HA581
unsigned
16 bit
object
Index
HA541
signed
16 bit
object
Index
HA4C1
unsigned
8 bit
object
Index
HA481
signed
8 bit
object
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
01
01
01
01
BFM #200 and #10120, lower 8 bit
02
02
BFM #200 and #10120, higher 8 bit
03
03
BFM #201 and #10121, lower 8 bit
04
04
BFM #201 and #10121, higher 8 bit
..…
77
77
78
78
78
ED
BFM #318 and #10238, lower 8 bit
EE
EE
BFM #318 and #10238, higher 8 bit
EF
EF
BFM #319 and #10239, lower 8 bit
F0
F0
BFM #319 and #10239, higher 8 bit
Index
HA6C0
float
32 bit
object
Index
HA680
unsigned
32 bit
object
Index
HA640
signed
32 bit
object
Index
HA582
unsigned
16 bit
object
Index
HA542
signed
16 bit
object
Index
HA4C2
unsigned
8 bit
object
Index
HA482
signed
8 bit
object
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
subindex
(hex)
01
01
01
01
BFM #320 and #10240, lower 8 bit
02
02
BFM #320 and #10240, higher 8 bit
03
03
BFM #321 and #10241, lower 8 bit
04
04
BFM #321 and #10241, higher 8 bit
..…
4F
4F
A0
50
50
9D
9D
9E
9E
BFM #398 and #10318, higher 8 bit
9F
9F
BFM #399 and #10319, lower 8 bit
A0
A0
BFM #399 and #10319, higher 8 bit
..…
02
..…
..…
02
..…
A0
79
Assigned BFM
..…
A0
79
..…
..…
79
126
ED
..…
02
..…
..…
02
..…
78
3D
..…
78
3D
..…
..…
3D
Assigned BFM
BFM #398 and #10318, lower 8 bit
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
®
PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen 405 Mode
*1.
Example: Vector ProCANopen
2
Specifications
In order to exchange data by CANopen®, the data channels between the nodes must be defined or "mapped".
For large networks, the usage of a proper CANopen® network configuration tool*1 which is able to support
easy parameter settings and PDO mapping is recommended.
To build up a small network or for testing purposes, the FX3U-CAN supports three PDO mapping/binding
modes which can be executed by the Command Interface. By using these predefined Mapping
configurations, the CAN object ID (COB-ID) number for data exchange of each node is clearly defined.
For function mode setting for CANopen® 405 mode, refer to Section 6.5
Introduction
7.2
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
3
Note that the NMT Master startup process uses SDO's which can be result in an Error of the CIF SDO
command if the NMT Startup Master acceses the remote Node at the same time.
4
Wiring
It is strongly recommended to execute the Mapping Commands only in the Pre-operational mode of all related
CANopen® nodes.
For a complete list of the assignment between the data BFM and the CANopen® data objects and their
location in the Object Dictionary, refer to the following section.
Refer to Subsection 7.2.1 and Subsection 7.2.2
Installation
Note
5
Introduction of
Functions
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
127
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.2.1
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
TPDO mapping table
The assignment in this table is only for the default TPDO mapping setting (unsigned 16 bit objects). To
change the BFM assignment of the TPDO, the mapping parameter has to be changed in the Object
Dictionary.
For the default TPDO mapping setting, refer to Subsection 7.1.1
For the TPDO communication and mapping parameter in the Object Dictionary,
refer to Subsection 5.6.5
For the SDO command in the CIF, refer to Section 10.2
For the CANopen® configuration software, refer to the manual of the software to be used
TPDO
Mode 0 Mapping
(default)
Mode A Mapping
Mode B Mapping
Assigned BFM
COB ID
TPDO 1
H0180 + node ID
H0180 + node ID
#0 to #3
#11000 to #11003
TPDO 2
H0280 + node ID
H0280 + node ID
#4 to #7
#11004 to #11007
TPDO 3
H0380 + node ID
H0380 + node ID
#8 to #11
#11008 to #11011
TPDO 4
H0480 + node ID
H0480 + node ID
#12 to #15
#11012 to #11015
TPDO 5
#16 to #19
#11016 to #11019
TPDO 6
#100 to #103
#11020 to #11023
TPDO 7
#104 to #107
#11024 to #11027
TPDO 8
#108 to #111
#11028 to #11031
TPDO 9
#112 to #115
#11032 to #11035
TPDO 10
#116 to #119
#11036 to #11039
TPDO 11
#120 to #123
#11040 to #11043
TPDO 12
#124 to #127
#11044 to #11047
TPDO 13
#128 to #131
#11048 to #11051
TPDO 14
#132 to #135
#11052 to #11055
TPDO 15
128
Disabled
These PDO can be activated by mode B mapping commands or SDO.
#136 to #139
#11056 to #11059
TPDO 16
#140 to #143
#11060 to #11063
TPDO 17
#144 to #147
#11064 to #11067
TPDO 18
#148 to #151
#11068 to #11071
TPDO 19
#152 to #155
#11072 to #11075
TPDO 20
#156 to #159
#11076 to #11079
TPDO 21
#160 to #163
#11080 to #11083
TPDO 22
#164 to #167
#11084 to #11087
TPDO 23
#168 to #171
#11088 to #11091
TPDO 24
#172 to #175
#11092 to #11095
TPDO 25
#176 to #179
#11096 to #11099
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
1
Mode 0 Mapping
(default)
Mode A Mapping
Mode B Mapping
Introduction
TPDO
Assigned BFM
COB ID
TPDO 26
#180 to #183
#11100 to #11103
TPDO 27
#184 to #187
#11104 to #11107
TPDO 28
#188 to #191
#11108 to #11111
TPDO 29
#192 to #195
#11112 to #11115
TPDO 30
#196 to #199
#11116 to #11119
TPDO 31
#200 to #203
#11120 to #11123
TPDO 32
#204 to #207
#11124 to #11127
TPDO 33
#208 to #211
#11128 to #11131
TPDO 34
#212 to #215
#11132 to #11135
TPDO 35
#216 to #219
#11136 to #11139
TPDO 36
#220 to #223
#11140 to #11143
TPDO 37
#224 to #227
#11144 to #11147
5
TPDO 38
#228 to #231
#11148 to #11151
TPDO 39
#232 to #235
#11152 to #11155
Introduction of
Functions
3
Installation
4
Wiring
#236 to #239
#11156 to #11159
6
#240 to #243
#11160 to #11163
TPDO 42
#244 to #247
#11164 to #11167
TPDO 43
#248 to #251
#11168 to #11171
TPDO 44
#252 to #255
#11172 to #11175
TPDO 45
#256 to #259
#11176 to #11179
TPDO 46
#260 to #263
#11180 to #11183
TPDO 47
#264 to #267
#11184 to #11187
8
TPDO 48
#268 to #271
#11188 to #11191
TPDO 49
#272 to #275
#11192 to #11195
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
TPDO 41
Disabled
These PDO can be activated by mode B mapping commands or SDO.
Specifications
TPDO 40
2
TPDO 50
#276 to #279
#11196 to #11199
TPDO 51
#280 to #283
#11200 to #11203
TPDO 52
#284 to #287
#11204 to #11207
TPDO 53
#288 to #291
#11208 to #11211
TPDO 54
#292 to #295
#11212 to #11215
TPDO 55
#296 to #299
#11216 to #11219
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
129
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
TPDO
Mode 0 Mapping
(default)
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
Mode A Mapping
Mode B Mapping
Assigned BFM
COB ID
TPDO 56
#300 to #303
#11220 to #11223
TPDO 57
#304 to #307
#11224 to #11227
TPDO 58
#308 to #311
#11228 to #11231
TPDO 59
#312 to #315
#11232 to #11235
TPDO 60
#316 to #319
#11236 to #11239
TPDO 61
#320 to #323
#11240 to #11243
TPDO 62
#324 to #327
#11244 to #11247
TPDO 63
#328 to #331
#11248 to #11251
TPDO 64
#332 to #335
#11252 to #11255
TPDO 65
#336 to #339
#11256 to #11259
TPDO 66
#340 to #343
#11260 to #11263
TPDO 67
#344 to #347
#11264 to #11267
TPDO 68
130
Disabled
These PDO can be activated by mode B mapping commands or SDO.
#348 to #351
#11268 to #11271
TPDO 69
#352 to #355
#11272 to #11275
TPDO 70
#356 to #359
#11276 to #11279
TPDO 71
#360 to #363
#11280 to #11283
TPDO 72
#364 to #367
#11284 to #11287
TPDO 73
#368 to #371
#11288 to #11291
TPDO 74
#372 to #375
#11292 to #11295
TPDO 75
#376 to #379
#11296 to #11299
TPDO 76
#380 to #383
#11300 to #11303
TPDO 77
#384 to #387
#11304 to #11307
TPDO 78
#388 to #391
#11308 to #11311
TPDO 79
#392 to #395
#11312 to #11315
TPDO 80
#396 to #399
#11316 to #11319
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
RPDO mapping table
The assignment in this table is only for the default RPDO mapping setting (unsigned 16 bit objects). To
change the BFM assignment of the RPDO, the mapping parameter has to be changed in the Object
Dictionary.
3
Mode A Mapping
Mode B Mapping
Installation
RPDO
Mode 0 Mapping
(default)
Assigned BFM
COB ID
RPDO 1
H0200 + node ID
H0181
#0 to #3
#10000 to #10003
RPDO 2
H0300 + node ID
H0281
#4 to #7
#10004 to #10007
H0381
RPDO 4
H0500 + node ID
H0481
#12 to #15
#10012 to #10015
RPDO 5
H0182
#16 to #19
#10016 to #10019
RPDO 6
H0282
#100 to #103
#10020 to #10023
RPDO 7
H0382
#104 to #107
#10024 to #10027
RPDO 8
H0482
#108 to #111
#10028 to #10031
RPDO 9
H0183
#112 to #115
#10032 to #10035
RPDO 10
H0283
#116 to #119
#10036 to #10039
RPDO 11
H0383
RPDO 12
H0483
RPDO 13
H0184
Node 2 data
Node 3 data
#120 to #123
#10040 to #10043
Disabled
Can be defined by mode B
mapping command
parameter or SDO.
H0284
Node 4 data
#124 to #127
#10044 to #10047
#132 to #135
#10052 to #10055
#140 to #143
#10060 to #10063
RPDO 17
H0185
#144 to #147
#10064 to #10067
RPDO 18
H0285
#148 to #151
#10068 to #10071
RPDO 19
H0385
#152 to #155
#10072 to #10075
RPDO 20
H0485
#156 to #159
#10076 to #10079
RPDO 21
H0186
#160 to #163
#10080 to #10083
RPDO 22
H0286
#164 to #167
#10084 to #10087
RPDO 23
H0386
#168 to #171
#10088 to #10091
RPDO 24
H0486
#172 to #175
#10092 to #10095
Node 6 data
8
9
10
Command
Interface
H0484
CAN Layer 2
Mode
RPDO 16
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
#136 to #139
#10056 to #10059
Node 5 data
7
#128 to #131
#10048 to #10051
H0384
RPDO 15
6
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Disabled
These PDO can be
activated by mode B
mapping commands or
SDO.
5
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
H0400 + node ID
4
Introduction of
Functions
RPDO 3
#8 to #11
#10008 to #10011
Wiring
Node 1 data
RPDO 14
2
Specifications
For the default RPDO mapping setting, refer to Subsection 7.1.2
For the RPDO communication and mapping parameter in the Object Dictionary,
refer to Subsection 5.6.5
For the SDO command in the CIF, refer to Section 10.2
For the CANopen® configuration software, refer to the manual of the software to be used
Introduction
7.2.2
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
131
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
RPDO
Mode 0 Mapping
(default)
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
Mode A Mapping
Mode B Mapping
Assigned BFM
COB ID
RPDO 25
H0187
#176 to #179
#10096 to #10099
RPDO 26
H0287
#180 to #183
#10100 to #10103
RPDO 27
H0387
#184 to #187
#10104 to #10107
RPDO 28
H0487
#188 to #191
#10108 to #10111
RPDO 29
H0188
#192 to #195
#10112 to #10115
RPDO 30
H0288
#196 to #199
#10116 to #10119
RPDO 31
H0388
#200 to #203
#10120 to #10123
RPDO 32
H0488
#204 to #207
#10124 to #10127
Node 7 data
Node 8 data
RPDO 33
#208 to #211
#10128 to #10131
RPDO 34
#212 to #215
#10132 to #10135
RPDO 35
#216 to #219
#10136 to #10139
RPDO 36
#220 to #223
#10140 to #10143
RPDO 37
#224 to #227
#10144 to #10147
RPDO 38
#228 to #231
#10148 to #10151
RPDO 39
RPDO 40
Disabled
Can be defined by mode B
mapping command
parameter or SDO.
#232 to #235
#10152 to #10155
#236 to #239
#10156 to #10159
RPDO 41
#240 to #243
#10160 to #10163
RPDO 42
#244 to #247
#10164 to #10167
RPDO 43
RPDO 44
132
Disabled
These PDO can be
activated by mode B
mapping commands or
SDO.
Disabled
These PDO can be
activated by mode B
mapping commands or
SDO.
#248 to #251
#10168 to #10171
#252 to #255
#10172 to #10175
RPDO 45
#256 to #259
#10176 to #10179
RPDO 46
#260 to #263
#10180 to #10183
RPDO 47
#264 to #267
#10184 to #10187
RPDO 48
#268 to #271
#10188 to #10191
RPDO 49
#272 to #275
#10192 to #10195
RPDO 50
#276 to #279
#10196 to #10199
RPDO 51
#280 to #283
#10200 to #10203
RPDO 52
#284 to #287
#10204 to #10207
RPDO 53
#288 to #291
#10208 to #10211
RPDO 54
#292 to #295
#10212 to #10215
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
1
Mode 0 Mapping
(default)
Mode A Mapping
Mode B Mapping
Introduction
RPDO
Assigned BFM
COB ID
RPDO 55
#296 to #299
#10216 to #10219
RPDO 56
#300 to #303
#10220 to #10223
RPDO 57
#304 to #307
#10224 to #10227
RPDO 58
#308 to #311
#10228 to #10231
RPDO 59
#312 to #315
#10232 to #10235
RPDO 60
#316 to #319
#10236 to #10239
RPDO 61
#320 to #323
#10240 to #10243
RPDO 62
#324 to #327
#10244 to #10247
RPDO 63
#328 to #331
#10248 to #10251
RPDO 64
#332 to #335
#10252 to #10255
RPDO 65
#336 to #339
#10256 to #10259
RPDO 66
#340 to #343
#10260 to #10263
5
#344 to #347
#10264 to #10267
Introduction of
Functions
4
Wiring
Disabled
Can be defined by mode B
mapping command
parameter or SDO.
3
Installation
RPDO 68
Disabled
These PDO can be activated by mode B mapping
commands or SDO.
Specifications
RPDO 67
2
#348 to #351
#10268 to #10271
RPDO 69
#352 to #355
#10272 to #10275
RPDO 70
#356 to #359
#10276 to #10279
RPDO 71
#360 to #363
#10280 to #10283
RPDO 72
#364 to #367
#10284 to #10287
RPDO 73
#368 to #371
#10288 to #10291
RPDO 74
#372 to #375
#10292 to #10295
RPDO 75
#376 to #379
#10296 to #10299
RPDO 76
#380 to #383
#10300 to #10303
8
RPDO 77
#384 to #387
#10304 to #10307
RPDO 78
#388 to #391
#10308 to #10311
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
RPDO 79
#392 to #395
#10312 to #10315
RPDO 80
#396 to #399
#10316 to #10319
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
133
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.2.3
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
Mode 0 mapping
By executing the Mode 0 mapping command shown below, the number of automatically assigned TPDOs and
RPDOs becomes four. All RPDO/TPDO communication and mapping parameter and the BFM/Object
dictionary assignment will be reset to factory default. The BFM content of the Receive/Transmit Process Data
BFM's will be set to zero.
BFM #0 to #15 are distributed to RPDOs and TPDOs 1 to 4 as shown in the TPDO/RPDO mapping table.
This setting is useful for a network that features many different types of nodes or as a base for a network
mapping configured with the Mode B mapping command.
The PDOs 5 to 80 (BFM #16 to #19 and #100 to #399) are disabled in the default settings but further mapping
of these PDOs can be accomplished by using the Mode B mapping technique or SDO.
For RPDO/TPDO communication and mapping table, refer to Subsection 5.6.5
For BFM assignment of the Receive/Transmit Process Data BFM's,
refer to Subsection 7.1.1 and Subsection 7.1.2
For Mode B COB-ID mapping command, refer to Subsection 7.2.5
Execution procedure: Mode 0 mapping
1) To execute the Mode 0 command, write H8900 to BFM #1000.
2) After the Mapping is successfully established, H8901 is written to BFM #1000.
In case of trouble, refer to Section 10.9
Description
BFM No.
BFM #1000
FROM (Read Access)
H8901:
HFFFF:
H000F:
BFM #1001 to #1066 Unused
7.2.4
Mapping successful established
CIF Busy
Error
TO (Write Access)
Command:
H8900
Unused
Mode A mapping
Easy setup of a CANopen® network of up to eight FX3U-CAN nodes can be accomplished by simply using the
Mode A Mapping configuration. All FX3U-CAN modules have to be set up via the local PLC. One of the nodes
must be configured as the network master. The network master can be defined in the Network Configuration
tool or by writing to the Object Dictionary using the CIF SDO write command.
All RPDO/TPDO communication and mapping parameter and the BFM/Object dictionary assignment will be
reset to Mode A default. The BFM content of the Receive/Transmit Process Data BFM's will be set to zero.
The COB-IDs will be changed to the values shown in the tables in the Subsection 7.2.1 and Subsection 7.2.2.
After all stations have executed the Mode A Mapping command, 16 data words can be exchanged with other
FX3U-CAN modules.
A closer look at the mapping shows that the TPDO is dependent upon the node ID but the mapping for the
RPDO is fixed to the default TPDO COB-ID of stations 1 to 8. The advantage is that the data location of all
FX3U-CAN modules is the same.
To include non FX3U-CAN CANopen® nodes to the network, it is necessary to change the RPDO and
communication parameters of these stations. This can be done by the Mode B mapping command, the SDO
write access command, or by a standard configuration tool.
For RPDO/TPDO communication and mapping table, refer to Subsection 5.6.5
For SDO command in the CIF, refer to Section 10.2
®
For the CANopen configuration software, refer to the manual of the software to be used
For BFM assignment of the Receive/Transmit Process Data BFM's,
refer to Subsection 7.1.1 and Subsection 7.1.2
For Mode B COB-ID mapping command, refer to Subsection 7.2.5
134
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
1
1) To execute the Mode A command, write H8200 to BFM #1000.
2) After the Mapping is successfully established, H8201 is written to BFM #1000.
In case of trouble, refer to Section 10.9
BFM No.
FROM (Read Access)
H8201:
H82FF:
BFM #1000
HFFFF:
H000F:
TO (Write Access)
Mapping successfully established
Local node number not in range 1 to 8
Local node number must be in the range 1 to 8
CIF Busy
Error
7.2.5
H8200
3
Unused
Installation
BFM #1001 to #1066 Unused
Command:
Mode B COB-ID mapping
Mode B COB-ID Mapping options
Reference
page 135
page 136
Assign Additional TPDO COB-IDs to the Local Node
page 137
5
Description
H8301:
BFM #1000 HFFFF:
H000F:
Mapping successfully established
CIF Busy
Error
TO (Write Access)
Command:
BFM #1001 H0
H0
BFM #1002 H0
H0
H8300
10
..…
Other Mode B COB-ID mapping options or terminate with
HFFFF in BFM #1003.
BFM #1066
135
Command
Interface
BFM #1003
Other Mode B COB-ID mapping command response.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
FROM (Read Access)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
This command sets Mode B default settings on the local Node. All RPDO/TPDO communication and mapping
parameter and the BFM/Object dictionary assignment will be reset to factory default. The BFM content of the
Receive / Transmit Process Data BFM's will be set to zero. The COB-IDs will be changed to the values shown
in the tables in the Subsection 7.2.1 and Subsection 7.2.2.
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Reset Mapping Table to default Mode B COB-ID mapping
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
The Mode B COB-ID mapping command will modify the current PDO COB-ID at the Destination, therefore it
is important to have a clearly defined mapping base before executing any Mode B commands. Executing the
Mode B COB-ID Mapping commands before adjusting the PDO mapping parameters (adjusting the PDO data
length) may create errors in the data transmission or module operation.
The PDO mapping base can be the "Mode 0" mapping or the "Mode A" mapping explained in previous
sections to prepare default RPDO and TPDO formats. Another method to create (or reset) a Mapping base is
to initialize the Mode B Mapping with a special instruction at the beginning of the Mode B Mapping Command.
If it is necessary to change the remote node hardware mapping, this can be done by the SDO write access
command or by a standard CANopen® network configuration tool.
The configuration with the Mode B mapping is controlled by parameters, which are displayed in the table on
the following page.
For the SDO write access command in the CIF, refer to Subsection 10.2.3
For BFM assignment of the Receive/Transmit Process Data BFM's,
refer to Subsection 7.1.1 and Subsection 7.1.2
®
For the CANopen configuration software, refer to the manual of the software to be used
For the default RPDO and TPDO formats, refer to Subsection 7.2.1 and Subsection 7.2.2
Introduction of
Functions
Assign Source TPDO COB-ID to Destination RPDO COB-ID
BFM No.
4
Wiring
With Mode B COB-ID Mapping, it is possible to build up bindings between any nodes connected to the FX3UCAN module and the FX3U-CAN module itself or any other nodes also connected to the FX3U-CAN. Mode B
COB-ID mapping is limited to the binding of the PDO COB-ID already configured in the remote stations (No
change of the PDO mapping parameter).
All three Mode B COB-ID mapping options can be mixed within one CIF Function call.
Reset Mapping Table to default Mode B COB-ID mapping
2
Specifications
Description
Introduction
Execution procedure: Mode A mapping
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
Assign Source TPDO COB-ID to Destination RPDO COB-ID
This command copies the COB-ID of the Source Node TPDO to the Destination Node RPDO. Please ensure
that the PDO mapping parameter data fit together before executing this command. Otherwise it can result in
communication failures and/or a malfunction of the Destination Node.
To change the PDO communication parameter or the PDO mapping parameter, please use the SDO
command in the CIF or a CANopen® network configuration software.
For the SDO write access command in the CIF, refer to Subsection 10.2.3
For the CANopen® configuration software, refer to the manual of the software to be used
• Mode B TPDO/RPDO COB-ID Setup scenarios
COB-ID read
FX3U-CAN =
Source Node
(TPDO)
COB-ID set
Destination
Node (RPDO)
FX3U-CAN =
Destination
Node (RPDO)
COB-ID set
Source Node
(TPDO)
FX3U-CAN
Source Node
(TPDO)
COB-ID read
COB-ID read
Destination
Node (RPDO)
COB-ID set
Description
BFM No.
H8301:
H83FF:
BFM #1000
HFFFF:
H000F:
TO (Write Access)
FROM (Read Access)
Mapping successfully established
Parameter Error
CIF Busy
Error
High Byte
Command:
Low Byte
H8300
Specific TPDO of Source 1
BFM #1002
Node ID number of Destination 1
Specific RPDO of Destination 1
..…
Diagnosis Data
H0000:
No Error
All other values: The corresponding
BFM #1063
parameter caused an
error.
BFM #1064
Refer to the Subsection 7.2.6
BFM #1065
BFM #1066
..…
Node ID number of Source 1
..…
BFM #1001
Node ID number of Source 32
Specific TPDO of Source 32
Node ID number of Destination 32
Specific RPDO of Destination 32
Node ID number of Source 33
Specific TPDO of Source 33
Node ID number of Destination 33
Specific RPDO of Destination 33
Note
With one execution of the Mode B COB-ID mapping command, up to 33 binding connections between
CANopen® stations can be made. To establish more data connections, the command can be repeated as
often as necessary.
IMPORTANT
If less than 33 bindings are used (max. number), the next BFM (n+1) needs to be terminated with HFFFF.
1. Source parameter
The Source parameter specifies the data telegram producer to be bound. It consists of two bytes, with the
node ID in the high byte and the PDO number in the low byte.
• Node ID
The node ID range is 1 to 127.
The local FX3U-CAN can be specified by its actual node number or by using "0".
• TPDO number
The TPDO number setting range is 1 to 255.
The FX3U-CAN will read the TPDO COB-ID from the object dictionary of the source node. This COB-ID is
written in the next step to the Destination node's RPDO communication parameter.
Example:
Source parameter = H1009
The high byte of the source parameter represents the node ID (H10). The low byte specifies TPDO 9. This
node/TPDO will be bound to the node/RPDO in the destination BFM that directly follows the source BFM.
Note
An error will be generated if the Destination parameter is not configured.
136
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
1
The Destination parameter defines the destination for the corresponding source parameter data. It consists of
two bytes, with the node ID in the high byte and the PDO number in the low byte.
Introduction
2. Destination Parameter
• Node ID
The node ID range is 1 to 127.
The local FX3U-CAN can be specified by its actual node number or by using "0".
2
Specifications
Example:
Destination parameter = H0203
The Source data will be bound to RPDO #3 of Node 2.
3
Installation
• RPDO number
The RPDO number setting range is 1 to 255.
The Destination node COB-ID is checked before the Source data is written to the communication
parameter.
Note
An error message will be generated if the destination parameter is not configured.
4
• Mode B TPDO/RPDO COB-ID Setup scenarios
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
COB-ID set
Not used
Source Node
(TPDO)
5
Introduction of
Functions
By default every CANopen® node uses four COB-IDs to exchange its data with other CANopen® stations. All
COB-IDs for Data transmission are by default reserved for nodes 1 to 127. If it is necessary to transmit more
than 4 PDOs (more than 16 words) from one node, this node must occupy COB-IDs of other (unused)
stations. It is recommended to use the identifier of higher number stations for this purpose (127, 126, 125,
etc). The lower the used COB-ID is, the higher the priority of the messages. Thus, assigning the COB-ID of
TPDO4 from node 127 to highly important data should be avoided because all other TPDO COB-IDs have a
higher priority for transmission on the CANopen® bus.
This command assigns the COB-ID of an unused TPDO of the Source Node to the defined TPDO of the local
Node. Ensure that the Source Node doesn't exist in the network or that the Source Node TPDO is
deactivated.
Wiring
Assign Additional TPDO COB-IDs to the Local Node
FX3U-CAN =
Destination
Node (TPDO)
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
137
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
Description
BFM No.
BFM #1000
TO (Write Access)
FROM (Read Access)
H8301:
H83FF:
HFFFF:
H000F:
Mapping successfully established
Parameter Error
CIF Busy
Error
High Byte
Command:
Low Byte
H8300
Specific TPDO of Source 1
Destination Node ID: H80
Specific TPDO of local Node 1
..…
Diagnosis Data
H0000:
No Error
All other values: The corresponding
BFM #1063
parameter caused an
error.
BFM #1064
Refer to the Subsection 7.2.6
BFM #1065
BFM #1066
..…
Node ID number of Source 1
BFM #1002
..…
BFM #1001
Node ID number of Source 32
Specific TPDO of Source 32
Destination Node ID: H80
Specific TPDO of local Node 32
Node ID number of Source 33
Specific TPDO of Source 33
Destination Node ID: H80
Specific TPDO of local Node 33
Note
With one execution of the Mode B COB-ID mapping command, up to 33 binding connections between
CANopen® stations can be made. To establish more data connections, the command can be repeated as
often as necessary.
IMPORTANT
If less than 33 bindings are used (max. number), the next two BFMs (n+1 and n+2) need to be terminated
with HFFFF.
1. Source parameter
The Source parameter defines the node which is the default "owner" of the COB-ID. It consists of two bytes,
with the node ID in the high byte and the PDO number in the low byte.
• Node ID
The node ID range is 1 to 127.
The local FX3U-CAN can't be the Source.
• TPDO number
The TPDO number setting range is 1 to 4.
This COB-ID is written to the local node's PDO communication parameter. The TPDO COB-ID is equal to:
H0180 + Source node ID for TPDO1, H0280 + Source node ID for TPDO2, H0380 + Source node ID for
TPDO3, H0480 + Source node ID for TPDO4.
2. Destination Parameter
The Destination parameter defines the destination for the corresponding source parameter data. It consists of
two bytes, with the node ID in the high byte and the PDO number in the low byte.
• Node ID
The node ID must be set to H80.
• RPDO number
The TPDO number setting range is 5 to 80.
Example:
Source = H7F01, Destination = H8005
The local FX3U-CAN module will use the COB-ID of TPDO1 from node 127 as its own TPDO5 (COB-ID H1FF
= H180 + H7F).
Note
• For default COB-IDs used for TPDO 1 to 4, refer to Subsection 5.6.1.
• An attempt to assign a COB-ID to the first four PDO will cause an error.
• A setting of the Source Node ID to the local node number will cause an error.
138
7 CANopen® 405 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Mode B COB-ID Mapping Errors
This subsection describes the parameter error H83FF occurring in mode B COB-ID Mapping.
If the CIF was not able to execute the "mode B COB-ID Mapping" command with the given parameter set, it
will return H83FF in BFM #1000. BFM #1001 to #1066 will show which parameter caused the error(s).
1. Source Parameter Errors
If an error occurs in the Source Parameters, the error code in the following table is stored in BFM #1001 to
#1066 as diagnosis data. The "nn" part of the error code indicates Node ID, and the "mm" indicates PDO
number.
Description
HFFFF
Node ID higher than 127, or PDO number is 0.
Check the Node ID and PDO number.
Hnn00
No response from node "nn" (time out).
Check the status of the Node ID "nn".
H00mm
COB-ID is H80000000 (PDO disabled)
Hnnmm
Node ID "nn" can not be accessed to PDO number "mm" in the communication parameter.
Check that the PDO number is supported.
3
Installation
Error No. (Hex)
2
Specifications
Example:
If the source parameter 5 (BFM #1009) caused an error, the return value of BFM #1009 will not be H0000.
Introduction
7.2.6
7.2 PDO Mapping/Binding of the Network for CANopen® 405 Mode
4
Wiring
2. Destination Parameter Errors
If an error occurs in the Destination Parameters, the error code in the following table is stored in BFM #1001
to #1066 as diagnosis data. The "nn" part of the error code indicates Node ID, and the "mm" indicates PDO
number.
Hnn00
No response from node ID "nn" (time out).
Check the status of the Node ID "nn".
6
Previous COB-ID of destination was H80000000. RPDO was disabled. Binding was accomplished, but there
might be an error in the RPDO mapping parameter for the destination node.*1
Node ID "nn" can not be accessed to PDO number "mm" in the communication parameter.
Check the PDO number is supported.
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Note
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Please take care with this error message.
If the RPDO in the destination is disabled, it is uncertain whether there exists some mapping inside
the destination node for this RPDO. This node might receive the data, but it is maybe not transferred
to any I/O or data register.
When the Destination node is an FX3U-CAN, the PDO data will be mapped to a BFM (if the mapping
parameter was not changed previously). In the case of the FX3U-CAN, the error can be judged as a
warning that can be completely avoided if the mapping is done by the remote FX3U-CAN node itself.
Another possibility is to set the remote FX3U-CAN to Mode A mapping. In this case, RPDO 1 to 32
COB-IDs are different from H80000000. The disadvantage is that if all RPDO are mapped, they will
also be received. This is not really a problem, but the FX3U-CAN cycle time will be a little bit longer,
and it may be confusing if unused BFM are also changing their data values.
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
HFFFF
Hnnmm
*1.
Description
The following states are possible.
Check the Node ID and PDO number.
• Node ID higher than 127.
• PDO number is 0.
• The parameter may have been skipped if a Source error occurred.
H00mm
Introduction of
Functions
Error No. (Hex)
5
9
3. Other Errors
If the parameter is not set properly, the error code in the following table is stored in BFM #1001 to #1066 as
diagnosis data. The "nn" part of the error code indicates Node ID and the "mm" indicates PDO number.
CAN Layer 2
Mode
If the local FX3U-CAN is the destination, error H00mm is disabled.
10
Description
Hnnmm
Source node ID "nn" must be in the range 1 to 127, PDO number "mm" must be 1 to 4 for the source parameter
and 5 to 127 for the destination parameter.
139
Command
Interface
Error No. (Hex)
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
8.
CANopen® 417 Mode
This chapter describes the data transfer locations of the CANopen® 417 Mode.
For further information on application Profile CiA® 417 V2.1 for lift control systems, refer to the following
section.
Refer to Section 5.10
Note
• The BFM data exchange will only be handled if the corresponding lift number bit in BFM #3000/13000 is
set to ON.
Refer to Subsection 5.10.1 and BFM #3000/13000 in the following table.
• To ensure that the FX3U-CAN module can handle the CANopen® data in a consistent way, it is necessary
to set BFM #20 bit 0, 8 or 9 (only Virtual input mapping) to ON before reading PDO data (FROM) and after
writing PDO data (TO) to the module.
The data exchange control signal ensures, by internal buffer exchange, that TO data from the PLC will be
transmitted with its corresponding PDO at the same time.
For BFM #20 bit 0, refer to Section 6.4
• To activate the CiA® 417 Lift Application Profile mode, write into BFM #21 the value K417, set BFM #22 to
K1 to store the BFM configuration and reset the Module.
• Only BFMs corresponding to the Lift Numbers for which the module is activated will be received and
transferred.
For the Lift number, refer to Subsection 5.10.1 and BFM #3000/13000 in the following table
8.1
Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
This section explains data transfer locations for CANopen® 417 Mode. BFM #3000 to #3539, BFM #13000 to
13539 and BFM #12001 to 12539 are used as data transfer locations.
• General Setting
BFM No. and access type
FROM/TO
BFM #3000
BFM #13000
Lift No.
1 to 8
Description
Lift Number
Initial value
Reference
H1
Section 8.2
• Call controller
The call controller receives all call requests from the input panels, and transmits the corresponding
acknowledgements to the output panels.
- Receive Objects
BFM No. and access type
FROM
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
BFM #3002
BFM #12002
BFM #3003
BFM #12003
BFM #12005
..…
BFM #12004
BFM #3005
..…
BFM #3004
BFM #3049
140
FROM
BFM #12049
Lift No.
Description
Initial value
Reference
1 to 8
Virtual input mapping
H0
Section 8.3
1 to 8
Virtual input mapping message counter
H0
-
-
-
Reserved
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
BFM No. and access type
TO
FROM/TO
BFM #3003
BFM #13003
BFM #3004
BFM #13004
BFM #3049
..…
BFM #13002
..…
BFM #13001
BFM #3002
1 to 8
Description
Virtual output mapping
Reserved
Initial value
Reference
H0
Section 8.3
-
-
2
Specifications
BFM #3001
Lift No.
Introduction
- Transmission Objects
BFM #13049
- Receive Objects
BFM No. and access type
FROM
FROM
Lift No.
Description
Initial value
BFM #12050
Door 1
BFM #12051
Door 2
BFM #3052
BFM #12052
BFM #3053
BFM #12053
BFM #3054
BFM #12054
Door 1
BFM #3055
BFM #12055
Door 2
BFM #3056
BFM #12056
BFM #3057
BFM #12057
BFM #3058
BFM #12058
Door 1
BFM #3059
BFM #12059
Door 2
BFM #3060
BFM #12060
BFM #3061
BFM #12061
BFM #3062
BFM #12062
Door 1
BFM #3063
BFM #12063
Door 2
BFM #3064
BFM #12064
BFM #3065
BFM #12065
Door 4
BFM #3066
BFM #12066
Door 1
BFM #3067
BFM #12067
BFM #3068
BFM #12068
BFM #3069
BFM #12069
BFM #3070
BFM #12070
Door 1
BFM #3071
BFM #12071
Door 2
BFM #3072
BFM #12072
BFM #3073
BFM #12073
Door 4
BFM #3074
BFM #12074
Door 1
BFM #3075
BFM #12075
BFM #3076
BFM #12076
BFM #3077
BFM #12077
BFM #3078
BFM #12078
Door 1
BFM #3079
BFM #12079
Door 2
BFM #3080
BFM #12080
BFM #3081
BFM #12081
BFM #3082
BFM #12082
Door 1
BFM #3083
BFM #12083
Door 2
BFM #3084
BFM #12084
BFM #3085
BFM #12085
1
Door status word
Door 3
Reference
4
HFFFF
Wiring
BFM #3050
BFM #3051
3
Installation
• Car door controller
The car door controller transmits commands (e.g. open and close) to the car door unit and receives status
information from the car door unit and the light barrier unit.
HFFFF
5
Door 4
2
Door status word
Door 3
3
Door status word
Door 3
Introduction of
Functions
Door 4
HFFFF
Door 4
5
Door status word
Door status word
Door 3
Door 2
Door 3
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
4
6
HFFFF
Section 8.4
7
HFFFF
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Door 4
6
Door status word
Door 3
Door 2
Door 3
HFFFF
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
7
Door status word
HFFFF
Door 4
8
Door status word
9
HFFFF
CAN Layer 2
Mode
Door 3
Door 4
1
Door position
Door 3
HFFFF
Section 8.5
10
Door 4
Command
Interface
141
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
BFM No. and access type
FROM
142
FROM
Lift No.
Description
Initial value
BFM #3086
BFM #12086
Door 1
BFM #3087
BFM #12087
Door 2
BFM #3088
BFM #12088
BFM #3089
BFM #12089
BFM #3090
BFM #12090
Door 1
BFM #3091
BFM #12091
Door 2
BFM #3092
BFM #12092
BFM #3093
BFM #12093
Door 4
BFM #3094
BFM #12094
Door 1
BFM #3095
BFM #12095
BFM #3096
BFM #12096
BFM #3097
BFM #12097
BFM #3098
BFM #12098
Door 1
BFM #3099
BFM #12099
Door 2
BFM #3100
BFM #12100
BFM #3101
BFM #12101
BFM #3102
BFM #12102
Door 1
BFM #3103
BFM #12103
Door 2
BFM #3104
BFM #12104
BFM #3105
BFM #12105
BFM #3106
BFM #12106
Door 1
BFM #3107
BFM #12107
Door 2
BFM #3108
BFM #12108
BFM #3109
BFM #12109
Door 4
BFM #3110
BFM #12110
Door 1
BFM #3111
BFM #12111
BFM #3112
BFM #12112
BFM #3113
BFM #12113
BFM #3114
BFM #12114
Door 1
BFM #3115
BFM #12115
Door 2
BFM #3116
BFM #12116
BFM #3117
BFM #12117
BFM #3118
BFM #12118
Door 1
BFM #3119
BFM #12119
Door 2
BFM #3120
BFM #12120
BFM #3121
BFM #12121
BFM #3122
BFM #12122
Door 1
BFM #3123
BFM #12123
Door 2
BFM #3124
BFM #12124
BFM #3125
BFM #12125
Door 4
BFM #3126
BFM #12126
Door 1
BFM #3127
BFM #12127
BFM #3128
BFM #12128
BFM #3129
BFM #12129
BFM #3130
BFM #12130
Door 1
BFM #3131
BFM #12131
Door 2
BFM #3132
BFM #12132
BFM #3133
BFM #12133
BFM #3134
BFM #12134
Door 1
BFM #3135
BFM #12135
Door 2
BFM #3136
BFM #12136
BFM #3137
BFM #12137
2
Door position
Door 3
Reference
HFFFF
Door 4
3
4
Door position
Door position
Door 3
Door 2
Door 3
HFFFF
HFFFF
Door 4
5
Door position
Door 3
HFFFF
Section 8.5
Door 4
6
Door position
Door 3
HFFFF
Door 4
7
8
Door position
Door position
Door 3
Door 2
Door 3
HFFFF
HFFFF
Door 4
1
Light barrier status
Door 3
HFF
Door 4
2
Light barrier status
Door 3
HFF
Door 4
3
4
Light barrier status
Light barrier status
Door 3
Door 2
Door 3
HFF
Section 8.6
HFF
Door 4
5
Light barrier status
Door 3
HFF
Door 4
6
Light barrier status
Door 3
Door 4
HFF
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
FROM
FROM
Lift No.
Description
Initial value
BFM #3140
BFM #12140
BFM #3141
BFM #12141
BFM #3142
BFM #12142
Door 1
BFM #3143
BFM #12143
Door 2
BFM #3144
BFM #12144
BFM #3145
BFM #12145
BFM #3146
BFM #12146
7
Light barrier status
Door 3
HFF
Door 4
8
Light barrier status
Door 3
2
Section 8.6
HFF
Door 4
Reserved
-
-
Initial value
Reference
3
Installation
BFM #3299
..…
Door 1
Door 2
..…
BFM #12138
BFM #12139
Reference
Specifications
BFM #3138
BFM #3139
Introduction
BFM No. and access type
BFM #12299
- Transmission Objects
BFM No. and access type
TO
FROM/TO
Lift No.
Description
BFM #13051
BFM #3052
BFM #13052
BFM #3053
BFM #13053
BFM #3054
BFM #13054
Door 1
BFM #3055
BFM #13055
Door 2
BFM #3056
BFM #13056
BFM #3057
BFM #13057
BFM #3058
BFM #13058
Door 1
BFM #3059
BFM #13059
Door 2
BFM #3060
BFM #13060
BFM #3061
BFM #13061
Door 4
BFM #3062
BFM #13062
Door 1
BFM #3063
BFM #13063
BFM #3064
BFM #13064
BFM #3065
BFM #13065
Door 4
BFM #3066
BFM #13066
Door 1
BFM #3067
BFM #13067
BFM #3068
BFM #13068
BFM #3069
BFM #13069
BFM #3070
BFM #13070
Door 1
BFM #3071
BFM #13071
Door 2
BFM #3072
BFM #13072
BFM #3073
BFM #13073
BFM #3074
BFM #13074
Door 1
BFM #3075
BFM #13075
Door 2
BFM #3076
BFM #13076
BFM #3077
BFM #13077
Door 4
BFM #3078
BFM #13078
Door 1
BFM #3079
BFM #13079
BFM #3080
BFM #13080
BFM #3081
BFM #13081
BFM #3082
BFM #13082
4
Door 1
1
Door control word
Door 2
Door 3
HFFFF
HFFFF
5
Door 4
2
Door control word
Door 3
Introduction of
Functions
Door 4
3
4
Door control word
Door control word
Door 3
Door 2
Door 3
Door 2
Door 3
HFFFF
6
HFFFF
Section 8.4
7
HFFFF
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
5
Door control word
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Door 4
6
Door control word
Door 3
HFFFF
8
Door 4
7
Door control word
Door 3
Door 2
Door 3
HFFFF
9
HFFFF
CAN Layer 2
Mode
8
Door control word
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
BFM #3299
..…
BFM #3051
..…
BFM #13050
Wiring
BFM #3050
Door 4
Reserved
-
-
10
BFM #13299
Command
Interface
143
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
• Car drive controller
The car drive controller transmits commands to the car drive unit. It receives status information from the
car drive unit and the loadmeasuring unit. If the profile position mode is used, the car drive controller needs
additional status information from the car position unit.
The car drive controller uses the Door position which is also used by the car door controller.
- Receive Objects
BFM No. and access type
FROM
144
FROM
BFM #3300
BFM #12300
BFM #3301
BFM #12301
BFM #3302
BFM #12302
BFM #3303
BFM #12303
BFM #3304
BFM #12304
BFM #3305
BFM #12305
BFM #3306
BFM #12306
BFM #3307
BFM #12307
BFM #3308
BFM #12308
BFM #3309
BFM #12309
BFM #3310
BFM #12310
BFM #3311
BFM #12311
BFM #3312
BFM #12312
BFM #3313
BFM #12313
BFM #3314
BFM #12314
BFM #3315
BFM #12315
BFM #3316
BFM #12316
BFM #3317
BFM #12317
BFM #3318
BFM #12318
BFM #3319
BFM #12319
BFM #3320
BFM #12320
BFM #3321
BFM #12321
BFM #3322
BFM #12322
BFM #3323
BFM #12323
BFM #3324
BFM #12324
BFM #3325
BFM #12325
BFM #3326
BFM #12326
BFM #3327
BFM #12327
BFM #3328
BFM #12328
BFM #3329
BFM #12329
BFM #3330
BFM #12330
BFM #3331
BFM #12331
BFM #3332
BFM #12332
BFM #3333
BFM #12333
BFM #3334
BFM #12334
BFM #3335
BFM #12335
BFM #3336
BFM #12336
BFM #3337
BFM #12337
BFM #3338
BFM #12338
BFM #3339
BFM #12339
BFM #3340
BFM #12340
BFM #3341
BFM #12341
BFM #3342
BFM #12342
BFM #3343
BFM #12343
BFM #3344
BFM #12344
BFM #3345
BFM #12345
BFM #3346
BFM #12346
BFM #3347
BFM #12347
Lift No.
Description
Initial value
Reference
Position unit 1
Position unit 2
1
Position value
HFFFFFFFF
Position unit 3
Position unit 4
Position unit 1
Position unit 2
2
Position value
HFFFFFFFF
Position unit 3
Position unit 4
Position unit 1
Position unit 2
3
Position value
HFFFFFFFF
Position unit 3
Position unit 4
Section 8.7
Position unit 1
Position unit 2
4
Position value
HFFFFFFFF
Position unit 3
Position unit 4
Position unit 1
Position unit 2
5
Position value
HFFFFFFFF
Position unit 3
Position unit 4
Position unit 1
Position unit 2
6
Position value
HFFFFFFFF
Position unit 3
Position unit 4
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
FROM
FROM
BFM #12350
BFM #3351
BFM #12351
BFM #3352
BFM #12352
BFM #3353
BFM #12353
BFM #3354
BFM #12354
BFM #3355
BFM #12355
BFM #3356
BFM #12356
BFM #3357
BFM #12357
BFM #3358
BFM #12358
BFM #3359
BFM #12359
BFM #3360
BFM #12360
BFM #3361
BFM #12361
BFM #3362
BFM #12362
BFM #3363
BFM #12363
Reference
Position unit 1
2
Position unit 2
7
Position value
HFFFFFFFF
Position unit 3
Position unit 4
Section 8.7
3
Position unit 1
Position unit 2
8
Position value
HFFFFFFFF
Position unit 3
4
Position unit 4
BFM #3364
BFM #12364
Position unit 1
BFM #3365
BFM #12365
Position unit 2
BFM #3366
BFM #12366
BFM #3367
BFM #12367
BFM #3368
BFM #12368
Position unit 1
BFM #3369
BFM #12369
Position unit 2
BFM #3370
BFM #12370
BFM #3371
BFM #12371
Position unit 4
BFM #3372
BFM #12372
Position unit 1
BFM #3373
BFM #12373
BFM #3374
BFM #12374
BFM #3375
BFM #12375
1
Speed value car
Position unit 3
Wiring
BFM #3350
Initial value
Installation
BFM #12348
BFM #12349
Description
Specifications
BFM #3348
BFM #3349
Lift No.
Introduction
BFM No. and access type
H0
Position unit 4
3
Speed value car
Speed value car
Position unit 3
Position unit 2
Position unit 3
5
H0
Introduction of
Functions
2
H0
6
BFM #12376
Position unit 1
BFM #3377
BFM #12377
Position unit 2
BFM #3378
BFM #12378
BFM #3379
BFM #12379
Position unit 4
BFM #3380
BFM #12380
Position unit 1
BFM #3381
BFM #12381
Position unit 2
BFM #3382
BFM #12382
BFM #3383
BFM #12383
BFM #3384
BFM #12384
Position unit 1
BFM #3385
BFM #12385
Position unit 2
BFM #3386
BFM #12386
BFM #3387
BFM #12387
Position unit 4
BFM #3388
BFM #12388
Position unit 1
BFM #3389
BFM #12389
BFM #3390
BFM #12390
BFM #3391
BFM #12391
BFM #3392
BFM #12392
Position unit 1
BFM #3393
BFM #12393
Position unit 2
BFM #3394
BFM #12394
BFM #3395
BFM #12395
4
5
Speed value car
Speed value car
Position unit 3
Position unit 3
H0
Section 8.8
7
H0
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
BFM #3376
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Position unit 4
H0
8
Position unit 4
6
Speed value car
Position unit 3
Position unit 2
Position unit 3
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
7
Speed value car
H0
Position unit 4
Speed value car
Position unit 3
CAN Layer 2
Mode
8
9
H0
Position unit 4
10
Command
Interface
145
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
BFM No. and access type
FROM
146
FROM
Lift No.
Description
Initial value
BFM #3396
BFM #12396
Position unit 1
BFM #3397
BFM #12397
Position unit 2
BFM #3398
BFM #12398
BFM #3399
BFM #12399
BFM #3400
BFM #12400
Position unit 1
BFM #3401
BFM #12401
Position unit 2
BFM #3402
BFM #12402
BFM #3403
BFM #12403
Position unit 4
BFM #3404
BFM #12404
Position unit 1
BFM #3405
BFM #12405
BFM #3406
BFM #12406
BFM #3407
BFM #12407
BFM #3408
BFM #12408
Position unit 1
BFM #3409
BFM #12409
Position unit 2
BFM #3410
BFM #12410
BFM #3411
BFM #12411
Position unit 4
BFM #3412
BFM #12412
Position unit 1
BFM #3413
BFM #12413
BFM #3414
BFM #12414
BFM #3415
BFM #12415
BFM #3416
BFM #12416
Position unit 1
BFM #3417
BFM #12417
Position unit 2
BFM #3418
BFM #12418
BFM #3419
BFM #12419
Position unit 4
BFM #3420
BFM #12420
Position unit 1
BFM #3421
BFM #12421
BFM #3422
BFM #12422
BFM #3423
BFM #12423
BFM #3424
BFM #12424
Position unit 1
BFM #3425
BFM #12425
Position unit 2
BFM #3426
BFM #12426
BFM #3427
BFM #12427
BFM #3428
BFM #12428
1
BFM #3429
BFM #12429
2
BFM #3430
BFM #12430
3
BFM #3431
BFM #12431
4
BFM #3432
BFM #12432
5
BFM #3433
BFM #12433
6
BFM #3434
BFM #12434
7
BFM #3435
BFM #12435
8
BFM #3436
BFM #12436
1
BFM #3437
BFM #12437
2
BFM #3438
BFM #12438
3
BFM #3439
BFM #12439
4
BFM #3440
BFM #12440
5
BFM #3441
BFM #12441
6
BFM #3442
BFM #12442
7
BFM #3443
BFM #12443
8
1
Acceleration value car
Position unit 3
Reference
H0
Position unit 4
2
3
Acceleration value car
Acceleration value car
Position unit 3
Position unit 2
Position unit 3
H0
H0
Position unit 4
4
5
Acceleration value car
Acceleration value car
Position unit 3
Position unit 2
Position unit 3
H0
Section 8.9
H0
Position unit 4
6
7
Acceleration value car
Acceleration value car
Position unit 3
Position unit 2
Position unit 3
H0
H0
Position unit 4
8
Acceleration value car
Position unit 3
H0
Position unit 4
Status word
H0
Section 8.10
Modes of operation display
H0
Section 8.11
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
FROM
FROM
BFM #12446
BFM #3447
BFM #12447
BFM #3448
BFM #12448
BFM #3449
BFM #12449
BFM #3450
BFM #12450
BFM #3451
BFM #12451
BFM #3452
BFM #12452
BFM #3453
BFM #12453
BFM #3454
BFM #12454
BFM #3455
BFM #12455
BFM #3456
BFM #12456
BFM #3457
BFM #12457
BFM #3458
BFM #12458
BFM #3459
BFM #12459
BFM #3463
BFM #12463
BFM #3464
BFM #12464
BFM #3465
BFM #12465
BFM #3466
BFM #12466
BFM #3467
BFM #12467
BFM #3468
BFM #12468
BFM #3469
BFM #12469
BFM #3470
BFM #12470
BFM #3471
BFM #12471
BFM #3472
BFM #12472
BFM #3473
BFM #12473
BFM #3474
BFM #12474
BFM #3475
BFM #12475
BFM #3476
BFM #12476
BFM #12492
BFM #3493
BFM #12493
BFM #3494
BFM #12494
BFM #3495
BFM #12495
BFM #3496
BFM #12496
BFM #3497
BFM #12497
BFM #3498
BFM #12498
BFM #3499
BFM #12499
BFM #3500
BFM #12500
BFM #3501
BFM #12501
BFM #3502
BFM #12502
BFM #3503
BFM #12503
BFM #3504
BFM #12504
BFM #3505
BFM #12505
BFM #3506
BFM #12506
BFM #3507
BFM #12507
H0
Section 8.12
3
6
7
4
8
1
2
5
3
4
Position actual value
HFFFFFFFF
Section 8.13
5
6
6
7
8
7
Reserved
-
-
1
8
2
3
4
Velocity actual value
H0
Section 8.15
9
5
6
7
10
8
Command
Interface
BFM #3492
Control effort
5
CAN Layer 2
Mode
BFM #12491
4
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
BFM #3491
3
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
..…
BFM #12462
..…
BFM #3462
2
2
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
BFM #12460
BFM #12461
1
Introduction of
Functions
BFM #3460
BFM #3461
Reference
Wiring
BFM #3446
Initial value
Installation
BFM #12444
BFM #12445
Description
Specifications
BFM #3444
BFM #3445
Lift No.
Introduction
BFM No. and access type
147
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
BFM No. and access type
FROM
FROM
BFM #3508
BFM #12508
BFM #3509
BFM #12509
BFM #3510
BFM #12510
BFM #3511
BFM #12511
BFM #3512
BFM #12512
BFM #3513
BFM #12513
BFM #3514
BFM #12514
BFM #3515
BFM #12515
BFM #3516
BFM #12516
BFM #3517
BFM #12517
BFM #3518
BFM #12518
BFM #3519
BFM #12519
BFM #3520
BFM #12520
BFM #3521
BFM #12521
BFM #3522
BFM #12522
BFM #3523
BFM #12523
BFM #3524
BFM #12524
BFM #3525
BFM #12525
BFM #3526
BFM #12526
BFM #3527
BFM #12527
BFM #3528
BFM #12528
BFM #3529
BFM #12529
BFM #3530
BFM #12530
BFM #3531
BFM #12531
BFM #3532
BFM #12532
BFM #3533
BFM #12533
BFM #3534
BFM #12534
BFM #3535
BFM #12535
BFM #3536
BFM #12536
BFM #3537
BFM #12537
BFM #3538
BFM #12538
BFM #3539
BFM #12539
Lift No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Absolute load value
Load value
Load value
Load value
Load value
Load value
Load value
7
Load value
8
Load value
Initial value
1
Load signalling
2
Load signalling
3
Load signalling
4
Load signalling
5
Load signalling
6
Load signalling
7
Load signalling
8
Load signalling
Reference
HFFFF
SI unit
H2
Absolute load value
HFFFF
SI unit
H2
Absolute load value
HFFFF
SI unit
H2
Absolute load value
HFFFF
SI unit
H2
Absolute load value
HFFFF
SI unit
H2
Absolute load value
HFFFF
SI unit
H2
Absolute load value
HFFFF
SI unit
H2
Absolute load value
HFFFF
SI unit
H2
Load signal
H0
Load signal interrupt
H0
Load signal
H0
Load signal interrupt
H0
Load signal
H0
Load signal interrupt
H0
Load signal
H0
Load signal interrupt
H0
Load signal
H0
Load signal interrupt
H0
Load signal
H0
Load signal interrupt
H0
Load signal
H0
Load signal interrupt
H0
Load signal
H0
Load signal interrupt
H0
Section 8.16
Section 8.17
- Transmission Objects
BFM No. and access type
..…
BFM #3300
148
FROM/TO
Lift No.
Description
Initial value
Reference
-
-
H0
Section 8.10
BFM #13300
..…
TO
Reserved
BFM #3427
BFM #13427
BFM #3428
BFM #13428
1
BFM #3429
BFM #13429
2
BFM #3430
BFM #13430
3
BFM #3431
BFM #13431
4
BFM #3432
BFM #13432
5
BFM #3433
BFM #13433
6
BFM #3434
BFM #13434
7
BFM #3435
BFM #13435
8
Control word
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
TO
FROM/TO
Lift No.
2
BFM #3438
BFM #13438
3
BFM #3439
BFM #13439
4
BFM #3440
BFM #13440
5
BFM #3441
BFM #13441
6
BFM #3442
BFM #13442
7
BFM #3443
BFM #13443
8
BFM #3444
BFM #13444
BFM #13462
BFM #3463
BFM #13463
BFM #3464
BFM #13464
BFM #3465
BFM #13465
BFM #3466
BFM #13466
BFM #3467
BFM #13467
BFM #3468
BFM #13468
BFM #3469
BFM #13469
BFM #3470
BFM #13470
BFM #3471
BFM #13471
BFM #3472
BFM #13472
BFM #3473
BFM #13473
BFM #3474
BFM #13474
BFM #3475
BFM #13475
BFM #3476
BFM #13476
BFM #3477
BFM #13477
BFM #3478
BFM #13478
BFM #3479
BFM #13479
BFM #3480
BFM #13480
BFM #3481
BFM #13481
BFM #3482
BFM #13482
BFM #3483
BFM #13483
BFM #3484
BFM #13484
BFM #3485
BFM #13485
BFM #3486
BFM #13486
BFM #3487
BFM #13487
BFM #3488
BFM #13488
BFM #3489
BFM #13489
BFM #3490
BFM #13490
BFM #3491
BFM #13491
-
3
1
2
4
3
4
Target position
H0
Section 8.13
5
5
6
7
6
8
1
2
7
3
4
Profile velocity
H0
Section 8.14
5
8
6
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
BFM #3462
-
Reserved
2
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
BFM #13461
Section 8.11
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
BFM #13460
BFM #3461
H0
Introduction of
Functions
BFM #13459
BFM #3460
Modes of operation
Wiring
BFM #3459
Reference
Installation
..…
1
BFM #13437
..…
BFM #13436
BFM #3437
Initial value
Specifications
BFM #3436
Description
Introduction
BFM No. and access type
7
8
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
149
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.1 Buffer Memories Lists of Lift Application
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
BFM No. and access type
TO
BFM #13493
BFM #3494
BFM #13494
BFM #3495
BFM #13495
BFM #3496
BFM #13496
BFM #3497
BFM #13497
BFM #3498
BFM #13498
BFM #3499
BFM #13499
BFM #3500
BFM #13500
BFM #3501
BFM #13501
BFM #3502
BFM #13502
BFM #3503
BFM #13503
BFM #3504
BFM #13504
BFM #3505
BFM #13505
BFM #3506
BFM #13506
BFM #3507
BFM #13507
BFM #3508
BFM #13508
..…
BFM #13492
BFM #3493
..…
BFM #3492
BFM #3539
150
FROM/TO
BFM #13539
Lift No.
Description
Initial value
Reference
Target velocity
H0
Section 8.15
-
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reserved
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.2 Lift Number
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Lift Number
Introduction
8.2
1
This BFM contains the lift number to which the FX3U-CAN is assigned.
The Bit for the assigned lift number is set to ON (1).
2
Note
Data save to Flash ROM
Specifications
Data can be saved in Flash ROM by CIF.
For Store Object Dictionary Settings in the CIF, refer to Section 10.6
3
Only the application BFMs for which the Lift corresponding bit is set will be updated.
Bit 15
BFM #3000
BFM #13000
Bit 8
Reserved
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Lift 8
Lift 7
Lift 6
Lift 5
Lift 4
Lift 3
Lift 2
Lift 1
Virtual Input/Output Mapping
Virtual input mapping
These BFMs contain the last received input data from one of the digital input panel group objects.
Receive Ring Buffer for 252 messages. The oldest data will be shown as first.
The current numbers of messages in the receive Buffer can be read from BFM #3004 or #12004.
When the receive buffer is empty, BFM #3001 to #3003 or #12001 to #12003 shows the value H0.
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Description
BFM No.
BFM #3003
BFM #12003
High Byte
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
Low Byte
High Byte
Low Byte
High Byte
Low Byte
Door field
Floor field
Lift field
Sub-function field
Basic function field
1. Basic function field [Low byte in BFM #3001 and #12001]
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
Low Byte
Value (hex)
Description
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
Low Byte
Value (hex)
Description
0D
High priority call to destination floor
Generic input
0E
Special function
02
Standard hall call request
0F
Access code upload request
03
Low priority hall call request
10
Speech connection request
04
High priority hall call request
11
Area monitoring connection request
05
Standard car call request
12
Fire detector
06
Low priority car call request
07
High priority car call request
08
Standard destination call
13 to 15
16
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
Reserved
01
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
00
Reserved
Status of safety-related circuitries
(This is not safety-related information.)
Low priority destination call
17 to 1F
Reserved
High priority destination call
20
Guest call
0B
Standard call to destination floor
21 to 7F
Reserved
0C
Low priority call to destination floor
80 to FF
Manufacturer-specific
10
Command
Interface
09
0A
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
BFM #3001 to #3003
Function data field
BFM #12001 to #12003
BFM #3002
BFM #12002
5
Introduction of
Functions
When BFM #3001 to #3003 and #12001 to #12003 are read, the virtual input mapping information is read
from BFMs. When BFM #13001 to #13003 are read, the virtual output mapping information is read from
BFMs. And when BFM #3001 to #3003 and #13001 to #13003 are written to, the virtual output mapping
information is written to BFMs.
8.3.1
4
Wiring
8.3
.....
Installation
Description
BFM No.
151
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.3 Virtual Input/Output Mapping
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
2. Sub-function field [High byte in BFM #3001 and #12001]
The Sub-function field interprets depending on the basic function field value.
Basic
Sub-Function
Function Field
Field
02 to 04
05 to 0D
0E
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
Low Byte
Value (hex)
Description
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
High Byte
Value (hex)
Description
00
Reserved
12
Special service
01
Generic input 1
13
Service run
…
01
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
High Byte
Value (hex)
…
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
Low Byte
Value (hex)
Basic
Sub-Function
Function Field
Field
14
Dogging service enable
FE
Generic input 254
15
Dogging service up
FF
Reserved
16
Dogging service down
00
Reserved
17
Fire alarm (external fire alarm system)
01
Hall call up
18
Provide priority
19
Lift attendant start button
1A
Lift attendant drive through button
02
Hall call down
03
Hall call
04
Hall call extra up
1B
Security run
05
Hall call extra down
1C
Second call panel
06
Hall call extra
1D
Door enable
07 to FF
Reserved
1E
Call cancel button fire operation
00
Reserved
1F
Fire alarm reset
Floor number 1 to 254
20
Body detector (e.g. person in car)
Earthquake detector
01 to FE
0E
FF
Reserved
21
00
Reserved
22 to FF
Reserved
01
Request fan 1
0F to 11
00 to FF
Reserved
02
Request fan 2
00
Reserved
03
Request load time 1
12
01 to FE
04
Request load time 2
05
Key lock 1
06
Key lock 2
07
Key lock 3
01 to 03
08
Key lock 4
04
Hall/swing door
09
Request door open
05
Car door
0A
Request door close
0B
Fire recall (key switch hall panel)
13 to 15
16
0C
Fire service (key switch car panel)
0D
Hall call disable
0E
Attendant service
0F
VIP service
17 to 1F
20
Fire detector 1 to 254
FF
Reserved
00 to FF
Reserved
00
Reserved
Safety-related circuitry 1 to 3
06
Door lock
07 to FF
Reserved
00 to FF
Reserved
00
Reserved
01 to FE
Guest call 1 to 254
FF
Reserved
10
Out of order
21 to 7F
00 to FF
Reserved
11
Bed passenger service
80 to FF
00 to FF
Manufacturer-specific
3. Lift field [Low byte in BFM #3002 and #12002]
The bit for the requested lift number is set to ON (1).
152
BFM #3002
BFM #12002
Low Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Description
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
BFM #3002 Bit 0 to 7
Lift 8
Lift 7
Lift 6
Lift 5
Lift 4
Lift 3
Lift 2
Lift 1
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.3 Virtual Input/Output Mapping
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
BFM #3002
BFM #12002
High Byte
Value (hex)
00
FF
Description
2
Car panel
Panel of floor 1 to 254
Specifications
01 to FE
Introduction
4. Floor field [High byte in BFM #3002 and #12002]
Reserved
5. Door field [Low byte in BFM #3003 and #12003]
This value provides the door number to which the sending virtual device is assigned. The structure of the field
depends on the value of the basic function field.
Door Field
BFM #3001
BFM #12001
Low Byte
Value (hex)
BFM #3003
BFM #12003
Low Byte
Bit No.
Door 1
Bit 1
Door 2
Bit 2
Door 3
Bit 3
Door 4
Bit 4 to 7
Bit 4 to 7 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 0
Source door 1
Bit 1
Source door 2
Bit 2
Source door 3
5
Bit 3
Source door 4
Bit 4
Destination door 1
Bit 5
Destination door 2
Bit 6
Destination door 3
Bit 7
Destination door 4
Introduction of
Functions
08 to 0D
4
Wiring
00 to 07
or
0E to FF
Description
Bit 0
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
6. Function data field [High byte in BFM #3003 and #12003]
The function data provides the input state of a virtual input.
BFM #3003
BFM #12003
(High Byte)
Bit No.
Description
Input state
Reserved
Bit 15
lock
Bit 9
Bit 8
Description
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
Input state is OFF.
OFF (0)
ON (1)
Input state is ON.
ON (1)
OFF (0)
Function is defective
ON (1)
ON (1)
Function is not installed
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Bit 10 to 14
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Bit 8 and 9
3
Installation
Basic Function Field
OFF (0): Button or key-button has no locking function
ON (1): Button or key-button has locking function
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
153
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.3 Virtual Input/Output Mapping
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
8.3.2
Virtual output mapping
These BFMs contain the output data for one of the digital output group objects.
Description
BFM #3003
BFM #13003
BFM No.
High Byte
BFM #3002
BFM #13002
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
Low Byte
High Byte
Low Byte
High Byte
Low Byte
Door field
Floor field
Lift field
Sub-function field
Basic function field
BFM #3001 to #3003
Function data field
BFM #13001 to #13003
1. Basic function field [Low byte in BFM #3001 and #13001]
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
Low Byte
Value (hex)
Description
00
Call controller commands
01
Generic output
02
Standard hall call acknowledgement
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
Low Byte
Value (hex)
11
Description
Area monitoring connection acknowledgement
12 to 1F
20
Reserved
Guest call acknowledgement
03
Low priority hall call acknowledgement
21 to 3F
04
High priority hall call acknowledgement
40
Reserved
Position indication
05
Standard car call acknowledgement
41
Hall lantern
06
Low priority car call acknowledgement
42
Direction indication
07
High priority car call acknowledgement
43
Special indication
08
Standard destination call acknowledgement
44
Arrival indication
09
Low priority destination call acknowledgement
45
Operation data
0A
High priority destination call acknowledgement
46
Publicity indication
0B
Standard call to destination floor acknowledgement
47
0C
Low priority call to destination floor acknowledgement
48 to 49
0D
High priority call to destination floor acknowledgement
4A
Speech synthesis
Reserved
Miscellaneous outputs
0E
Special function acknowledgement
4B to 7F
Reserved
0F
Access code upload acknowledgement
80 to FF
Manufacturer-specific
10
Speech connection acknowledgement
2. Sub-function field [High byte in #3001 and #13001]
The Sub-function field is interpreted differently depending on the basic function field value.
Basic Function
Field
Sub-Function Field
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
Low Byte Value
(hex)
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
High Byte Value
(hex)
00
00
Reserved
01
Request all active hall calls
02
Request all special inputs (basic functions 0E and 12)
03 to FF
01
02 to 04
Reserved
00
Reserved
01
Hall call up acknowledgement
02
Hall call down acknowledgement
03
Hall call acknowledgement
04
Hall call extra up acknowledgement
05
Hall call extra down acknowledgement
07 to FF
00
01 to FE
FF
154
Reserved
00 to FF
06
05 to 0D
Description
Hall call extra acknowledgement
Reserved
Reserved
Target stop acknowledgement 1 to 254
All target stop buttons
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.3 Virtual Input/Output Mapping
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Sub-Function Field
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
Low Byte Value
(hex)
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
High Byte Value
(hex)
Reserved
01
Request fan 1 acknowledgement
02
Request fan 2 acknowledgement
03
Request load time 1 acknowledgement
04
Request load time 2 acknowledgement
05
Request key lock 1 acknowledgement
06
Request key lock 2 acknowledgement
07
Request key lock 3 acknowledgement
08
Request key lock 4 acknowledgement
09
Request door open acknowledgement
0A
Request door close acknowledgement
Fire recall (key switch hall panel) acknowledgement
Fire service (key switch hall panel) acknowledgement
0D
Hall call disable acknowledgement
0E
Attendant service acknowledgement
0F
VIP service acknowledgement
Out of order acknowledgement
11
Bed passenger service acknowledgement
12
Special service acknowledgement
13
Service run acknowledgement
14
Dogging service enable acknowledgement
15
Dogging service up acknowledgement
16
Dogging service down acknowledgement
Fire alarm (external fire alarm system) acknowledgement
18
Provide priority acknowledgement
19
Lift attendant start button acknowledgement
1A
Lift attendant drive through button acknowledgement
1B
Security run acknowledgement
Second call panel acknowledgement
1D
Door enable acknowledgement
1E
Call cancel button fire operation
1F
Fire alarm reset acknowledgement
20
Body detector (e.g. person in car)
21
Earthquake detector
Reserved
0F to 1F
00 to FF
Reserved
20
01 to FE
21 to 3F
00 to FF
00
00
01 to FE
FF
7
8
Reserved
Guest call acknowledgement 1 to 254
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
FF
6
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
1C
5
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
17
4
Introduction of
Functions
10
3
Wiring
0B
0C
22 to FF
40
2
00
Installation
0E
Description
Specifications
0E
Introduction
Basic Function
Field
Reserved
Reserved
Clear the floor data
Floor number 1 to 254
9
Reserved
Bit 15 ... 10
41
H0
9
8
Down
Up
CAN Layer 2
Mode
This sub-function shows the arrow display direction up/down.
OFF (0): Do not display the arrow
ON (1): Display the arrow
10
Command
Interface
155
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.3 Virtual Input/Output Mapping
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Basic Function
Field
Sub-Function Field
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
Low Byte Value
(hex)
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
High Byte Value
(hex)
Description
This sub-function shows the arrow display direction up/down, and the transfer direction display of the car.
Bit
42
•
•
15 ... 14
13
12
11 ... 10
9
8
H0
Moving
down
Moving
up
H0
Down
Up
Bit 8 and 9 show the arrow display direction up/down.
OFF (0): Do not display the arrow
ON (1): Display the arrow
Bit 12 and 13 show the transfer direction display of the car.
OFF (0): Not moving
ON (1): Moving
00
43
43
Used for instruction → all displays off
01
No load
02
Full load
03
Over load
04
Fire
05
Fire brigade service
06
Help is coming
07
Special service
08
Load time
09
Occupied
0A
Out of order
0B
Close door
0C
Case of fire
0D
Hall call disable
0E
Travel to evacuation floor
0F
Travel to fire recall floor
10 to FF
Reserved
This sub-function shows the arrival indication of up/down.
Bit 15 ... 10
H0
44
9
8
Down
Up
OFF (0): Not arrived
ON (1): Arrived
45 to 46
00 to FF
Reserved
00
Switch off speech synthesis on all output panels
47
01 to FE
48 to 49
00 to FF
Reserved
00
Reserved
FF
4A
Announce floor number 1 to 254
Announce current floor number
01
Hall call enable
02
Lift operational
03 to FF
Reserved
4B to 7F
00 to FF
Reserved
80 to FF
00 to FF
Manufacturer-specific
3. Lift field [Low byte in BFM #3002 and #13002]
This value provides the lift number or the group of lifts, to which the output is assigned.
BFM #3002
BFM #13002
Low Byte
BFM #3002
BFM #13002
Bit 0 to 7
156
Description
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Lift 8
Lift 7
Lift 6
Lift 5
Lift 4
Lift 3
Lift 2
Lift 1
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.3 Virtual Input/Output Mapping
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
BFM #3002
BFM #13002
High Byte Value (hex)
00
Introduction
4. Floor field [High byte in BFM #3002 and #13002]
Description
Car panel
01 to FE
2
Floor number 1 to 254
All floor panels
5. Door field [Low byte in BFM #3003 and #13003]
This value provides the door number to which the output is assigned. The structure of the field depends on
the value of the basic function field. If the bits of the door field are set to 1, this shall indicate an assignment of
the output to this door.
Door Field
BFM #3001
BFM #13001
Low Byte Value (hex)
BFM #3003
BFM #13003
Low Byte Bit No.
Door 1
Bit 1
Door 2
Bit 2
Door 3
Bit 3
Door 4
Bit 4 to 7
08 to 0D
4
Wiring
00 to 07
or
0E to FF
Description
Bit 0
Bit 4 to 7 fixed to OFF (0).
Bit 0
Source door 1
Bit 1
Source door 2
Bit 2
Source door 3
Source door 4
Bit 4
Destination door 1
Bit 5
Destination door 2
Bit 6
Destination door 3
Bit 7
Destination door 4
5
Introduction of
Functions
Bit 3
6. Function data field [High byte in BFM #3003 and #13003]
6
The function data provides the input state of a virtual input.
Bit 8
Bit 15
Status
OFF (0): No data indicated
(Does not apply for basic function H40)
ON (1): Data indicated
Property
Bit 9 to 11 value (hex)
H0: No action (default)
H1: Output continuously
H2: Output pulsed
H3: Output flashing
H4: Output coloured
H5: Output with volume
H6: Output with scroll rate
H7: Reserved
7
8
Property parameter
Refer to table below
Predicate
OFF (0): Acknowledgement is not affirmed
ON (1): Acknowledgement is affirmed
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Bit 12 to 14
Description
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Bit 9 to 11
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
BFM #3003
BFM #13003
(High Byte) Bit No.
Value definition of the property parameter field (Bit 12 to 14)
9
Description
No action
Continuous
Pulsed
Flashing
Colour
Volume
Scroll rate
< 0.5 s
10 Hz
White
Minimum
Automatic
1
1s
7.5 Hz
Yellow
Vary
1 line/s
2
1.5 s
5 Hz
Reserved
Vary
2 line/s
3
2s
2 Hz
Green
Vary
3 line/s
3s
1. 5Hz
Reserved
Vary
4 line/s
5s
1 Hz
Red
Vary
5 line/s
4
5
No action
Reserved
6
10 s
0.5 Hz
Reserved
Vary
6 line/s
7
> 15 s
0.25 Hz
Blue
Maximum
7 line/s
10
Command
Interface
0
CAN Layer 2
Mode
Bit 12 to 14
value (hex)
3
Installation
Basic Function Field
Specifications
FF
157
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.4 Door Control Word/Door Status Word
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
8.4
Door Control Word/Door Status Word
When BFM #3050 to #3081 and #12050 to 12081 are read, the Door status word is read from BFMs. When
BFM #13050 to #13081 are read, the Door control word is read from BFMs. And when BFM #3050 to #3081
and #13050 to #13081 are written to, the Door control word is written to BFMs.
8.4.1
Door control word
The Door control word contains the door commands and other control data.
Bit
15 ... 12
11 ... 10
9 ... 8
7 ... 6
5 ... 4
3 ... 2
1 ... 0
Command
Door
velocity
Motion
detector
Finger
protector
Door lock
Battery
power
H3
1. Battery power field [Bit 2, 3]
Bit 3
Bit 2
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
Battery power supply disabled
Description
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Battery power supply enabled
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Reserved
ON (1)
ON (1)
Do not care / take no action
2. Door lock field [Bit 4, 5]
Bit 5
Bit 4
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
Description
Enable door lock
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Disable door lock
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Reserved
ON (1)
ON (1)
Do not care / take no action
3. Finger protector field [Bit 6, 7]
Bit 7
Bit 6
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
Enable finger protector
Description
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Disable finger protector
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Reserved
ON (1)
ON (1)
Do not care / take no action
4. Motion detector field [Bit 8, 9]
Bit 9
Bit 8
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
Enable motion detector
Description
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Disable motion detector
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Reserved
ON (1)
ON (1)
Do not care / take no action
5. Door velocity field [Bit 10, 11]
158
Bit 11
Bit 10
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
Move door with standard speed
Description
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Move door with reduced speed
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Reserved
ON (1)
ON (1)
Do not care / take no action
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.4 Door Control Word/Door Status Word
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Bit 12 to 15 Value (hex)
Description
Close door without limit force (Not allowed for EN-81 compliant lifts)
1
Close door with limit force
2
Nudging
(Forced closing of car door with reduced speed without reversal devices due to the blocked door for too long
time)
3
Open door without limit force (Not allowed for EN-81 compliant lifts)
4
Open door with limit force
5
Reserved
Reserved
7
Stop door without torque
8
Stop door with torque
3
Installation
6
Reserved
D
Tech-in drive
E
Reset door
F
Do not care / take no action
2
Specifications
0
9 to C
4
Wiring
8.4.2
Introduction
6. Command field [Bit 12 to 15]
Door status word
This Object contains the car door status and other status information.
Bit
11 ... 10
9 ... 8
7 ... 6
5 ... 4
3 ... 2
1 ... 0
Status
Force
limit
Motion
detector
Finger
protector
Door lock
Battery
power
Safety
contact
5
Introduction of
Functions
15 ... 12
1. Safety contact field [Bit 0, 1]
Bit 0
OFF(0)
Contact not closed
Description
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Contact closed
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Error indicator
ON (1)
ON (1)
Not available or not installed
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Bit 1
OFF(0)
2. Battery power field [Bit 2, 3]
Bit 2
OFF(0)
No battery power used
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Battery power used
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Error indicator
ON (1)
ON (1)
Not available or not installed
7
Description
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Bit 3
OFF(0)
8
3. Door lock field [Bit 4, 5]
Bit 4
OFF(0)
Door not locked
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Door locked
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Error indicator
ON (1)
ON (1)
Not available or not installed
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Bit 5
OFF(0)
Description
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
4. Finger protector field [Bit 6, 7]
Bit 7
Bit 6
Description
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Finger detected
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Error indicator
ON (1)
ON (1)
Not available or not installed
No finger detected
10
Command
Interface
159
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.5 Door Position
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
5. Motion detector field [Bit 8, 9]
Bit 9
Bit 8
Description
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Motion detected
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Error indicator
ON (1)
ON (1)
Not available or not installed
Motion not detected
6. Force limit field [Bit 10, 11]
Bit 11
Bit 10
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
Force limit not reached
Description
OFF(0)
ON (1)
Force limit reached
ON (1)
OFF(0)
Error indicator
ON (1)
ON (1)
Not available or not installed
7. Status field [Bit 12 to 15]
Bit 12 to 15 Value (hex)
Description
Bit 12 to 15 Value (hex)
Description
0
Door closed with torque
7
Door stopped with torque
(not in an end position)
1
Door closed without torque
8
Door stopped without torque
(not in an end position)
2
Door is closing
3
Door opened with torque
D
Tech-in drive
4
Door opened without torque
E
Error indicator
5
Door is opening
F
Not available or not installed
6
Door is re-opening
9 to C
Reserved
Note
If the door is in an open or closed end position, this shall have higher priority than stopped status.
8.5
Door Position
These BFMs store the Door position information of each Lift number. The value is in units of mm.
H0 value shows Closed and HFFFF shows "not available or not requested".
8.6
Light Barrier Status
These BFMs contain the status information of the VD light barrier unit for up to four doors.
Bit No.
Bit 0 to 5
Bit 6 and 7
Bit 8 to 15
8.7
Description
Bit 0 to 5 fixed to ON (1).
Status
Bit 7
Bit 6
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
No subject detected
Description
OFF (0)
ON (1)
Subject detected
ON (1)
OFF (0)
Error indicator
ON (1)
ON (1)
Not available or not installed
Bit 8 to 15 fixed to OFF (0).
Position Value
These BFMs store the Position value (32 bit data) from the car position units of each Lift number. This value
needs to be handled by 32 bit instructions.
The values shall be equivalent to object H6004 in the CiA® 406 specification.
160
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.8 Speed Value Car
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Speed Value Car
Introduction
8.8
1
These BFMs store the Speed value from the car position units of each Lift number.
The measuring step is defined in object H6384 of the car position unit.
8.10
2
Acceleration Value Car
These BFMs store the acceleration value from the car position units of each Lift number.
The measuring step is defined in Object H6384 of the car position unit.
Specifications
8.9
Control Word/Status Word
3
Installation
When BFM #3428 to #3435 and #12428 to 12435 are read, the Status word is read from BFMs. When BFM
#13428 to #13435 are read, the Control word is read from BFMs. And when BFM #3428 to #3435 and #13428
to #13435 are written to, the Control word is written to BFMs.
4
8.10.1 Control word
Wiring
The Car drive Control word is based on object H6040 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications.
Note
5
• Bits 4, 5, 6, and 9 of the control word are operation mode specific.
14
13 ... 11
10
9
8
7
6 ... 4
3
2
1
0
insp
rcl
ms
H0
oms
h
fr
oms
eo
qs
ev
so
Bit
Item
Description
Bit 0
so
Switch on
Bit 1
ev
Enable voltage
qs
Quick stop
Bit 3
eo
Enable operation
oms
fr
Bit 8
h
Bit 9
oms
Bit 10
Bit 11 to 13
-
Operation mode specific
Fault reset
8
Halt
Operation mode specific
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Bit 7
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Bit 2
Bit 4 to 6
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
15
Bit
Bit 10 fixed to OFF (0).
ms
Manufacturer-specific
1Bit 4
rcl
OFF (0): Emergency recall operation mode inactive
ON (1): Emergency recall operation mode active
Bit 15
insp
OFF (0): Car top inspection operation mode inactive
ON (1): Car top inspection mode active
Introduction of
Functions
• The halt function (bit 8) behaviour is operation mode specific.
If the bit is ON (1), the commanded motion shall be interrupted; the Power drive system shall behave as
defined in the halt option code.
After releasing the halt function, the commanded motion shall be continued if possible.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
161
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.10 Control Word/Status Word
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Status transition
Number: Transition No.
Power
disabled
Fault
Start
13
Fault reaction
active
0
14
Not ready to
switch on
Fault
1
15
Switch on
disabled
9
2
10
7
12
Ready to
switch on
8 3
Power
enabled
6
Switched on
4
5
11
Operation
enabled
Command
16
Quick stop
active
Bits of the control word
Transition No.
Bit 7
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Shutdown
0
X
1
1
0
Switch on
0
0
1
1
1
3
Switch on + enable operation
0
1
1
1
1
3 + 4 (Note)
2, 6, 8
Disable voltage
0
X
X
0
X
7, 9, 10, 12
Quick stop
0
X
0
1
X
7, 10, 11
Disable operation
0
0
1
1
1
5
Enable operation
Fault reset
0
1
1
1
1
4, 16
0→1
X
X
X
X
15
Note
• At the following Transition numbers occur a automatic status transition: 0, 1, 13, 14
• Automatic transition to enable operation state after executing SWITCHED ON state functionality.
162
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.10 Control Word/Status Word
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Introduction
8.10.2 Status word
This Car drive Status word is equivalent to object H6041 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specification.
Bit
13 ... 12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ms
oms
ila
tr
rm
ms
w
sod
qs
ve
f
oe
so
rtso
Bit No.
Bit 0
Item
rtso
2
Specifications
15 ... 14
Description / set range
Ready to switch on
so
Switched on
Bit 2
oe
Operation enabled
Bit 3
f
3
Installation
Bit 1
Fault
Bit 4
ve
Voltage enabled
ON when high voltage is applied to the Power drive system.
Bit 5
qs
Quick stop
OFF When the Power drive system is reacting on a quick stop request.
Bit 6
sod
Switch on disabled
Bit 7
w
Bit 8
ms
Manufacturer-specific
Bit 9
rm
Remote
When this bit is ON, the control word is processed. If it is off (local), the control word is not processed.
Bit 10
tr
Target reached
• ON when the Power drive system has reached the set-point. The set-point is operation mode specific. This Bit
is set to on, if the operation mode has been changed.
• ON if the quick stop option code is 5, 6, 7 or 8, when the quick stop operation is finished and the Power drive
system is halted.
• ON when halt occurred and the Power drive system is halted.
Bit 11
ila
Internal limit active
ON when an internal limit is active.
4
Operation mode specific
ms
Manufacturer-specific
Status Word
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
oms
Bit 14 to 15
Power Drive System Finite State Automaton State
Not ready to switch on
xxxx xxxx x1xx 0000 b
Switch on disabled
xxxx xxxx x01x 0001 b
Ready to switch on
xxxx xxxx x01x 0011 b
Switched on
xxxx xxxx x01x 0111 b
Operation enabled
Quick stop active
xxxx xxxx x0xx 1111 b
Fault reaction active
xxxx xxxx x0xx 1000 b
Fault
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
xxxx xxxx x00x 0111 b
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
xxxx xxxx x0xx 0000 b
5
Introduction of
Functions
Bit 12 to 13
Wiring
Warning
ON when being a warning condition. The status of the Power drive system Finite state automaton will not be
changed, as warning is not an error or fault.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
163
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.11 Modes of operation/Modes of operation display
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
8.11
Modes of operation/Modes of operation display
When BFM #3436 to #3443 and #12436 to 12443 are read, the Modes of operation display is read from
BFMs. When BFM #13436 to #13443 are read, the Modes of operation is read from BFMs. And when BFM
#3436 to #3443 and #13436 to #13443 are written to, the Modes of operation is written to BFMs.
8.11.1 Modes of operation
This Car drive mode of operation is equivalent to object H6060 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications.
Bits 8 to 15 are fixed to OFF (0). Even if set to ON (1), these bits will remain OFF (0).
Low byte
Value (Dec)
Description
-128 to -1
Manufacturer-specific operation modes
0
No mode change or no mode assigned
+1
Profile position mode
+2
Velocity mode
+3
Profile velocity mode
+4
Torque profile mode
+5
Reserved
+6
Homing mode
+7
Interpolated position mode
+8
Cyclic sync position mode
+9
Cyclic sync velocity mode
+10
+11 to +127
Cyclic sync torque mode
Reserved
8.11.2 Modes of operation display
This Car drive mode of operation display is equivalent to object H6061 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications.
This object provides the actual operation mode. Bits 8 to 15 are fixed to OFF (0) in these BFMs.
The value description can be shown in the Modes of operation.
Refer to Subsection 8.11.1
8.12
Control Effort
This Car drive control effort shall contain the breaking point or breaking distance depending on the target
position given respectively as absolute value or relative value.
The value (32 bit data) shall be given in user-defined position units. It is necessary to read position value by
32 bit instructions.
8.13
Position Actual Value/Target Position
When BFM #3460 to #3475 and #12460 to 12475 are read, the Position actual value is read from BFMs.
When BFM #13460 to #13475 are read, the Target position is read from BFMs. And when BFM #3460 to
#3475 and #13460 to #13475 are written to, the Target position is written to BFMs.
8.13.1 Position actual value
This Car drive position actual value is equivalent to object H6064 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specification and
shall contain the position of the drive shaft. This information is used to calculate the slippage of the position
unit. The value (32 bit data) shall be given in user-defined position units. This value needs to be handled by
32 bit instructions.
164
8 CANopen® 417 Mode
8.14 Profile Velocity
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
8.14
Profile Velocity
8.15
3
Installation
This Car drive profile Velocity is equivalent to object H6081 in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications. The value
(32 bit data) is in units of mm/s.
This value needs to be handled by 32 bit instructions.
2
Specifications
This Car drive target position is equivalent to object H607A in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications. This Target
position contains the commanded position that the drive should move to in position profile mode using the
current settings of the motion control parameters such as velocity, acceleration, deceleration, motion profile
type etc. The value (32 bit data) shall be interpreted as absolute or relative depending on the 'abs/rel' flag in
the control word. This value needs to be handled by 32 bit instructions. It shall be given in user-defined
position units and shall be converted to position increments.
Introduction
8.13.2 Target position
Velocity Actual Value/Target Velocity
4
Wiring
When BFM #3492 to #3507 and #12492 to 12507 are read, the Velocity actual value is read from BFMs.
When BFM #13492 to #13507 are read, the Target velocity is read from BFMs. And when BFM #3492 to
#3507 and #13492 to #13507 are written to, the Target velocity is written to BFMs.
8.15.1 Target velocity
8.15.2 Velocity actual value
8.16
Load Value
SI unit structure
Bit
15 ... 8
7 ... 0
Prefix
SI unit
8
CiA®
303-2
Load Signalling
Bit
15 ... 4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Overload
Full load
Norm load
Zero load
10
Command
Interface
Load signal structure
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
These BFMs contain Car drive load signal information. It is used to signal measuring values of the load
measuring system. Load signal contains different kinds of load signal. If one of the load bits (for zero load,
norm load, full load, and overload) is set to ON (1), the related condition is true. If the bit is set to 0, the related
condition is not true. Load signal interrupt contains the information about whether the related load bit shall be
processed (1) or not (0).
Bits 8 to 15 are fixed to OFF (0) in these BFMs.
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
The default SI unit is kg. The SI unit and prefix field values shall use the coding as defined in the
specifications.
8.17
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
These BFMs contain the Car drive load value and its related SI unit. The load value is the absolute value of
the load (payload). It is in units of the configured SI unit. The load value of HFFFF shall be an error value that
is applied if the sensor is in error state or does not have an actual value.
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
This Car drive velocity actual value is equivalent to object H606C in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specification. The
value (32 bit data) is in units of mm/s.
This value needs to be handled by 32 bit instructions.
5
Introduction of
Functions
This Car drive target velocity is equivalent to object H60FF in the CiA® 402-2 V3.0 specifications. The value
(32 bit data) is in units of mm/s.
This value needs to be handled by 32 bit instructions.
165
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
9.
9.1 Receive/Transmit Process Data
CAN Layer 2 Mode
This chapter describes the data transfer locations and setting, etc. of the 11 bit/29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode.
In the 11 bit/29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode, the FX3U-CAN can send/receive up to 42 pre-defined messages.
Moreover, Layer 2 messages can be sent via CIF.
Difference between 11 bit/29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Modes
The bit numbers of the CAN-ID used in 11 bit/29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 modes differ between 11 bit and 29 bit.
Note
• To ensure that the FX3U-CAN module can handle the CAN Layer 2 message in a consistent way, it is
necessary to set BFM #20 bit 0 to ON before reading the received message (FROM) and after writing the
transmitted message (TO) to the module.
For BFM #20 bit 0, refer to Section 6.4
• To activate the 11 bit/29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode, write into BFM #21 the value K11 or K29, set BFM #22
to K1 to store the BFM configuration and reset the module.
For module reset, refer to Section 6.8
• BFMs (#0 to #19, #27, #50 to #59, #750 to #859, #900 to #963, and #3000 to #3539), which are active in
the CANopen® 405 mode or CANopen® 417 mode, are not active and not accessible in CAN Layer 2
Mode.
9.1
Receive/Transmit Process Data
The data transfer locations of the 11 bit/29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode are as follows.
Note
The following settings of each message have to be defined in Layer 2 configuration mode, before shifting to
the Layer 2 online mode.
• The CAN-ID LW, CAN-ID HW and transmitting data byte number (in RTR/new/DLC) in the following BFMs
• Layer 2 message configuration in BFM #1100 to #1276
Sets the parameters (transmitting/receiving message, etc.) for each message.
For Layer 2 message configuration in BFM #1100 to #1267, refer to Section 9.3
BFM No.
Name
High Byte
Initial
value
Low Byte
Read/
Write
Stored to
Flash ROM
-
BFM #0 to #19
Reserved
-
-
BFM #100
CAN-ID 1 LW
11/29 bit CAN-Identifier low word
HFFFF
R/W
*1
BFM #101
CAN-ID 1 HW
29 bit CAN-Identifier high word
HFFFF
R/W
*1
BFM #102
RTR / new / DLC
High Byte: Remote Transmission Request
Low Byte: Data length count
H0
R/W
*1
H0
R/W*2
-
H0
R/W
*2
-
3rd data byte
6th data byte
5th data byte
H0
R/W*2
8th data byte
7th data byte
H0
R/W*2
..…
..…
..…
BFM #106
4th data byte
..…
BFM #105
Data bytes
1st data byte
..…
BFM #104
2nd data byte
Layer 2
message 1
..…
BFM #103
166
Description
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
9.1 Receive/Transmit Process Data
1
Description
Name
High Byte
Low Byte
Initial
value
Read/
Write
Stored to
Flash ROM
CAN-ID 42 LW
11/29 bit CAN-Identifier low word
HFFFF
R/W
*1
BFM #388
CAN-ID 42 HW
29 bit CAN-Identifier high word
HFFFF
R/W
*1
BFM #389
RTR / new / DLC
High Byte: Remote Transmission Request
Low Byte: Data length count
H0
R/W
*1
H0
R/W*2
-
H0
R/W
*2
-
BFM #390
2nd data byte
BFM #391
4th data byte
Data bytes
BFM #392
BFM #393
BFM #394 to #399
1st data byte
Layer 2
message 42
3rd data byte
6th data byte
5th data byte
H0
R/W*2
8th data byte
7th data byte
H0
R/W*2
-
-
-
-
Reserved
These BFM will be stored into the Flash ROM when the save command is executed.
For the save command, refer to Section 6.6
*2.
Receive messages are read only, transmit messages can be read and written.
1. When transmitting messages
4
The CAN-ID, RTR/new/DLC and data bytes of each message are as follows.
Store CAN-ID in the 11 bits, bit 0 to 10, in the CAN-ID n*2 LW.
Introduction of
Functions
29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode
*2.
5
Description
11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode
In this function mode, CAN-ID n*2 HW are ignored.
Store CAN-ID in the 29 bits, bit 0 to 28, in the CAN-ID n*2 LW and CAN-ID n*2 HW.
Handle CAN-ID n*2 LW and CAN-ID n*2 HW by 32 bit instructions.
The "n" corresponds to the Layer 2 message number.
6
High byte
Description
Bit 12 ON: Strict DLC check for RTR
Bit 15 OFF: Send data frame
Bit 15 ON:
*3.
7
Send RTR frame*3
Number of data bytes to transmit (K0 to K8)*3
3) Data bytes
Store the data to transmit. The data length of the transmit data is set by DLC.
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Bit 15 defines whether the message is transmitted as a data frame (Bit 15 = OFF) or a Remote
Transmit Request frame (Bit 15 = ON). Bit 12 = ON enables a strict DLC check for received RTR
frames. If Bit 12 is OFF, only the CAN-ID of an inbound RTR frame is checked for a match with a
user message; if the bit is ON, the CAN-ID and the DLC of the RTR frame must match the user
message to cause a response or BFM #1270 to #1272 flag to be set.
Bit 15 and Bit 12 cannot be set ON at the same time.
Bit 15 can be set ON if the parameter B is set to H5FFF.
Bit 12 can be set ON if the parameter B is set to H6FFF or H7FFF.
For parameter B, refer to Section 9.3
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Low byte
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
2) RTR/new/DLC
RTR/new/DLC is set as follows.
High Byte/Low Byte
Wiring
1) CAN-ID
The destination of the message is specified by CAN-ID. CAN-ID is as follows, corresponding to the
function mode to be used.
For function mode, refer to Section 6.5
Function Mode
3
Installation
*1.
2
Specifications
BFM #387
Introduction
BFM No.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
167
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
9.1 Receive/Transmit Process Data
2. When receiving messages
The CAN-ID, RTR/new/DLC and data bytes of each message are as follows.
Note
In case more than one ID can pass the filter set in BFM #1100 to #1267, the received CAN-ID might change
and will always display the CAN-ID, DLC and data of the latest received message.
For Layer 2 message configuration in BFM #1100 to #1267, refer to Section 9.3
1) CAN-ID
The source CAN-ID of the received Layer 2 message is stored. CAN-ID is as follows corresponding to the
function mode to be used.
For the function mode, refer to Section 6.5
Function Mode
Description
11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode
29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode
*1.
CAN-ID is stored in the 11 bits, bit 0 to 10, in the CAN-ID n*1 LW.
In this function mode, CAN-ID n*1 HW does not used.
CAN-ID is stored in the 29 bits, bit 0 to 28, in the CAN-ID n*1 LW and CAN-ID n*1 HW.
Handle CAN-ID n*1 LW and CAN-ID n*1 HW by 32 bit instructions.
The "n" corresponds to the Layer 2 message number.
2) RTR/new/DLC
High Byte/Low Byte
High byte
Low byte
*2.
Description
H00:
Bit 8:
Bit 9:
New data is not received.
ON when new data is received.
ON when new frame is received.
Bit 10:
ON when overflowing.*2
Data length count (DLC) of the received CAN frame.
If bit 8 of the RTR/new/DLC is ON, a new message including new data has been received and
stored. If bit 9 is ON but bit 8 is OFF, the same message (same ID, DLC and data) has been
received. If bit 10 is ON, at least one more message has been stored in this message buffer while
bit 8 was ON which caused an overflow condition.
Receive messages only
Flags
RTR / new / DLC
New data (bit 8)
New frame
no new data
New frame
new data
New frame
no new data
overflow occur
New frame
new data
overflow occur
No data received
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
- (Do not care)
New frame (bit 9)
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Overflow (bit 10)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
- (Do not care)
3) Data bytes
The data received of length specified by DLC is stored.
In case the received DLC is less than 8, unused data bytes are set to H00.
168
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Layer 2 Message Specific Error Code List
Introduction
9.2
9.2 Layer 2 Message Specific Error Code List
This List contains an error message for each Layer 2 message.
BFM No.
Detailed Error Code for Each Layer 2 Message
BFM #402
Message 2 error code
..…
BFM #442
2
..…
Message 1 error code
Specifications
BFM #401
Message 42 error code
Error code in Layer 2 message
H0000
No error
H2000
Receive buffer overflowed
Pre-defined Layer 2 Message Configuration
4
This section describes the Pre-defined Layer 2 message configuration.
The parameters of Layer 2 message number are used to define if the corresponding Layer 2 message
number in BFM #100 to #393 is a transmit or receive message.
Wiring
Note
5
• If an invalid value is written to one of BFM #1100 to #1267, then BFM #29 bit 6 is set, and the BFM address
is displayed in BFM #39.
BFM No.
Name
Description
Initial value
Read/Write
Layer 2 message 1 parameter A
HFFFF
R/W
BFM #1101
Layer 2 message 1 parameter B
HFFFF
R/W
BFM #1102
Layer 2 message 1 parameter C
H0000
R/W
BFM #1103
Layer 2 message 1 parameter D
H0000
R/W
Layer 2 message 1 parameter
R/W
HFFFF
R/W
BFM #1106
Layer 2 message 2 parameter C
H0000
R/W
BFM #1107
Layer 2 message 2 parameter D
H0000
R/W
BFM #1260
Layer 2 message 41 parameter A
HFFFF
R/W
BFM #1261
Layer 2 message 41 parameter B
HFFFF
R/W
BFM #1262
Layer 2 message 41 parameter C
H0000
R/W
BFM #1263
Layer 2 message 41 parameter D
H0000
R/W
BFM #1264
Layer 2 message 42 parameter A
HFFFF
R/W
Layer 2 message 42 parameter B
BFM #1266
Layer 2 message 42 parameter C
BFM #1267
Layer 2 message 42 parameter D
Layer 2 message 42 parameter
HFFFF
R/W
H0000
R/W
H0000
R/W
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
BFM #1265
Layer 2 message 41 parameter
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
..…
Layer 2 message 2 parameter
..…
HFFFF
Layer 2 message 2 parameter B
..…
Layer 2 message 2 parameter A
..…
BFM #1104
BFM #1105
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
BFM #1100
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
• If the Layer 2 message number is not used, parameter A and B should be set to HFFFF.
Introduction of
Functions
• The Pre-defined Layer 2 message configuration can be set in Layer 2 configuration mode (BFM #25 bit 4 is
OFF).
For the communication status (BFM #25), refer to Section 6.8
..…
9.3
3
Error Code Description
Installation
Error Code
10
Command
Interface
169
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
9.3.1
9.3 Pre-defined Layer 2 Message Configuration
Pre-defined Layer 2 transmit messages
This subsection describes parameters A to D for the transmit message.
Parameter
Description
Initial value
Layer 2 message number parameter A
Constant HFFFF
HFFFF
Layer 2 message number parameter B
H7FFF (auto RTR response)
H6FFF (manual RTR response)
H5FFF (disable RTR handling)
HFFFF (message disabled)
HFFFF
Layer 2 message number parameter C
Transmission type
H0000
Layer 2 message number parameter D
Cycle time in [10 ms]
H0000
1. Parameter A and B for each Layer 2 message
A message buffer in BFM #100 to #393 is assigned to a Layer 2 transmit message by writing HFFFF in
parameter A, and writing H7FFF, H6FFF or H5FFF in parameter B.
When Layer 2 message number is not used, set HFFFF to both parameter A and B.
Note
The Layer 2 implementation of the FX3U-CAN can handle up to 28 transmit slots with RTR handling
(parameter B = H7FFF or H6FFF). If the configuration violates this rule, the first 28 transmit message
configurations remain as they are, and RTR handling is disabled for any further transmit messages as
parameter B is forced to H5FFF.
For the RTR message reception list, refer to Section 9.4
• When using the auto RTR response
Set H7FFF to parameter B for the Layer 2 message.
The FX3U-CAN automatically responds to Remote Transmit Requests (RTRs) if the 11/29 bit CAN-ID (i.e.
set in BFM #100) matches the ID in the RTR message.
The RTR message is not stored to the RTR flag list.
• When using the manual RTR response
Set H6FFF to parameter B for the Layer 2 message.
The FX3U-CAN will not automatically respond to Remote Transmit Requests, but the RTR ID will be added
to the RTR flag list.
• When using the disable RTR handling
Set H5FFF to parameter B for the Layer 2 message.
The FX3U-CAN will discard any incoming RTR telegrams matching the CAN-ID of this Layer 2 message.
170
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
9.3 Pre-defined Layer 2 Message Configuration
1
The transmission type defines the transmit/receive message and transmission trigger event of the message
as follows.
Transmission
Type value
Message Type
Transmission Trigger Event
When BFM #20 bit 0 is set to ON, the Layer 2 message is always transmitted.
K1
When BFM #20 bit 0 is set to ON, the Layer 2 message is transmitted.
However, if data has not been changed, it is not transmitted.
K2
The Layer 2 message transmits with following condition.
• With a cycle time set by parameter D
• BFM #20 bit 0 set to ON
K4
3
The Layer 2 message transmits with following condition.
However, if data has not been changed, it is not transmitted.
• With a cycle time set by parameter D
• BFM #20 bit 0 set to ON
4
Wiring
The Layer 2 message transmits with following condition.
• Request via RTR frames
Request via RTR frames works for maximum 28 transmit messages.
• Message transmit trigger flags
The Layer 2 message transmits when the corresponding message transmit trigger flag in BFM
#1280 to #1282 is set to ON.
For the message transmit trigger flag, refer to Section 9.5
Installation
K3
Transmit
message
2
Specifications
K0
Introduction
2. Parameter C "transmission type" for each Layer 2 message
3. Parameter D "cycle time" for each Layer 2 message
This parameter is used when the transmission type (event) is set to K2 or K3.
The cycle time is in units of ms
5
• The cycle time should be set in consideration of the PLC scan cycle and communications response time,
etc.
• If cycle time is set to K0, cycle time operates as 1 ms.
Introduction of
Functions
Note
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
171
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
9.3.2
9.3 Pre-defined Layer 2 Message Configuration
Pre-defined Layer 2 receive messages
This subsection describes parameters A to D for the receive message.
Parameter
Description
Initial Value
Layer 2 message number parameter A Reception CAN-ID low word
HFFFF
Layer 2 message number parameter B Reception CAN-ID high word
HFFFF
Layer 2 message number parameter C Reception ID filter bit mask low word
H0000
Layer 2 message number parameter D Reception ID filter bit mask high word
H0000
1. Parameter A and B for each Layer 2 message
Set the source CAN ID of the received message to parameter A and B. CAN-ID is as follows, corresponding
to the function mode to be used.
When Layer 2 message number is not used, set HFFFF to both parameter A and B.
For function mode, refer to Section 6.5
Function Mode
Description
11 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode
Store CAN-ID in the 11 bits, bit 0 to 10, in the parameters A and B by 32 bit instructions.
29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode
Store CAN-ID in the 29 bits, bit 0 to 28, in the parameters A and B by 32 bit instructions.
2. Parameter C and D for each Layer 2 message
Set the filter for the ID set in parameter A and B. If the filter is set to H00000000, incoming messages are
checked for an exact match with the ID set in parameter A and B. Any bit set in the filter will be omitted when
comparing received IDs with the ID set in parameter A and B.
Example 1:
Layer 2 message 1 parameter A/B = H00000181
Layer 2 message 1 parameter C/D = H00000000
BFM #100 to #106 store received messages with the CAN-ID H181 only. Relation between received CAN
message, BFM #20 bit 0 and "RTR/new/DLC" high byte is shown below.
Message
H0181
CAN bus
Message
H0181
Message
H0181
Message
H0181
BFM #20
bit 0
RTR/new/DLC
high byte
Hxx
H00
H00 (no new data
between
and )
H03 (new frame + data
between
and )
H07 (new frame + data
and overflow between
and )
The flags "RTR/new/DLC" are cleared by PLC program after . They remain H00 after , because there
was no message stored between
and . The first received CAN message that matches parameter A/B
and C/D is stored into the internal buffers, and as this is the only message between
and , the high byte
value is set to H03. The high byte value H07 after
shows that the buffer was overwritten at least once (in
this example two times) since . The data bytes in the BFM are the data received with the last message.
Note
In this example, it is expected that the PLC program resets the “RTR/new/DLC” flags after reading the data at
, ,
and .
172
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
9.3 Pre-defined Layer 2 Message Configuration
1
Introduction
Example 2:
Layer 2 message 2 parameter A/B = H00000180
Layer 2 message 2 parameter C/D = H00000006
BFM #107 to #113 stores received messages with CAN-IDs H180, H182, H184 and H186 because ID bits 1
and 2 are not evaluated. Relation between received CAN message, BFM #20 bit 0 and "RTR/new/DLC" high
byte is shown below.
Please remember that in this case all four messages are stored in the same location! If more than one of the
messages with ID H180, H182, H184 or H186 is received between two write operations BFM #20 = K1, only
the last received CAN-ID, DLC, and data is available in BFM #107 to #113.
Message
H0182
Message
H0186
Message
H0180
BFM #20
bit 0
4
Hxx
H00
H00 (no new data
between
and )
H03 (new frame + data
between
and )
H07 (new frame + data
and overflow between
and )
5
Introduction of
Functions
Behaviour until
is similar to that described in example 1.
Same as in the first example, the high byte value H07 after
shows that the buffer was overwritten at least
once, since
and the data bytes in the BFM are also the data received with the last message.
But this time, it is required to check the 11 bit CAN-ID in the corresponding Layer 2 message (BFM #100 to
#399) to determine which message ID was received. In this case the last message is H0180, and the data of
this message is stored to the data BFM. The data of messages H0182 and H0186 are lost.
Wiring
RTR/new/DLC
high byte
3
Installation
Message
H0184
CAN bus
Specifications
Note
2
6
Note
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
In this example, it is expected that the PLC program resets the “RTR/new/DLC” flags after reading the data at
, ,
and .
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
173
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
9.4
9.4 Layer 2 RTR Flags
Layer 2 RTR Flags
If the FX3U-CAN is set to Layer 2 communication mode, an incoming RTR message is indicated in the BFM if
the following conditions are satisfied:
• Matching the "CAN-ID n*1" of one of the Layer 2 messages
• The Layer 2 message "n*1" is configured as a transmit Layer 2 message
• The Layer 2 message "n*1" is set to "no auto RTR response" (H6FFF)
*1.
Where "n" is one of the Layer 2 messages 1 to 42.
The bits in the "RTR message reception list" are updated independently from BFM #20 bit 0.
A bit is set if a valid RTR message has been received. The bit can be evaluated by PLC program and
required changes to the response message data can be made (BFM #20 bit 0 must be set in order to refresh
the internal data buffer and trigger the transmission). The flag is automatically reset when a message is
transmitted from the Layer 2 message.
RTR message reception list
Bit No.
..…
RTR message for Layer 2 message 17 received
R
..…
Bit 0
R
Bit 15
RTR message for Layer 2 message 32 received
R
Bit 0
RTR message for Layer 2 message 33 received
R
Bit 9
R
RTR message for Layer 2 message 42 received
R
Unused
R
Bit 10
Bit 15
174
R
R
..…
BFM #1272
R
RTR message for Layer 2 message 16 received
..…
BFM #1271
Read/Write
Bit 15
..…
BFM #1270
Description
RTR message for Layer 2 message 1 received
..…
Bit 0
..…
BFM No.
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Message Transmit Trigger Flags
The transmission of a message in Layer 2 mode can be triggered via the following flags.
Transmit requests on receive Layer 2 messages are discarded. When a bit is set to ON, the corresponding
transmit message will be sent as soon as a transmit buffer is available. The flags are reset automatically as
soon as the message is written into the transmit buffer.
Bit No.
Transmit request Layer 2 message
R/W
..…
BFM #1280
Remarks
Layer 2 message 1
..…
Bit 0
R/W
R/W
Layer 2 message 17
R/W
R/W
Layer 2 message 33
R/W
Bit 9
..…
Layer 2 message 32
Bit 0
..…
Bit 15
BFM #1282
3
R/W
Installation
BFM #1281
..…
Layer 2 message 16
Bit 0
..…
Bit 15
2
Specifications
BFM No.
Introduction
9.5
9.5 Message Transmit Trigger Flags
R/W
Layer 2 message 42
4
R/W
Bit 10 to 15 Reserved
R/W
Wiring
PLC RUN>STOP And Power Down Messages
FX3U-CAN can transmit the message according to its state, if the PLC is in one of the following two states.
Up to four transmit messages can each be registered.
• If the power supplied to the FX3U-CAN fails
In this case, the message registered into power down messages 1 to 4 are transmitted.
6
Note
• The time differs depending on the number of I/Os and on the number and types of extension blocks.
8
• The FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC does not support the power down message.
Description
High Byte
Low Byte
Layer 2 Message
Initial Value
CAN-ID 1 LW
11/29 bit CAN-Identifier low word
HFFFF
CAN-ID 1 HW
29 bit CAN-Identifier high word
HFFFF
BFM #1902
DLC
Data length count
H0
1st data byte
BFM #1904
4th data byte
3rd data byte
6th data byte
5th data byte
H0
8th data byte
7th data byte
H0
Data bytes
..…
BFM #1906
H0
H0
10
..…
BFM #1905
..…
2nd data byte
..…
BFM #1903
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
BFM #1900
BFM #1901
RUN>STOP
message 1
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Function
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
Depending on PLC Type and baud rate and bus load, FX3U-CAN may be unable to send the message. In
such a case, additional H/W and/or S/W should be considered for safe system behavior.
If possible use only one "RUN>STOP message" and one "Power down message" which will increase the
possibility that the information is transmitted in the event "RUN>STOP"/"Power down" occurs.
If more than one message is defined, messages are transmitted in order of priority "message 1" to "message
4".
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Warning
BFM No.
5
Introduction of
Functions
• If PLC state had changed to STOP from RUN, or FROM/TO Watchdog in FX3U-CAN has been timed-out
In this case, the message registered into RUN>STOP messages 1 to 4 are transmitted.
..…
9.6
Command
Interface
175
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
BFM No.
Function
9.6 PLC RUN>STOP And Power Down Messages
Description
High Byte
Low Byte
Initial Value
BFM #1921
CAN-ID 4 LW
11/29 bit CAN-Identifier low word
HFFFF
BFM #1922
CAN-ID 4 HW
29 bit CAN-Identifier high word
HFFFF
BFM #1923
DLC
Data length count
BFM #1924
2nd data byte
1st data byte
BFM #1925
4th data byte
3rd data byte
6th data byte
5th data byte
8th data byte
7th data byte
Data bytes
BFM #1926
BFM #1927
RUN>STOP
message 4
H0
H0
H0
H0
H0
BFM #1928
CAN-ID 1 LW
11/29 bit CAN-Identifier low word
HFFFF
BFM #1929
CAN-ID 1 HW
29 bit CAN-Identifier high word
HFFFF
BFM #1930
DLC
Data bytes
BFM #1933
Power down
message 1
H0
H0
3rd data byte
5th data byte
H0
H0
8th data byte
7th data byte
H0
..…
4th data byte
6th data byte
..…
..…
BFM #1934
1st data byte
BFM #1949
CAN-ID 4 LW
11/29 bit CAN-Identifier low word
HFFFF
BFM #1950
CAN-ID 4 HW
29 bit CAN-Identifier high word
HFFFF
BFM #1951
DLC
BFM #1952
BFM #1953
BFM #1954
Data bytes
BFM #1955
Data length count
2nd data byte
1st data byte
DLC
Data bytes
*1.
H0
H0
4th data byte
3rd data byte
6th data byte
5th data byte
H0
8th data byte
7th data byte
H0
BFM Function
11/29 bit CAN-ID n
Power down
message 4
..…
BFM #1932
Data length count
2nd data byte
..…
BFM #1931
176
Layer 2 Message
Description
CAN-ID is used to transmit this message into the network.
Sets HFFFF to the CAN-ID n LW and CAN-ID n HW when not using the message.
High byte H00 = send data frame*1
Low byte = number of data bytes to transmit (K0 to K8)
Data bytes 1 to 8. Number of attached data bytes is defined by DLC.
RTR is prohibited for these messages.
H0
9 CAN Layer 2 Mode
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
CIF Sending Layer 2 Message
Using this function, the FX3U-CAN can send any Layer 2 messages to the CAN bus. This function is
accessible only in Layer 2 Mode.
2
Execution procedure: Set Node guarding/NMT Slave Assignment
Specifications
1) Write the CAN-ID, RTR, DLC and the data byte to BFM #1001 to #1008.
2) Write the command code H000C to BFM #1000.
When the command code H000C is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
3) When the executed command is successful, H000D is written to BFM #1000.
If H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
BFM #1001
BFM #1002
BFM #1003
Data written to transmit buffer
Setting Error
CIF Busy
Error
Diagnosis Data
H0000:
HF00C:
Command:
H000C
11/29 bit CAN-Identifier low word
No Error
Setting Error
Displays the error cause.
All other values: The corresponding parameter
caused an error.
29 bit CAN-Identifier high word
DLC (Data Length
Count)*2
2nd data byte
1st data byte
BFM #1006
4th data byte
3rd data byte
6th data byte
5th data byte
Unused
BFM #1008
8th data byte
6
7th data byte
Unused
*1.
Set this BFM to K0 for normal transmission. If this BFM is set to K1, a remote transmit request frame
is sent. This request makes the producer of the associated CAN-ID specified in BFM #1001 and
#1002 send the actual data.
*2.
The data length in bytes (0 to 8).
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
BFM #1009 to #1066
5
RTR (Remote Transmission Request)*1
BFM #1005
BFM #1007
4
Low Byte
Introduction of
Functions
BFM #1004
H000D:
HF00C:
HFFFF:
H000F:
TO (Write Access)
High Byte
Wiring
BFM #1000
FROM (Read Access)
3
Installation
Description
BFM No.
Introduction
9.7
9.7 CIF Sending Layer 2 Message
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
177
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.1 [BFM #1000 to #1066] Command Interface
10. Command Interface
This chapter describes the Command Interface supported by FX3U-CAN. Command Interface that can be
used with each Function Mode is shown in the following table.
Function Mode Selection
Command Interface
Mode 405
Mode 417
Mode 29
SDO Request
-
-
Section 10.2
Set Heartbeat
-
-
Section 10.3
Set Node Guarding / NMT slave assignment
-
-
Section 10.4
Send an Emergency Message
-
-
Section 10.5
Store Object Dictionary settings
-
-
Section 10.6
-
-
Section 10.7
-
-
Restore Object Dictionary default settings
Communication Mapping Modes
-
Display current Parameter
Section 7.2
Section 10.8
Sending Layer 2 Message
10.1
Reference
Mode 11
-
-
Section 9.7
[BFM #1000 to #1066] Command Interface
The Command Interface (CIF) can be used to access the Object Dictionary of the local node or a network
node. Access is performed by commands for SDO read/write, special direct command for Node Guarding,
Heartbeat, PDO Mapping or Emergency Messages.
BFM No.
Description
FROM (Read Access)
TO (Write Access)
BFM #1000
Command execution result code
Command code (trigger for command execution)
BFM #1001 to #1066
Command parameter read back or detailed error
Command parameter
information
Note
• The TO buffer will not be cleared after command execution. The former written TO data will be display by
making new TO accesses or using the Display current Parameter command.
Refer to Section 10.8
• Check always before a TO access to the CIF if the BFM #1000 does not display HFFFF (CIF Busy)!
If a TO access occurs during CIF busy, it will generate a “Command or Parameter change while CIF was
busy” error.
Refer to Subsection 10.9.1
178
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
SDO Request
Note that the NMT Master startup process uses SDO's which can be result in an Error of the CIF command if
the NMT Startup Master accesses the remote Node at the same time.
2
10.2.1 CIF SDO read access
Specifications
Description of CIF SDO read access is shown below.
The local FX3U-CAN can be specified by its actual node number or by using "0".
Execution procedure: CIF SDO read access
2) Write the command code H0004 for SDO read access to BFM #1000.
When the command code H0004 is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
3) When the executed command is successful, H0005 is written to BFM #1000.
If H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
Description
BFM No.
FROM (Read Access)
5
BFM #1000
BFM #1001
Node number (read back)
Node number
BFM #1002
Index (read back)
Index
BFM #1003
Sub-index (read back)
Sub-index
BFM #1004
Data length
Unused
BFM #1005 to #1066 Result data
Unused
Introduction of
Functions
SDO read success
Error
CIF Busy
TO (Write Access)
H0005:
H000F:
HFFFF:
Command H0004: SDO read
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Result Data Structure in BFM #1005 to #1066
Description
BFM #1006
4th data byte
3rd data byte
BFM #1007
6th data byte
5th data byte
BFM #1008
8th data byte
7th data byte
BFM #1065
122nd data byte
121st data byte
BFM #1066
124th data byte
123rd data byte
7
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
.....
1st data byte
.....
Low Byte
2nd data byte
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
High Byte
BFM #1005
.....
4
Wiring
4) When H0005 is read from BFM #1000, the specified byte length (BFM #1004) of the result data from BFM
#1005 is read. A maximum of 124 bytes of result data is stored in BFM #1005 to #1066.
3
Installation
1) Write the Node number and the Index / Sub-index of the target Object Dictionary to BFM #1001 to #1003.
BFM No.
Introduction
10.2
10.2 SDO Request
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
179
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.2 SDO Request
10.2.2 CIF Multi SDO read access
With the multi SDO read access command, up to 8 SDO read accesses can be made within one command.
The maximum data length for each access is 8 bytes.
At first write the node number (0, 1-127), the Object Dictionary Index and the Sub index to the BFMs. Finally
the command code for multi SDO read access "8" must be written to BFM #1000 in order to trigger the
command execution.
If the access has been successful, BFM #1000 will display "9" and BFM #1001 to #1064 will contain the node
number, index and sub index for verification purposes.
Description
BFM No.
BFM #1000
FROM (Read Access)
TO (Write Access)
H0009:
H000F:
H00F9:
SDO read success
Error (refer to Section 10.9)
Command H0008: SDO Multi read
Error
(show Node number and Result data for details)
HFFFF: CIF Busy
BFM #1001
Success: Node number (read back)
Error:
High Byte H0F, Low Byte Node number
(read back)
BFM #1002
Index (read back)
Index
BFM #1003
Sub-index (read back)
Low byte:
High byte:
BFM #1004
Success: Data length
Error:
H0
BFM #1005
BFM #1006
BFM #1007
Success: Result data
Error:
SDO access error code
Node number
Sub index
reserved
Unused
.....
.....
.....
BFM #1008
BFM #1057
Success: Node number (read back)
Error:
High Byte H0F, Low Byte Node number
(read back)
Node number*1
BFM #1058
Index (read back)
Index
BFM #1059
Sub-index (read back)
Low byte:
High byte:
BFM #1060
Success: Data length
Error:
H0
BFM #1061
BFM #1062
BFM #1063
Success: Result data
Error:
SDO access error code
Sub index
reserved
Unused
BFM #1064
BFM #1065 to #1066 Unused
*1.
180
Unused
If the final setting is located before BFM #1057, write HFFFF in the last BFM (Node number).
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.2 SDO Request
1
Introduction
10.2.3 CIF SDO write access
Description of CIF SDO write access is shown below.
The local FX3U-CAN can be specified by its actual node number or by using "0".
2
Execution procedure: CIF SDO write access
2) Write the data length (in bytes) to be written, to BFM #1004, and the data to be written, to BFM #1005 to
# 1066.
Specifications
3) Write the command code H0002 for SDO write access to BFM #1000.
When the command code H0002 is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
3
1) Write the Node number and the Index / Sub-index of the target Object Dictionary to BFM #1001 to #1003.
Installation
4) When the executed command is successful, H0003 is written to BFM #1000.
If H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
Description
BFM No.
FROM (Read Access)
BFM #1000
TO (Write Access)
SDO write success
CIF Busy
Error
4
Wiring
H0003:
HFFFF:
H000F:
Command H0002: SDO write
Refer to Section 10.9
Node number (read back)
BFM #1002
Index (read back)
Node number
Index
BFM #1003
Sub-index (read back)
Sub-index
BFM #1004
Unused
Data length (in byte)
BFM #1005 to #1066 Unused
5
Introduction of
Functions
BFM #1001
Command parameter data
Command Parameter Data Structure in BFM #1005 to #1066
Description
BFM No.
1st data byte
BFM #1006
4th data byte
3rd data byte
BFM #1007
6th data byte
5th data byte
BFM #1008
8th data byte
7th data byte
.....
.....
6
.....
Low Byte
2nd data byte
BFM #1005
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
High Byte
122nd data byte
121st data byte
BFM #1066
124th data byte
123rd data byte
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
BFM #1065
Example Setting: When changing the NMT state of the whole network to state OPERATIONAL
Write to BFM #1000 to #1005 as follows according to the above-mentioned procedure.
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
Note
This procedure can only be performed when the FX3U-CAN is set up as the master.
Description
BFM No.
BFM #1001
FROM (Read Access)
SDO write success:
Node number (The FX3U-CAN self):
Command SDO write: H0002
H0
Node number (The FX3U-CAN self): H0
(read back)
BFM #1002
Index (Request NMT):
H1F82 (read back)
Index (Request NMT):
H1F82
BFM #1003
Sub-index (all nodes):
H80 (read back)
Sub-index (all nodes):
H80
Data length (1 byte):
K1
BFM #1004
BFM #1006 to #1066
Unused
Command parameter data (NMT service remote node): H05
Unused
181
10
Command
Interface
BFM #1005
9
TO (Write Access)
H0003
CAN Layer 2
Mode
BFM #1000
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.2 SDO Request
10.2.4 CIF Multi SDO write access
With the multi SDO write access command, up to 8 SDO write accesses can be made within one command.
The maximum data length for each access is 8 bytes.
At first write the node number (0, 1-127), the Object Dictionary Index, the Sub-index, the data length (in byte)
and the data to be sent to the BFMs.
Finally the command code for multi SDO write access "6" must be written to BFM #1000 in order to trigger the
command execution.
If the access has been successful, BFM #1000 will display "7" and the following BFMs will contain the node
number, index and sub index for verification purposes number.
Description
BFM No.
BFM #1000
FROM (Read Access)
TO (Write Access)
H0007:
H000F:
H00F7:
SDO write success
Error (refer to Section 10.9)
Command H0006: SDO Multi write
Error
(show Node number and Result data for details)
HFFFF: CIF Busy
BFM #1001
Success: Node number (read back)
Error:
High Byte H0F, Low Byte Node number
(read back)
BFM #1002
Index (read back)
Index
BFM #1003
Sub-index (read back)
Low byte:
High byte:
BFM #1004
Unused
Data length (in byte)
Success: Unused
Error:
SDO access error code
Command parameter data (1 to 8 byte)
Node number
Sub index
reserved
BFM #1005
BFM #1006
BFM #1007
.....
.....
.....
BFM #1008
BFM #1057
Success: Node number (read back)
Error:
High Byte H0F, Low Byte Node number
(read back)
Node number*1
BFM #1058
Index (read back)
Index
BFM #1059
Sub-index (read back)
Low byte:
High byte:
BFM #1060
Unused
Data length (in byte)
Success: Unused
Error:
SDO access error code
Command parameter data (1 to 8 byte)
Sub index
reserved
BFM #1061
BFM #1062
BFM #1063
BFM #1064
BFM #1065 to #1066 Unused
*1.
182
Unused
If the final setting is located before BFM #1057, write HFFFF in the last BFM (Node number).
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Set Heartbeat
1. Heartbeat producing setting
3
1) Write target Node number and Producer heartbeat time value (in units of ms) to BFM #1001 to #1066.
Write HFFFF to the node number following the last target node to complete Heartbeat producing settings.
2) Write the command code H7410 to BFM #1000.
When the command code H7410 is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
Description
FROM (Read Access)
Producing has been assigned
Parameter Error
CIF Busy
Error
BFM #1001
..…
BFM #1065
BFM #1066
Node number of producer
Producer heartbeat time value (in units of ms)
2nd target Node number of producer
node
Producer heartbeat time value (in units of ms)
3rd target
node
Node number of producer
Producer heartbeat time value (in units of ms)
33rd target Node number of producer
node
Producer heartbeat time value (in units of ms)
Execution procedure: Heartbeat consuming setting
1) Write the Node number that has to be set up to BFM #1001.
The local FX3U-CAN can be specified by its actual node number or by using "0".
3) Write the command code H7400 to BFM #1000.
When the command code H7400 is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
2) Write target Node-ID to be Consumed and Consumer heartbeat time (in units of ms) to BFM #1002 to
#1065.
Write HFFFF to the Node-ID following the last consuming node to complete Heartbeat consuming
settings.
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
With this command, the Heartbeat consuming Index H1016 Sub index K1 to K32 will be set up at the node
specified in BFM #1001.
To setup a Sub index higher than K32, use the SDO write command.
For Heartbeat, refer to Subsection 5.6.9
For SDO Request, refer to Section 10.2
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
2. Heartbeat consuming setting
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Diagnosis Data
H0000:
No Error
All other values: The corresponding parameter
caused an SDO error.
5
H7410
..…
BFM #1003
BFM #1006
Command:
1st target
node
BFM #1002
BFM #1005
TO (Write Access)
Introduction of
Functions
H7411:
H741F:
HFFFF:
H000F:
..…
BFM No.
BFM #1004
4
Wiring
3) When the executed command is successful, H7411 is written to BFM #1000.
If H741F, H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
Installation
Execution procedure: Heartbeat producing setting
BFM #1000
2
Specifications
Nodes can be easily set to Heartbeat Producer or Heartbeat Consumer status by writing values to Index
H1016 and H1017 using the Command Interface (CIF). The parameters for Heartbeat are included in the
information that can be written to the CAN bus.
The local FX3U-CAN can be specified by its actual node number or by using "0".
Note that the NMT Master startup process uses SDO's which can be result in an Error of the CIF command if
the NMT Startup Master accesses the remote Node at the same time.
For Object H1016 and H1017 (Heartbeat), refer to Subsection 5.6.9
Introduction
10.3
10.3 Set Heartbeat
10
4) When the executed command is successful, H7401 is written to BFM #1000.
Command
Interface
183
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.4 Set Node Guarding / NMT Slave Assignment
If H740F, H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
Description
BFM No.
H7401:
H740F:
HFFFF:
H000F:
Consuming has been assigned
Parameter Error
CIF Busy
Error
BFM #1001
BFM #1003
BFM #1004
BFM #1006
2nd
consumed
node
Node-ID to be consumed
..…
3rd
consumed
node
32nd
consumed
node
BFM #1066
10.4
Diagnosis Data
H0000:
No Error
All other values: The corresponding parameter
caused an SDO error.
Node-ID to be consumed
BFM #1064
BFM #1065
H7400
1st
consumed
node
..…
BFM #1007
Command:
Node number which has to be set up
BFM #1002
BFM #1005
TO (Write Access)
Consumer heartbeat time (in units of ms)
Consumer heartbeat time (in units of ms)
Node-ID to be consumed
Consumer heartbeat time (in units of ms)
..…
BFM #1000
FROM (Read Access)
Node-ID to be consumed
Consumer heartbeat time (in units of ms)
Reserved
Set Node Guarding / NMT Slave Assignment
Nodes can be easily set to Guarding-Master or Guarding-Slave status by writing values to Index H1F81 using
the Command Interface (CIF). The parameters for guarding are included in the information that can be written
to the CAN bus.
The module needs to be NMT Master to use these functions.
For Object H1F81, refer to Subsection 5.8.5
Note
• If the node number to be guarded exceeds the range K1 to K127, the corresponding BFM will display the
value which caused the problem.
• The FX3U-CAN module may write a value of HFFFF to the "Slave configuration" parameter of a node that
has a parameter configuration error.
• The FX3U-CAN module may write a value of HFFFF to the "Guard Time" parameter of a node that has a
parameter configuration error.
• If the "Retry Factor" parameter exceeds 255, an error value will be displayed in the corresponding BFM.
• The FX3U-CAN module may write a value of HFFFF to the "Retry Factor" parameter of a node that has a
parameter configuration error.
• If the node number, slave configuration, retry factor and guarding time is just copied to the corresponding
result BFM, the remote node does not support Index H100C (guarding time)/H100D (retry factor). In this
case, the remote node cannot detect a missing guarding request of the network master.
Execution procedure: Set Node guarding/NMT Slave Assignment
1) Write the Slave number, Slave Configuration, Guard Time and Retry of the target node to BFM #1001 to
#1064. Set the Node-ID of the configured NMT Slave to Slave number. For the setting value of the Slave
Configuration, Guard Time and Retry Factor, refer to the following section.
Write HFFFF to the Slave number following the last target node to complete "Node guarding/NMT slave
assignment" settings.
Refer to Subsection 5.8.7
2) Write the command code H8400 to BFM #1000.
When the command code H8400 is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
3) When the executed command is successful, H8401 is written to BFM #1000.
If H84FF, H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
184
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.5 Send an Emergency Message
1
BFM #1000
FROM (Read Access)
H8401:
H84FF:
HFFFF:
H000F:
TO (Write Access)
Slaves have been assigned
Parameter Error
CIF Busy
Error
Command:
1st target Slave Configuration
node
Guard Time
BFM #1003
BFM #1004
Retry Factor
BFM #1005
Slave Number to be Guarded
3
Guard Time
..…
Retry Factor
..…
..…
Diagnosis Data
H0000:
No Error
All other values: The corresponding parameter
caused an error.
Slave Configuration
Installation
2nd
target
node
BFM #1006
BFM #1061
Slave Number to be Guarded
BFM #1063
BFM #1064
4
Slave Configuration
Guard Time
Wiring
16th
target
node
BFM #1062
10.5
2
Slave Number to be Guarded
BFM #1002
BFM #1008
H8400
Specifications
BFM #1001
BFM #1007
Introduction
Description
BFM No.
Retry Factor
BFM #1065
Unused
BFM #1066
Unused
5
Send an Emergency Message
Introduction of
Functions
This command can be used to send an emergency message from the PLC to the CANopen® network.
Execution procedure: Send an emergency message
2) Write the command code H000A to BFM #1000.
When the command code H000A is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
Description
BFM No.
BFM #1001
H000B:
HFFFF:
H000C:
H000F:
Command finished
CIF Busy
Communication Error
Error
H0000:
H0001:
No Error
EMCY Inhibit
elapsed
H0002:
Device is not in CANopen®
state Operational or Preoperational
H000A
not
9
Emergency error code*1
error code*2
Error register
2nd byte of Manufacturer-specific 1st byte of Manufacturer-specific
Unused
error code*2
error code*2
4th byte of Manufacturer-specific 3rd byte of Manufacturer-specific
error code*2
error code*2
Unused
185
10
Command
Interface
BFM #1005 to #1066
8
Low Byte
CAN Layer 2
Mode
BFM #1004
time
Command:
0th byte of Manufacturer-specific
BFM #1002
BFM #1003
High Byte
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
BFM #1000
TO (Write Access)
FROM (Read Access)
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
3) When the executed command is successful, H000B is written to BFM #1000.
If H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
1) Write the Emergency error code*1, Error register and Manufacturer-specific error code*2 that will be sent
as the Emergency Message to BFM #1001 to #1004.
Unused Manufacturer-specific error code bytes have to be H00.
For Error register, refer to following Subsection 5.6.2
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
*1.
Emergency error codes
In different CiA® Device/Application Profiles, more EMCY Error Codes are defined.
Error
Code
(hex)
7000
Description
Error reset or no error
0010
CiA®
8000
Monitoring – generic error
1000
Generic error
8100
Communication – generic
2000
Current – generic error
8110
CAN overrun (objects lost)
8120
CAN in error passive mode
device – generic
8130
Life guard error or heartbeat error
device output side –
8140
Recovered from bus off
2200
417: CAN warning level
Current,
CANopen®
Current inside the
device input side – generic
CANopen®
CANopen®
Additional modules – generic error
2300
Current,
generic
3000
Voltage – generic error
8150
CAN-ID collision
3100
Mains voltage – generic
8200
Protocol error – generic
3111
CiA®
417: Mains Over voltage
8210
PDO not processed due to length error
3121
CiA®
417: Mains Under voltage
8220
PDO length exceeded
3200
Voltage inside the CANopen® device – generic
8230
DAM MPDO not processed, destination object not available
417: Over voltage (device internal)
8240
Unexpected SYNC data length
417: Under voltage (device internal)
8250
RPDO timeout
3211
CiA®
3221
CiA®
3300
Output voltage – generic
8F01
to
8F7F
Life guard error or heartbeat error caused by Node-ID 1 to
Node-ID 127.
4000
Temperature – generic error
9000
External error – generic error
4100
Ambient temperature – generic
F000
Additional functions – generic error
4200
Device temperature – generic
FF00
Device specific – generic error*2
5000
CANopen® device hardware – generic error
FF01
CiA® 417: Light barrier defect*2
6000
CANopen® device software – generic error
FF02
CiA® 417: Finger protector defect*2
6100
Internal software – generic
FF03
CiA® 417: Motion detection defect*2
6200
User software – generic
FF04
CiA® 417: Application error, Manufacturer-specific error
code: Byte 0 and 1 contain a Text error code, Byte 2 to 4 are
6300
186
Error
Code
(hex)
Description
0000
2100
*2.
10.5 Send an Emergency Message
Data set – generic
reserved*2
For EMCY Manufacturer specific error code, refer to the following section.
Refer to Section 6.23
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Store Object Dictionary Settings
Execution procedure: Store object dictionary settings
2) Write the command code H6000 to BFM #1000.
When the command code H6000 is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
3) When the Object Dictionary settings have been saved, H6001 is written to BFM #1000.
If H600F, H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
BFM #1066
Object Dictionary settings have been saved
Parameter Error
CIF Busy
Error
Diagnosis Data
H0000:
No Error
HFFFF:
Parameter caused an error
TO (Write Access)
Command:
H6000
5
1st target node-ID
Introduction of
Functions
..…
BFM #1001
H6001:
H600F:
HFFFF:
H000F:
..…
BFM #1000
FROM (Read Access)
4
Wiring
Description
BFM No.
3
Installation
1) Write the target node-ID for which Object Dictionary settings are to be stored, to BFM #1001 to #1066.
When HFFFF is set as node-ID in BFM #1002 to #1066, the "Store Object Dictionary settings" is finished.
The local FX3U-CAN can be specified by its actual node number or by using “0”.
2
Specifications
This command is an easy to use command for the store parameter command in the Object Dictionary Index
H1010 Sub-index H01.
Note that the NMT Master startup process uses SDO's which can be result in an Error of the CIF SDO
command if the NMT Startup Master accesses the remote Node at the same time.
For the Object Dictionary Index H1010, refer to Subsection 5.6.11
Introduction
10.6
10.6 Store Object Dictionary Settings
66th target node-ID
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
187
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.7
10.7 Restore Object Dictionary Default Settings
Restore Object Dictionary Default Settings
This command is an easy to use command for the load parameter command in the Object Dictionary Index
H1011 Sub-index H01.
The CANopen® devices need to be reset after the command to make the change become effective.
Note that the NMT Master startup process uses SDO's which can be result in an Error of the CIF SDO
command if the NMT Startup Master accesses the remote Node at the same time.
For the Object Dictionary Index H1011, refer to Subsection 5.6.12
Execution procedure: Restore object dictionary default settings
1) Write the target node-ID for which the object dictionary default settings are to be restored, to BFM #1001
to #1066.
When HFFFF is set as node-ID in BFM #1002 to #1066, the "Restore object dictionary factory default
settings" is finished.
The local FX3U-CAN can be specified by its actual node number or by using "0".
2) Write the command code H6010 to BFM #1000.
When the command code H6010 is written to BFM #1000, the command is executed.
3) When the Object Dictionary default settings have been restored, H6011 is written to BFM #1000.
If H601F, H000F or HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
4) To activate the default settings, the device has to reboot. Do not use the "Store Object Dictionary
Settings" command between the "Restore Object Dictionary Default Settings" command and the Reset
command.
Description
BFM No.
FROM (Read Access)
H6011:
..…
BFM #1001
BFM #1066
10.8
H601F:
HFFFF:
H000F:
H6010
1st target node-ID
Diagnosis Data
H0000:
No Error
HFFFF:
Parameter caused an error
..…
BFM #1000
TO (Write Access)
Object Dictionary default settings have been
restored
Parameter Error
Command:
CIF Busy
Error
66th target node-ID
Display Current Parameter
This command can be used to display the parameter in BFM #1001 to #1066 of the last executed CIF
command. If a command caused an error, this function allows the parameter which caused the error to be
displayed and to make the necessary adjustments to the parameter set and sequence program.
Execution procedure: Display current parameter
1) Write the command code H0000 to BFM #1000.
2) When the parameter value of the last executed CIF command has been restored to BFM #1001 to #1066,
H0000 is displayed to BFM #1000.*1
If HFFFF is read from BFM #1000, refer to Section 10.9
Description
BFM No.
BFM #1000
FROM (Read Access)
H0000:
HFFFF:
Input buffer is displaying.
CIF Busy
BFM #1001 to #1066 Parameter values of the last executed CIF command
*1.
188
TO (Write Access)
Command:
H0000
Unused
Afterwards, when a new parameter is written to BFM #1000 to #1066, the parameters of the last
executed CIF command will be displayed again except for the parameter that was just written.
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
1
Error Messages
Introduction
10.9
10.9 Error Messages
10.9.1 Error messages
BFM No.
BFM #1000
Description
Error: H000F
BFM #1001
BFM #1002 to #1066
Error Class
3
Additional data depending on an Error class
The written command to BFM #1000 is an unknown command.
Confirm the function mode setting and the executed command.
For the function mode setting, refer to Section 6.5
For command interface that can be executed in each functional mode,
refer to Chapter 10
This error will be also occur when a command in this function mode is not supported.
Description
BFM #1000
Error: H000F
BFM #1001
Error Class: H0064
5
Unused
2. When queue was not available
Access to the internal transmission queue was rejected. Possibly the bus load was too high.
This error may occur during Mode B mapping command execution for errors other than source or destination
parameter errors. Please execute again after waiting a little.
Error: H000F
BFM #1001
Error Class: H8FFF
BFM #1002 to #1066
Unused
7
3. Command or parameter change while CIF was busy
Description
Error: H000F
BFM #1001
Error Class: HFFFF
BFM #1002 to #1066
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
BFM No.
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
During FX3U-CAN Command interface execution, HFFFF is written in the read access area of BFM #1000.
During Command interface execution, a new command cannot be executed.
If accessing BFM #1000 to BFM #1066 during the CIF execution, an error may occur, and H000F will be
shown in the BFM #1000.
For the executing Command interface discontinuance procedure,
refer to Subsection 10.9.2
BFM #1000
6
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
Description
BFM #1000
Introduction of
Functions
BFM #1002 to #1066
BFM No.
4
Wiring
Note
Installation
1. When using Unknown command
BFM No.
2
Specifications
If an error occurs during the execution of a command, H000F is written to BFM #1000, and the Error Class
and additional data are stored to BFM #1001 to BFM #1066.
Unused
9
4. Clear/Reset the "CIF was busy" Error
CAN Layer 2
Mode
To Reset the CIF after a “Command or Parameter Change while CIF was busy” Error, HFFFF must be written
using the TO command to BFM #1000. The CIF is available again if the BFM #1000 displays H0000.
10
Command
Interface
189
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.9 Error Messages
5. SDO error
Node-ID of an error and SDO access abort code are stored in BFM #1002 to #1004.
BFM No.
Description
BFM #1000
Error: H000F
BFM #1001
Error Class: H0003
BFM #1002
Node-ID
BFM #1003
Low Word of SDO access abort code*1
BFM #1004
High Word of SDO access abort code*1
BFM #1005 to #1066
*1.
Unused
SDO access abort codes
In different CiA® Device/Application Profiles, more SDO access abort codes are defined.
For SDO access abort codes that are not in the following table,
refer to the manual of the device which sent the message
SDO access abort code (hex)
190
High Word
Low Word
0503
0000
Description
Toggle bit not alternated.
0504
0000
SDO protocol timed out. (FX3U-CAN: 500ms)
0504
0001
Client/server command specifier not valid or unknown.
0504
0002
Invalid block size (block mode only).
0504
0003
Invalid sequence number (block mode only).
0504
0004
CRC error (block mode only).
0504
0005
Out of memory.
0601
0000
Unsupported access to an object.
0601
0001
Attempt to read a write only object.
0601
0002
Attempt to write a read only object.
0602
0000
Object does not exist in the object dictionary.
0604
0041
Object cannot be mapped to the PDO.
0604
0042
The number and length of the objects to be mapped would exceed PDO length.
0604
0043
General parameter incompatibility reason.
0604
0047
General internal incompatibility in the device.
0606
0000
Access failed due to a hardware error.
0607
0010
Data type does not match, length of service parameter does not match
0607
0012
Data type does not match, length of service parameter too high
0607
0013
Data type does not match, length of service parameter too low
0609
0011
Sub-index does not exist.
0609
0030
Invalid value for parameter (download only).
0609
0031
Value of parameter written too high (download only).
0609
0032
Value of parameter written too low (download only).
0609
0036
Maximum value is less than minimum value.
060A
0023
Resource not available: SDO connection
0800
0000
General error
0800
0020
Data cannot be transferred or stored to the application.
0800
0021
Data cannot be transferred or stored to the application because of local control.
0800
0022
Data cannot be transferred or stored to the application because of the present device state.
0800
0023
Object dictionary dynamic generation fails or no object dictionary is present
0800
0024
No data available
5000
0000
Time out or impossible to allocate identifier for SDO transmission or Protocol mismatch
6060
0000
Buffer too small for received SDO data (this error will occur during initialization of the
transmission)
10 Command Interface
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
10.9 Error Messages
1
Introduction
6. Bus off
The FX3U-CAN is in Bus off and cannot send CAN messages.
BFM No.
Description
BFM #1000
Error: H000F
BFM #1001
Error Class: HB0FF
2
Unused
7. Device in wrong state
BFM No.
Description
BFM #1000
Error: H000F
BFM #1001
Error Class: H0F0F
4
Unused
Wiring
BFM #1002 to #1066
3
Installation
The state of the FX3U-CAN cannot execute the requested command interface.
Confirm the function mode setting and the state of FX3U-CAN.
For the function mode setting, refer to Section 6.5
For command interface which can be executed in each functional mode,
refer to Chapter 10
For the FX3U-CAN status, refer to Section 6.8
Specifications
BFM #1002 to #1066
10.9.2 CIF busy message
5
Introduction of
Functions
During FX3U-CAN Command interface execution, HFFFF is written in the read access area of BFM #1000.
During Command interface execution, a new command cannot be executed.
If a new command will be executed or a parameter of the running command will be changed, discontinue the
executing command by using the following method.
If BFM #1000 to BFM #1066 are written to during command interface execution, an error may occur, and
H000F will be written to BFM #1000.
For error message, refer to Subsection 10.9.1
6
Executing Command interface discontinuance procedure
Allocation of
Buffer Memories
1) Write HFFFF to BFM #1000 to discontinue the processing command.
2) If the executed command is reset, H0000 is displayed in BFM #1000.
3) The CIF is available again when BFM #1000 is H0000.
7
Interface and
Device Profile
(405 mode)
8
Lift Application
Profile
(417 Mode)
9
CAN Layer 2
Mode
10
Command
Interface
191
11 PLC RUN/STOP
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
11. PLC RUN/STOP
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
•
Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and the associated
manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.
FX3U-CAN operates as follows when the STOP/RUN state of the PLC changes.
1. CANopen® NMT Slave
• RUN→STOP
FX3U-CAN changes into the CANopen® state as set in the Error behaviour Object. In addition an EMCY is
sent.
For Error behaviour, refer to Section 5.7
For EMCY, refer to Subsection 5.6.13
• STOP→RUN
FX3U-CAN stays in the current CANopen® state.
2. CANopen® NMT Master without Flying Master function
• RUN→STOP
FX3U-CAN changes into the CANopen® state as set in the Error behaviour Object. The NMT Master Entity,
the Heartbeat producing and the Node Guarding will be stopped. NMT Slaves with Heartbeat consuming or
Life Guarding have the possibility to respond to the loss of the NMT Master. In addition an EMCY is sent.
For Error behaviour, refer to Section 5.7
For EMCY, refer to Subsection 5.6.13
• STOP→RUN
The Module enables Heartbeat and NMT Master services again, and starts the NMT Master startup service.
For NMT Master startup, refer to Subsection 5.8.5
3. CANopen® NMT Master with Flying Master function
• RUN→STOP
FX3U-CAN changes into the CANopen® state as set in the Error behaviour Object. The NMT Master Entity,
the Heartbeat producing and the Node Guarding will be stopped. Other NMT Flying Masters will start a
Flying Master negotiation if the Module was the active NMT Master. In addition an EMCY is sent.
For Error behaviour, refer to Section 5.7
For EMCY, refer to Subsection 5.6.13
• STOP→RUN
The Module enables Heartbeat and NMT Master services again, and starts a Flying Master negotiation.
For Flying Master, refer to Subsection 5.8.11
4. Layer 2
• RUN→STOP
FX3U-CAN sends the PLC RUN>STOP message (if configured) and changes into Offline state after this.
• STOP→RUN
FX3U-CAN stays in the current state.
192
11 PLC RUN/STOP
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
11
PLC
RUN/STOP
MEMO
12
Communication
Settings
Procedure
13
Program
Example
14
Diagnostics
193
12 Communication Settings Procedure
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
12. Communication Settings Procedure
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and the associated
manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
•
194
Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
Do not drop the product or exert strong impact to it.
Doing so may cause damage.
Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards, and special adapters
- Input/output extension units/blocks, FX Series terminal blocks and special function units/blocks
- Battery and memory cassette
12 Communication Settings Procedure
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
11
®
CANopen 405 Mode
1) Set the following.
Refer to Chapter 6
13
Program
Example
Step 1
12
Communication
Settings
Procedure
When using CANopen® 405 mode, the outline of the communication setting procedure is as follows.
To set the Object Dictionary and the TPDO/RPDO mapping, the use of CANopen® configuration software is
recommended.
For further information on CANopen® configuration software,
refer to the manual of the software to be used
For further information on the Object Dictionary, refer to Chapter 5
For further information on BFMs, refer to Chapter 6
For further information on data transfer location and PDO mapping, refer to Chapter 7
For further information on the CIF, refer to Chapter 10
 For example program, refer to Chapter 13
PLC
RUN/STOP
12.1
12.1 CANopen® 405 Mode
• Function mode (BFM #21)
2) Store setting to Flash ROM. (BFM #22)
14
Refer to Chapter 6
Diagnostics
3) FX3U-CAN restart
4) Set the following.
• Baud rate (BFM #24)
• Watchdog timer (BFM #26)
• Node address (BFM #27)
5) Store setting to Flash ROM. (BFM #22)
Refer to Chapter 6
6) FX3U-CAN restart
Step 2
1) Set the following required function.
Refer to Section 5.8
• NMT master/Flying Master
2) Save the Object Dictionary.
Refer to Subsection 5.6.11 and Section 10.6
Step 3
FX3U-CAN restart
Step 4
1) Set the following required functions.
For Module restart, refer to Section 6.8
Refer to Section 5.6, Section 5.8 and Section 6.18
• Heartbeat / the Node Guarding (either settings are possible.)
• TIME
• Layer Setting Services (LSS)
• NMT Master:
- Set up NMT Slave assignment H1F81
- Set up NMT Slave identification data H1F84 to H1F88
- Set up Boot time
Note:
When using FX3U-CAN as the Producer of the TIME message, parameters have to be set
in BFM #50 to #59 in the program used for normal operation.
2) Set the TPDO/RPDO mapping.
Refer to Chapter 7
Step 5
Save the Object Dictionary.
Step 6
Shift the NMT state to OPERATIONAL.
When FX3U-CAN is NMT Master, shift the NMT state of NMT slave into OPERATIONAL.
Refer to Section 5.8
Step 7
The TPDO/RPDO data and Emergency Message, etc. can be exchanged to CAN bus.
For example program, refer to Chapter 13
Refer to Subsection 5.6.11 and Section 10.6
195
12 Communication Settings Procedure
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
12.2
12.2 CANopen® 417 Mode
CANopen® 417 Mode
When using CANopen® 417 mode, the outline of the communication setting procedure is as follows.
To set the Object Dictionary, the use of CANopen® configuration software is recommended.
For further information on CANopen® configuration software,
refer to the manual of the software to be used
For further information on the Object Dictionary, refer to Chapter 5
For further information on BFMs, refer to Chapter 6
For further information on data transfer location, refer to Chapter 8
For further information on the CIF, refer to Chapter 10
 For example program, refer to Chapter 13
Step 1
1) Set the following.
• Function mode (BFM #21)
Refer to Chapter 6
2) Store setting to Flash ROM. (BFM #22)
3) FX3U-CAN restart
Refer to Chapter 6
4) Set the following.
• Baud rate (BFM #24)
• Watchdog timer (BFM #26)
• Node address (BFM #27)
Step 2
1) Set the following required function.
• NMT master/Flying Master
Refer to Section 5.8
2) Save the Object Dictionary.
Refer to Subsection 5.6.11 and Section 10.6
Step 3
FX3U-CAN restart
Step 4
1) Set the following required functions.
For Module restart, refer to Section 6.8
Refer to Section 5.6, Section 5.8 and Section 6.18
• Heartbeat / the Node Guarding (either settings are possible.)
• TIME
• Layer Setting Services (LSS)
• NMT Master:
- Set up NMT Slave assignment H1F81
- Set up NMT Slave identification data H1F84 to H1F88
- Set up Boot time
Note:
When using FX3U-CAN as the Producer of the TIME message, parameters have to be set
in BFM #50 to #59 in the program for normal operation.
2) Set the Lift number.
Refer to Section 5.10 and Section 8.2
Note:
When setting Lift number in BFM #3000, set BFM #20 bit 0 to ON after setting it.
196
Step 5
Save the Object Dictionary.
Step 6
Shift the NMT state to OPERATIONAL.
When FX3U-CAN is NMT Master, shift the NMT state of NMT slave into OPERATIONAL.
Refer to Section 5.8
Step 7
The Lift application data and Emergency Message, etc. can be exchanged to CAN bus.
For data transfer location, refer to Chapter 8
For example program, refer to Chapter 13
Refer to Subsection 5.6.11 and Section 10.6
12 Communication Settings Procedure
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
11
11 bit / 29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode
Step 1
1) Set the following.
Refer to Chapter 6
12
Communication
Settings
Procedure
When using the 11 bit / 29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode, the outline of the communication setting procedure is as
follows.
For further information on BFMs, refer to Chapter 6
For further information on data transfer location, refer to Chapter 9
For the CIF available in these modes, refer to Chapter 9
 For example program, refer to Chapter 13
PLC
RUN/STOP
12.3
12.3 11 bit / 29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 Mode
13
Program
Example
- Function mode (BFM #21)
- Baud rate (BFM #24)
- Watchdog timer (BFM #26)
2) Store setting to Flash ROM. (BFM #22)
Refer to Chapter 6
Step 2
FX3U-CAN restart
Step 3
Set the configuration of transmitted and received data.
Step 4
Store setting to Flash ROM. (BFM #22)
Step 5
Shift FX3U-CAN to Layer 2 online mode.
14
For Module restart, refer to Section 6.8
Diagnostics
Refer to Chapter 9
Refer to Chapter 6
Refer to Section 6.8
Step 6
The CAN messages can be exchanged to CAN bus.
For example program, refer to Chapter 13
197
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.1 System Configuration
13. Program Example
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and the associated
manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
•
Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
Do not drop the product or exert strong impact to it.
Doing so may cause damage.
Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards, and special adapters
- Input/output extension units/blocks, FX Series terminal blocks and special function units/blocks
- Battery and memory cassette
The Programs shown below are examples of how to set local parameters, set up a CANopen® network, and
exchange data over the CANopen® bus with the FX3U-CAN.
Large networks can be configured more quickly and easily by using a CANopen® configuration tool instead.
Note
These program examples together with the Function blocks can be downloaded from
http://eu3a.mitsubishielectric.com/fa/en/ in the MyMitsubishi section (free registration necessary).
Note
The sample ladder program use labels.
13.1
For label setting operation on GX Works2,
refer to GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
System Configuration
The sample Program sets up the initial BFM and Object dictionary settings and starts PDO Communication.
FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC FX3U-CAN
Series PLC
Terminating
resistor
198
Remote I/O
Terminating
resistor
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
11
Local Label Setting
No.
Class
Label Name
PLC
RUN/STOP
13.2
13.2 Local Label Setting
Data Type
1
VAR
CANID
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
2
VAR
CommandSequence
Word[Signed]
3
VAR
NMTMasterSetError
Bit
Word[Signed]
NMTMasterSetCompleted
Bit
6
VAR
NMTMasterSetOkCount
Word[Signed]
7
VAR
ConsumedNodeAddress
Word[Signed](0..32)
8
VAR
ConsumerHeartbeatTime
Word[Signed](0..32)
9
VAR
ConsumerSetupError
Bit
10
VAR
ConsumerSetupErrorCounter
Word[Signed]
11
VAR
ConsumerSetupCompleted
Bit
12
VAR
ConsumerSetupOkCounter
Word[Signed]
13
VAR
ConsumingNodeID
Word[Signed]
14
VAR
ErrorReset
Bit
15
VAR
ErrorStatus
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
16
VAR
ExecuteMapping
Bit
17
VAR
FillData
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
18
VAR
FirstPDOProcessing
Bit
Bit
19
VAR
FourthPDOProcessing
20
VAR
FX3UCANOpenInit
CANopenInit
21
VAR
FX3UMasterSetup
NMTMasterSettings
22
VAR
GuardedTime
Word[Signed](0..15)
23
VAR
HeartbeatConsumer
HeartbeatConsumerSetup
24
VAR
HeartbeatConsumingSetting
Bit
25
VAR
HeartbeatProducer
HeartbeatProducerSetup
26
VAR
HeartbeatProducerSetting
Bit
27
VAR
Master
Bit
28
VAR
MasterNodeAddress
Word[Signed]
29
VAR
NodeAddress
Word[Signed]
30
VAR
NodeHeartbeatStatus
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](0..126)
31
VAR
NodeNMTStatus
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](0..2)
32
VAR
NoOfConsumedNodes
Word[Signed]
33
VAR
NoOfEntries
Word[Signed]
34
VAR
NoOfProducingNodes
Word[Signed]
35
VAR
NumberOfSlaveNodes
Word[Signed]
36
VAR
ObjectIndex
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](1..8)
37
VAR
ObjectLength
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](1..8)
38
VAR
ObjectSubindex
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](1..8)
39
VAR
Operational
Bit
40
VAR
PDOnumber
Word[Signed]
41
VAR
PdoRead
PDORead
42
VAR
PDOReadData
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](0..3)
43
VAR
PDOSetupError
Bit
44
VAR
PDOSetupErrCounter
Word[Signed]
45
VAR
PDOSetupOkCounter
Word[Signed]
46
VAR
PDOSetupProcessing
Bit
47
VAR
PdoWrite
PDOWrite
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](0..3)
48
VAR
PDOWriteData
49
VAR
PreOperational
Bit
50
VAR
ProducerHeartbeatTime
Word[Signed](0..32)
51
VAR
ProducerNodeID
Word[Signed](0..32)
52
VAR
ProducerSetupError
Bit
13
14
Diagnostics
NMTMasterSetErrorCount
VAR
Program
Example
VAR
5
Communication
Settings
Procedure
4
12
199
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
No.
53
200
Class
VAR
13.2 Local Label Setting
Label Name
Data Type
ProducerSetupErrorCounter
Word[Signed]
Bit
54
VAR
ProducerSetupCompleted
55
VAR
ProducerSetupOkCounter
Word[Signed]
56
VAR
SDOReadCompleted
Bit
57
VAR
ReadData
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](0..61)
58
VAR
ReadDataLength
Word[Signed]
59
VAR
SDOReadErrorCode
Double Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[32-bit]
60
VAR
SDOReadError
Bit
61
VAR
SDOReadErrorCounter
Word[Signed]
62
VAR
ReadIndex
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
63
VAR
ReadNodeAddress
Word[Signed]
64
VAR
ReadSubIndex
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
65
VAR
ReceiveOrTransmit
Bit
66
VAR
ReleaseAnalogInputdata
Bit
67
VAR
RemoteNodeID
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
68
VAR
NMTRequestCompleted
Bit
69
VAR
RequestData
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
70
VAR
NMTRequestError
Bit
71
VAR
NMTRequestErrorCounter
Word[Signed]
72
VAR
RetryFactor
Word[Signed](0..15)
73
VAR
RPDOnumber
Word[Signed]
74
VAR
SDOREadCommand
SDORead
75
VAR
SDOReadRequest
Bit
76
VAR
SDOwriteCommand
SDOWrite
77
VAR
SecondPDOProcessing
Bit
78
VAR
ExecNMTMasterConfig
Bit
PDOSetup
79
VAR
SetupPDOs
80
VAR
SlaveConfiguration
Word[Signed](0..15)
81
VAR
NMTSlaveSetup
NMTSlaveSettings
82
VAR
NMTSlaveSetupError
Bit
83
VAR
NMTSlaveSetupErrorCounter
Word[Signed]
84
VAR
NMTSlaveSetCompleted
Bit
85
VAR
NMTSlaveSetupOkCounter
Word[Signed]
86
VAR
StartAllNodes
Bit
87
VAR
StartCANOpenNodes
NMTRequestWrite
88
VAR
StartConsumerSetup
Bit
89
VAR
StartPDOCommunication
Bit
90
VAR
StartPDORead
Bit
91
VAR
StartPDOSetup
Bit
92
VAR
StartPDOWrite
Bit
93
VAR
StartProducerSetup
Bit
94
VAR
StartNMTRequest
Bit
Bit
95
VAR
StartSDORead
96
VAR
StartSDOWrite
Bit
97
VAR
StartNMTSlaveSetup
Bit
98
VAR
StartupConfigurationValue
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
99
VAR
TargetSlaveNumber
Word[Signed](0..15)
100 VAR
ThirdPDOProcessing
Bit
101 VAR
TPDOnumber
Word[Signed]
102 VAR
TransmissionType
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
103 VAR
MELSEC_STliteHeartbeatActive
Bit
104 VAR
MELSEC_STlitePreOperational
Bit
105 VAR
SDOWriteCompleted
Bit
106 VAR
WriteData
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit](0..61)
107 VAR
WriteDataLength
Word[Signed]
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.2 Local Label Setting
11
Class
Label Name
SDOWriteErrorCode
Data Type
PLC
RUN/STOP
No.
108 VAR
Double Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[32-bit]
109 VAR
SDOWriteError
Bit
110 VAR
SDOWriteErrorCounter
Word[Signed]
111 VAR
WriteIndex
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
112 VAR
WriteNodeAddress
Word[Signed]
Word[Signed]
115 VAR
PDOSetupCompleted
Bit
116 VAR
NMTRequestOkCounter
Word[Signed]
117 VAR
SDOReadOKCounter
Word[Signed]
118 VAR
InitComplete
Bit
119 VAR
StartCommunication
Bit
120 VAR
SlaveSettingsSetup
Bit
121 VAR
StartNode
Word[Signed]
122 VAR
NumberOfNodes
Word[Signed]
123 VAR
MELSEC_STliteOperational
Bit
124 VAR
NMTStatusRead
NMTStatus
125 VAR
CheckNMTStatus
Bit
126 VAR
HeartbeatStatusRead
HeartbeatStatus
127 VAR
CheckHeartbeatStatus
Bit
128 VAR
Stopped
Bit
13
14
Diagnostics
Word[Unsigned]/Bit String[16-bit]
SDOWriteOkCounter
Program
Example
WriteSubIndex
114 VAR
Communication
Settings
Procedure
113 VAR
12
201
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3
13.3 Program
Program
1
Copyright © Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV, 2013
All examples are only intended to improve understanding of the functionality and handling of the product. In view of the wide range of applications for this product,
users must acquire sufficient knowledge themselves in order to ensure that it is correctly used in their specific application.
Persons responsible for the application and the product must themselves ensure that each application is in compliance with all relevant requirements, standards
and legislation in respect to configuration and safety.
Mitsubishi Electric cannot assume any liability if these examples are used in real applications.
On the initial scan, start the communication and set the NMT status settings
M8002
EN
EN
EN
SET
ENO
d
StartCommunication
RST
ENO
d
CheckNMTStatus
RST
ENO
d
CheckHeartbeatStatus
K1
EN
s
MOVP
ENO
d
StartNode
K3
EN
s
MOVP
ENO
d
NumberOfNodes
2
Setup the initial settings for the FX3U-CAN module
FX3UCANOpenInit
CANopenInit
K0
K1
K1000
K20
ErrorReset
HeadAddress
NodeAddress
BaudRate
WDTValue
ErrorReset
InitComplete
OperationalState
PreOperationalState
StoppedState
ActiveMaster
ModuleErrorStatus
InitComplete
Operational
PreOperational
Stopped
Master
ErrorStatus
3
If the init procedure is completed start the NMT master setup procedure
AND
InitComplete
StartCommunication
H3
EN
s
EN
EN
MOV
ENO
d
StartupConfigurationValue
SET
ENO
d
ExecNMTMasterConfig
RST
ENO
d
StartCommunication
4
Check the NMT status of specified nodes
NMTStatusRead
CheckNMTStatus
K0
StartNode
NumberOfNodes
202
NMTStatus
NodeNMTStatus
Enable
HeadAddress
StartNodeNumber
NumberOfNodes
NodeNMTStatus[0]
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
11
PLC
RUN/STOP
5
Check if the MELSEC_STlite CANopen node is in pre-operational mode
EQ
NodeNMTStatus[2]
H7F
EN
OUT
ENO
d
MELSEC_STlitePreOperational
OUT
ENO
d
MELSEC_STliteOperational
12
Communication
Settings
Procedure
6
Check if the MELSEC_STlite CANopen node is in operational mode
EQ
NodeNMTStatus[2]
H5
EN
13
7
Program
Example
Check the heartbeat status of all nodes
HeartbeatStatusRead
CheckHeartbeatStatus
K0
HeartbeatStatus
Enable
NodeHeartbeatStatus
HeadAddress
NodeHeartbeatStatus
14
Diagnostics
8
Check if the MELSEC_STlite slave node has an active Heartbeat signal
EQ
NodeHeartbeatStatus[2]
H2
EN
OUT
ENO
d
MELSEC_STliteHeartbeatActive
9
Configure the start up behaviour of the CANopen master device
FX3UMasterSetup
K0
K1
StartupConfigurationValue
ExecNMTMasterConfig
NMTMasterSettings
SettingsCompleted
HeadAddress
SettingsError
NodeAddress
StartUpConfiguration
StartMasterSetup
NMTMasterSetCompleted
NMTMasterSetError
10
If a NMT Master setup command execution is completed, reset its execution signal
NMTMasterSetCompleted
EN
RST
ENO
d
ExecNMTMasterConfig
11
If a NMT Master setup command execution error occurs, increase the command error counter
NMTMasterSetError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
NMTMasterSetErrorCount
12
If a NMT Master setup command execution is completed, increase the command complete counter and move to the next command
AND
NMTMasterSetCompleted
NMTMasterSetError
EN
EN
EN
INCP
ENO
d
NMTMasterSetOkCount
SET
ENO
d
CheckNMTStatus
SET
ENO
d
HeartbeatProducerSetting
203
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
13
Initialize the Heartbeat producer setup command data
AND
K3
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ProducerNodeID[0]
K2100
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ProducerHeartbeatTime[0]
K1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
NoOfProducingNodes
SET
ENO
d
StartProducerSetup
RST
ENO
d
HeartbeatProducerSetting
HeartbeatProducerSetting
StartProducerSetup
MELSEC_STlitePreoperational
EN
EN
14
Issue an Heartbeat producing setup command
HeartbeatProducer
K0
ProducerNodeID
ProducerHeartbeatTime
NoOfProducingNodes
StartProducerSetup
HeartbeatProducerSetup
SettingsCompleted
HeadAddress
ProducerNodeAddresses SettingsError
ProducerHeartbeatTime
NumberOfNodes
SetHeartbeatProducer
ProducerSetupCompleted
ProducerSetupError
15
If a command execution is completed, reset its execution signal
ProducerSetupCompleted
EN
RST
ENO
d
StartProducerSetup
16
If a command execution error occurs, increase the command error counter
ProducerSetupError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
ProducerSetupErrorCounter
17
If a command execution is completed, increase the command complete counter and move to the next command
AND
ProducerSetupCompleted
ProducerSetupError
EN
EN
204
INCP
ENO
d
ProducerSetupOkCounter
SET
ENO
d
HeartbeatConsumingSetting
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
11
PLC
RUN/STOP
18
Issue an Heartbeat consuming setup command
AND
HeartbeatConsumingSetting
StartConsumerSetup
MELSEC_STlitePreOperational
MOV
ENO
d
K3
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
K3200
ConsumedNodeAddress[0]
MOV
ENO
d
ConsumerHeartbeatTime[0]
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
EN
13
Program
Example
K1
EN
s
12
ConsumingNodeID
Communication
Settings
Procedure
K1
EN
s
NoOfConsumedNodes
SET
ENO
d
StartConsumerSetup
14
Diagnostics
RST
EN
ENO
d
HeartbeatConsumingSetting
19
Issue an Heartbeat consuming setup command
HeartbeatConsumer
K0
ConsumingNodeID
ConsumedNodeAddress
ConsumerHeartbeatTime
NoOfConsumedNodes
StartConsumerSetup
HeartbeatConsumerSetup
SettingsCompleted
HeadAddress
SettingsError
NodeAddress
ConsumedNodeAddresses
ConsumerHeartbeatTime
NumberOfNodes
SetHeartbeatConsumer
ConsumerSetupCompleted
ConsumerSetupError
20
If a Heartbeat consuming setup command execution is completed, reset its execution signal
ConsumerSetupCompleted
EN
RST
ENO
d
StartConsumerSetup
21
If a Heartbeat consuming setup command execution error occurs, increase the command error counter
ConsumerSetupError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
ConsumerSetupErrorCounter
22
If a Heartbeat consuming setup command execution is completed, increase the command complete counter and move to the next command
AND
ConsumerSetupCompleted
ConsumerSetupError
EN
EN
EN
INCP
ENO
d
ConsumerSetupOkCounter
SET
ENO
d
SlaveSettingsSetup
SET
ENO
d
CheckHeartbeatStatus
205
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
23
Initialize the set NMT Slave behaviour command data
AND
SlaveSettingsSetup
StartNMTSlaveSetup
Master
MELSEC_STliteHeartbeatActive
MELSEC_STlitePreoperational
H1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
SlaveConfiguration[0]
K3
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
TargetSlaveNumber[0]
K1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
NumberOfSlaveNodes
SET
ENO
d
StartNMTSlaveSetup
RST
ENO
d
SlaveSettingsSetup
EN
EN
24
Configure the NMT behaviour of CANopen slave devices
NMTSlaveSetup
K0
SlaveConfiguration
TargetSlaveNumber
GuardedTime
RetryFactor
NumberOfSlaveNodes
StartNMTSlaveSetup
NMTSlaveSettings
SettingsCompleted
HeadAddress
SettingsError
SlaveConfiguration
TargetSlaveNumber
GuardTime
RetryFactor
NumberOfNodes
StartSlavesSetup
NMTSlaveSetCompleted
NMTSlaveSetupError
25
If a NMT slave setup command execution is completed reset status signal and move to the next one
NMTSlaveSetCompleted
EN
RST
ENO
d
StartNMTSlaveSetup
26
If a NMT slave setup command execution error occurs, increase the command error counter
NMTSlaveSetupError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
NMTSlaveSetupErrorCounter
27
If a NMT slave setup command execution is completed, increase the command complete counter
AND
NMTSlaveSetCompleted
NMTSlaveSetupError
EN
EN
206
SET
ENO
d
ReleaseAnalogInputdata
INCP
ENO
d
NMTSlaveSetupOkCounter
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
11
PLC
RUN/STOP
28
Issue an SDO write command to activate the transmission of analog input data from the MELSEC_STlite node
AND
K3
H6423
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
MOV
ENO
d
K1
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
K1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
EN
RST
ENO
d
WriteSubIndex
13
WriteDataLength
WriteData[0]
14
Diagnostics
SET
EN
ENO
d
WriteIndex
Program
Example
H0
EN
s
12
WriteNodeAddress
Communication
Settings
Procedure
ReleaseAnalogInputdata
StartSDOWrite
MELSEC_STliteHeartbeatActive
MELSEC_STlitePreoperational
StartSDOWrite
ReleaseAnalogInputdata
29
Execute an SDO write command to the index 6423, sub-index 0 of node address 3
SDOWriteCommand
0
WriteNodeAddress
WriteIndex
WriteSubIndex
WriteDataLength
WriteData[0]
StartSDOWrite
SDOWrite
WriteCompleted
HeadAddress
WriteError
NodeAddress
WriteErrorCode
Index
SubIndex
WriteDataLength
WriteData
WriteCommand
SDOWriteCompleted
SDOWriteError
SDOWriteErrorCode
30
If a SDO write command execution is completed, reset its execution signal
SDOWriteCompleted
EN
RST
ENO
d
StartSDOWrite
31
If a SDO write command execution error occurs, increase the command error counter
SDOWriteError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
SDOWriteErrorCounter
32
If a SDO write command execution is completed, increase the command complete counter and move to the next command
AND
SDOWriteCompleted
SDOWriteError
EN
EN
K1
EN
s
INCP
ENO
d
SDOWriteOkCounter
SET
ENO
d
PDOSetupProcessing
MOV
ENO
d
CommandSequence
207
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
33
Check if the first PDO setup command needs to be executed
AND
FirstPDOProcessing
PDOSetupProcessing
StartPDOSetup
EQ
CommandSequence
1
34
Set the communication parameters for the selected PDO
FirstPDOProcessing
K3
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
NodeAddress
K1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
PDOnumber
H181
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
CANID
HFF
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
TransmissionType
SET
ENO
d
ReceiveOrTransmit
RST
ENO
d
ExecuteMapping
SET
ENO
d
StartPDOSetup
EN
EN
EN
35
Check if the second PDO setup command needs to be executed
AND
PDOSetupProcessing
StartPDOSetup
EQ
CommandSequence
2
36
Set the data for the mapped object in the selected PDO
SecondPDOProcessing
HA4C0
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectIndex[1]
H1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectSubIndex[1]
H8
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectLength[1]
SET
ENO
d
ReceiveOrTransmit
SET
ENO
d
ExecuteMapping
EN
EN
208
SecondPDOProcessing
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
11
PLC
RUN/STOP
37
Set the communication parameters for the selected PDO
SecondPDOProcessing
K1
H183
H1
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
PDOnumber
CANID
13
TransmissionType
NoOfEntries
14
Diagnostics
SET
EN
ENO
d
12
NodeAddress
Program
Example
HFE
MOV
ENO
d
Communication
Settings
Procedure
K1
EN
s
StartPDOSetup
38
Check if the third PDO setup command needs to be executed
AND
PDOSetupProcessing
StartPDOSetup
ThirdPDOProcessing
EQ
CommandSequence
3
39
Set the communication parameters for the selected PDO
ThirdPDOProcessing
K3
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
NodeAddress
K2
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
PDOnumber
H281
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
CANID
HFF
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
TransmissionType
SET
ENO
d
ReceiveOrTransmit
RST
ENO
d
ExecuteMapping
SET
ENO
d
StartPDOSetup
EN
EN
EN
209
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
40
Check if the fourth PDO setup command needs to be executed
AND
PDOSetupProcessing
StartPDOSetup
EQ
CommandSequence
4
41
First, initialize the data for the first mapped object of the fourth PDO setup command
FourthPDOProcessing
HA580
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectIndex[1]
H5
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectSubIndex[1]
H10
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectLength[1]
SET
ENO
d
ReceiveOrTransmit
SET
ENO
d
ExecuteMapping
EN
EN
42
Initialize the data for the second mapped object of the fourth PDO setup command
FourthPDOProcessing
HA580
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectIndex[2]
H6
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectSubIndex[2]
H10
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
ObjectLength[2]
SET
ENO
d
ReceiveOrTransmit
EN
210
FourthPDOProcessing
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
11
PLC
RUN/STOP
43
Then, initialize the communication parameters data for the fourth PDO setup command:
FourthPDOProcessing
K1
H283
H2
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
EN
s
PDOnumber
MOV
ENO
d
CANID
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
EN
s
12
NodeAddress
13
Program
Example
HFE
MOV
ENO
d
Communication
Settings
Procedure
K2
EN
s
TransmissionType
MOV
ENO
d
NoOfEntries
14
Diagnostics
SET
EN
ENO
d
StartPDOSetup
44
Change the PDO communication and/or mapping parameters of a specified PDO
SetupPDOs
K0
NodeAddress
ReceiveOrTransmit
PDOnumber
CANID
TransmissionType
ExecuteMapping
NoOfEntries
ObjectIndex
ObjectSubindex
ObjectLength
StartPDOSetup
PDOSetup
SetupCompleted
HeadAddress
SetupError
NodeAddress
ReceiveOrTransmit
PDOnumber
CANID
TransmissionType
ExecuteMapping
NoOfMappedObjects
ObjectIndex
ObjectSubIndex
ObjectLength
StartSetup
PDOSetupCompleted
PDOSetupError
45
If a PDO setup command execution is completed, increase the command complete counter
AND
PDOSetupCompleted
PDOSetupError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
PDOSetupOkCounter
46
If a PDO setup command execution error occurs, increase the command error counter
PDOSetupError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
PDOSetupErrCounter
47
If a PDO setup command execution is completed reset status signal
PDOSetupCompleted
EN
RST
ENO
d
StartPDOSetup
48
If a PDO setup command was executed, move to the next one
AND
PDOSetupProcessing
StartPDOSetup
INC
EN
ENO
d
CommandSequence
211
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
49
When ALL the PDO setup commands are normaly completed, start the next command
AND
PDOSetupProcessing
EN
GT
EN
CommandSequence
4
SET
ENO
d
StartAllNodes
RST
ENO
d
PDOSetupProcessing
50
When the previous command is completed, issue a Start all nodes command from the CANOpen master
AND
StartAllNodes
StartNMTRequest
H80
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
RemoteNodeID
H5
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
RequestData
K1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
MasterNodeAddress
SET
ENO
d
StartNMTRequest
RST
ENO
d
StartAllNodes
EN
EN
51
Use the NMT request write command to start all remote nodes
StartCANOpenNodes
0
MasterNodeAddress
RemoteNodeID
RequestData
StartNMTRequest
NMTRequestWrite
RequestCompleted
HeadAddress
RequestError
NodeAddress
RemoteNodeID
RequestCode
StartRequest
NMTRequestCompleted
NMTRequestError
52
If a NMT write request execution is completed, reset its execution signal
NMTRequestCompleted
EN
RST
ENO
d
StartNMTRequest
53
If a NMT write request execution error occurs, increase the command error counter
NMTRequestError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
NMTRequestErrorCounter
54
If a NMT write request execution is completed, increase the command complete counter and move to the next command
AND
NMTRequestCompleted
NMTRequestError
EN
EN
EN
212
INCP
ENO
d
NMTRequestOkCounter
SET
ENO
d
StartPDOCommunication
SET
ENO
d
SDOReadRequest
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
11
PLC
RUN/STOP
55
When the previous command is completed, issue a SDO Read command
AND
SDOReadRequest
StartSDORead
K3
H1
MOV
ENO
d
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
ReadIndex
ReadSubIndex
SET
EN
ENO
d
StartSDORead
EN
RST
ENO
d
13
Program
Example
MOV
ENO
d
EN
s
12
ReadNodeAddress
Communication
Settings
Procedure
H1400
EN
s
SDOReadRequest
14
56
Diagnostics
Use the SDO read command to read index 1400, sub-index 1 from node address 3 (it reads the CAN-ID of the first RPDO of the MELSEC_STlite node)
SDOReadCommand
0
ReadNodeAddress
ReadIndex
ReadSubIndex
StartSDORead
SDORead
ReadCompleted
HeadAddress
ReadDataLength
NodeAddress
ReadData
Index
ReadError
Subindex
ReadErrorCode
ReadCommand
SDOReadCompleted
ReadDataLength
ReadData[0]
SDOReadError
SDOReadErrorCode
57
If a SDO Read command is completed, reset its execution signal
SDOReadCompleted
EN
RST
ENO
d
StartSDORead
58
If a SDO Read command error occurs, increase the command error counter
SDOReadError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
SDOReadErrorCounter
59
If a SDO Read command is completed, increase the command complete counter
AND
SDOReadCompleted
SDOReadError
EN
INCP
ENO
d
SDOReadOKCounter
213
13 Program Example
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
13.3 Program
60
When the previous is completed, start the PDO communication and start an SDO Read request
StartPDOCommunication
K1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
TPDOnumber
H1000
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
FillData
K1
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
RPDOnumber
SET
ENO
d
StartPDOWrite
SET
ENO
d
StartPDORead
RST
ENO
d
StartPDOCommunication
EN
EN
EN
61
On the rising edge of the one second clock, increase the PDO write data
AND
M8013
StartPDOWrite
EN
FillData
K2
INCP
ENO
d
FMOVP
EN
ENO
s
d
n*
FillData
PDOWriteData[0]
62
Write the PDO data
PDOWrite
K0
TPDOnumber
PDOWriteData
StartPDOWrite
PDOWrite
HeadAddress
TPDOnumber
WriteData
StartCommunication
63
Read the PDO data
PDORead
K0
RPDOnumber
StartPDORead
214
PDORead
HeadAddress
RPDOnumber
StartCommunication
ReadData
PDOReadData
14 Diagnostics
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
14.1 Preliminary Checks
11
PLC
RUN/STOP
14. Diagnostics
12
•
•
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
14.1
14
Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
Do not drop the product or exert strong impact to it.
Doing so may cause damage.
Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards, and special adapters
- Input/output extension units/blocks, FX Series terminal blocks and special function units/blocks
- Battery and memory cassette
Diagnostics
•
Preliminary Checks
Check the RUN, FROM/TO, Tx/Rx, ERROR and POWER LED status.
1. RUN LED
LED State
OFF
SINGLE FLASH*1
BLINKING*1
FLICKERING*1
ON
*1.
Description
FX3U-CAN is in Layer 2 offline mode.
FX3U-CAN is in CANopen® STOPPED state.
Periodically turns ON for 100 ms, and OFF for 1 s.
FX3U-CAN is in CANopen® PRE-OPERATIONAL state.
Turns ON/OFF in 200 ms intervals.
LSS Services in progress
Turns ON/OFF in 50 ms intervals.
•
•
CANopen® mode: CANopen® OPERATIONAL state
Layer 2 mode:
Layer 2 online mode
RUN LED has three kinds of flicker states: single flash, blinking, and flickering. This LED flickers as
follows.
SINGLE FLASH
0.2 s
1s
BLINKING
0.2 s
13
Program
Example
•
Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and the associated
manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.
Communication
Settings
Procedure
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
0.2 s
FLICKERING
0.05 s 0.05 s
215
14 Diagnostics
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
14.1 Preliminary Checks
2. FROM/TO LED
LED State
Description
OFF
PLC is not accessing BFMs in FX3U-CAN using FROM/TO instructions or other instructions which specify buffer
memory values directly.
ON
PLC is accessing BFMs in FX3U-CAN using FROM/TO instructions or other instructions which specify buffer
memory values directly.
3. Tx/Rx LED
LED State
Description
OFF
FX3U-CAN is not transmitting or receiving CAN messages.
ON
FX3U-CAN is transmitting or receiving CAN messages.
4. ERROR LED
LED State
OFF
SINGLE FLASH*1
Description
No error
At least one of the error counters of the module has reached or exceeded the error passive level.
Check the following points in the network.
• Check that the terminating resistors at both ends of the network are connected.
• Check that all nodes have the same baud rate setting.
• Check that all nodes have a unique Node-Id setting.
• Check that the CAN_H, CAN_L and CAN_GND wires are not broken.
• Check that the CAN_SHLD is grounded.
• Check that the CAN_SHLD is connected at all nodes.
• Check that the CAN cable wires do not short circuit other CAN cable wires.
A NMT guarding failure (NMT-Slave or NMT-Master) or a heartbeat failure has occurred.
DOUBLE FLASH*1 Check the error status in BFM #29.
BLINKING*1
FLICKERING*1
ON
*1.
Refer to Section 14.2
LSS Services in progress
FX3U-CAN is in BUS-OFF state, or CPU error occurs in PLC main unit.
The LED will always be ON if there is a BUS_OFF error, a general error (BFM #29, bit 0), or the FROM/TO
watchdog is expired.
• Check the error status in BFM #29.
Refer to Section 14.2
• Check the ERROR LED of the PLC
For FX3G Series PLC, refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
For FX3GC Series PLC, refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
For FX3U Series PLC, refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
For FX3UC Series PLC, refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
• Check the sequence program for FROM/TO watchdog.
For the FROM/TO watchdog, refer to Section 6.9
ERROR LED has four kinds of flicker states: single flash, double flash, blinking, and flickering. This
LED flickers as follows.
SINGLE FLASH
0.2 s
1s
DOUBLE FLASH
0.2 s
0.2 s
0.2 s
0.2 s
BLINKING
FLICKERING
0.05 s 0.05 s
216
Refer to Section 14.2
General error has occurred.
Check the error status in BFM #29.
0.2 s
1s
14 Diagnostics
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
14.2 Detail Error Check
11
LED State
Description
Lit
The power is being correctly supplied from FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC*1/FX3UC*1 Series PLC via the extension cable to
FX3U-CAN.
Otherwise
14.2
Check the power supply of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC*1/FX3UC*1 series PLC.
For FX3G Series PLC, refer to FX3G Hardware Edition
For FX3GC Series PLC, refer to FX3GC Hardware Edition
For FX3U Series PLC, refer to FX3U Hardware Edition
For FX3UC Series PLC, refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition
For power supply specifications for FX3U-CAN, refer to Section 2.2
An FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is necessary to connect the FX3U-CAN to an FX3GC/FX3UC Series
PLC.
Detail Error Check
14
Diagnostics
Please check the bit status of Error Status in BFM #29.
Note
• The error flags b5, b6, b8, b10, b13 and b15 are latched, and it is necessary to write K0 to the appropriate
bit of BFM #29 or the whole BFM, which will clear all latched error flags in BFM #29.
All other bits are reset automatically if the cause for the error is resolved.
• In case of a FROM/TO watchdog timer error (bit 7 is ON), the following message will be sent to the
network.
If the module is in a CANopen® Mode the module will switch to CANopen® State Stopped.
For the FROM/TO watchdog, refer to Section 6.9
- When CANopen® 405/417 mode is used
FX3U-CAN transmits the EMCY Object (emergency message) on the CAN network.
For the EMCY Object (emergency message), refer to Subsection 5.6.13 and Section 6.23
- When the 11 bit / 29 bit CAN-ID Layer 2 mode is used
FX3U-CAN transmits the PLC RUN>STOP message on the CAN network.
For the PLC RUN>STOP message, refer to Section 9.6
Module failures
The module stays in initial status (Displayed in BFM #25). The CANopen® configuration may be faulty. Reset
the Object Dictionary to default settings using the CIF.
For Restore Object Dictionary default settings, refer to Section 10.7
For module restart, refer to Section 6.8
Bit No.
13
Program
Example
*1.
•
12
Communication
Settings
Procedure
The power is being incorrectly supplied from FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC*1/FX3UC*1 Series PLC via the extension cable to
FX3U-CAN.
• Check the connection of the extension cable to the PLC.
PLC
RUN/STOP
5. POWER LED
Description
Bit 0
General error
General error has occurred.
This bit is ON if bit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 or 15 are ON. Check the ON bit.
Bit 1
Hardware error
Hardware error has occurred.
If this error flag is not cleared after a module reset (BFM #25 bit 0) or another power cycle, FX3U-CAN is
probably damaged. Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
For module restart, refer to Section 6.8
Bit 2
Internal power
supply error
Internal power supply error has occurred.
If this error flag is not cleared after a module reset (BFM #25 bit 0) or another power cycle, FX3U-CAN is
probably damaged. Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
For module restart, refer to Section 6.8
217
14 Diagnostics
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
14.2 Detail Error Check
Bit No.
Bit 3
Bit 4
Description
CAN bus off error
The FX3U-CAN is bus OFF.
The FX3U-CAN has too many transmission errors. Check the following points in the network. And then,
turn on the power for PLC again or restart the FX3U-CAN.
For module restart, refer to Section 6.8
• Check that the terminating resistors at both ends of the network are connected.
• Check that all nodes have the same baud rate setting.
• Check that all nodes have a unique Node-Id setting.
• Check that the CAN_H, CAN_L and CAN_GND wires are not broken.
• Check that the CAN_SHLD is grounded.
• Check that the CAN_SHLD is connected at all nodes.
• Check that the CAN cable wires do not short circuit other CAN cable wires.
FLASH memory
error
FLASH memory error has occurred.
Invalid data in the Flash memory might be caused by power loss during a write operation to the Flash
ROM. If this error flag is not cleared after a module reset (BFM #25 bit 0) or another power cycle, please
contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
For module restart, refer to Section 6.8
•
Bit 5
Write access while module is in initialisation mode.
Write to BFMs, after BFM #25 bit 7 is OFF.
For the communication status (BFM #25), refer to Section 6.8
• Layer 2 mode:
Invalid write access to configuration BFM while in online/initialisation mode.
Do not write to configuration BFM when module is online. Write to configuration BFMs, after switching
to configuration mode and off line mode.
For the communication status (BFM #25), refer to Section 6.8
This failure is displayed in BFM #40.
Bit 6
BFM setting error
BFM setting error has occurred.
ON when a value that is out of range is written to a BFM. This failure BFM address is displayed in BFM
#39. In Layer 2 mode, this bit can not be reset while the module is in online mode.
For BFM #39, refer to Section 6.17
Bit 7
FROM/TO
watchdog timer
error
FROM/TO watchdog timer expired. Please see the above note.
This error flag can be reset by writing to BFM #26.
For the FROM/TO watchdog, refer to Section 6.9
Internal data
queue overflow
Internal data queue overflowed.
Extreme bus load can cause the internal queues to overflow. Decrease the bus load.
At a low baud rate, data exchange that is too fast can overflow the CAN Transmit Buffer (Depends also on
the bus-load of the CAN).
For Data Exchange Control flag, refer to Section 6.4
Bit 8
Bit 9
Reserved
Bit 10
CANopen®
CANopen® NMT Error Control failure has occurred.
NMT Error Control At least one of the assigned NMT slaves failed during NMT Error Control.
failure
For NMT Error Control failure, refer to Section 6.24
Bit 11
Baud rate change error has occurred.
Baud rate change
ON when an invalid baud rate is written to BFM #24. In this case, the BFM will keep its former value.
error
For the baud rate setting, refer to Section 6.7
Bit 12
Node address
change error
Node address change error has occurred.
ON when an invalid node address is written to BFM #27. In this case, the BFM will keep its former value.
For the node address setting, refer to Section 6.10
Bit 13
CANopen®
emergency
CANopen® emergency message was received from the assigned slave.
For the emergency message, refer to Section 6.23
Bit 14
This flag shows the CAN error active state/passive state*1.
OFF: Error active state
CAN reception error counter value is in the range of K0 to K127.
CAN error passive ON:
Error passive state
state
CAN reception error counter value is K128.
This bit will be reset automatically if the internal error counters return back to below K128.
For the CAN transmission error counter, refer to Section 6.13
For the CAN reception error counter, refer to Section 6.14
Bit 15
Layer 2 Message
specific error
*1.
Layer 2 Message specific error exists.
Check the Layer 2 Message specific error code in BFM #401 to #442.
For the Layer 2 Message specific error code, refer to Section 9.2
Any CANopen® node will check all CAN messages on the bus for errors. Depending on the error state,
the action that the node will take is different:
-
218
CANopen® modes:
In error active:
The node will actively mark the frame as invalid.
In error passive:
The node will not actively mark the frame as invalid to avoid bus disturbance if the node itself has an H/W problem.
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Warranty
Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be
the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be
repaired at no cost via the sales representative or
Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are
required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses
to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's
discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any
re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one
year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from
Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6)
months, and the longest gratis warranty term after
manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis
warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis
warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the
usage state, usage methods and usage
environment, etc., which follow the conditions and
precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual,
user's manual and caution labels on the product.
2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be
charged for in the following cases.
a) Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or
handling, carelessness or negligence by the user.
Failure caused by the user's hardware or software
design.
b) Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc.,
to the product by the user.
c) When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a
user's device, Failure that could have been
avoided if functions or structures, judged as
necessary in the legal safety measures the user's
device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
d) Failure that could have been avoided if
consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.)
designated in the instruction manual had been
correctly serviced or replaced.
e) Relay failure or output contact failure caused by
usage beyond the specified Life of contact
(cycles).
f) Failure caused by external irresistible forces such
as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning,
wind and water damage.
g) Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by
scientific technology standards at time of shipment
from Mitsubishi.
h) Any other failure found not to be the responsibility
of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the
user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of
production
1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for
seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with
Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available
after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local
overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary
loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not
be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss
in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user or third
person by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or
not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi products,
replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or
technical documents are subject to change without prior
notice.
6. Product application
1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic
controller, the usage conditions shall be that the
application will not lead to a major accident even if any
problem or fault should occur in the programmable
logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the
device for any problem or fault.
2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been
designed and manufactured for applications in general
industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public
could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
other power plants operated by respective power
companies, and applications in which a special quality
assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be
excluded from the programmable logic controller
applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property
that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft,
medical applications, incineration and fuel devices,
manned transportation, equipment for recreation and
amusement, and safety devices, shall also be
excluded from the programmable logic controller range
of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be
possible, providing the user consults their local
Mitsubishi representative outlining the special
requirements of the project, and providing that all
parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at the users discretion.
219
FX3U-CAN User's Manual
Revised History
Revised History
Date
Revision
Description
4/2012
A
First Edition
12/2013
B
• Software version 1.10 is supported.
- The following objects are added:
Index H100C, Index H100D, Index H1020, Index H102A
- The following Buffer memories are added:
BFM #70, BFM #71, BFM #10000 to 10319, BFM #11000 to #11319,
BFM #12000 to #12539, BFM #13000 to #13539
- Supports BFM #20 bit 8,9 and 12.
- The following error codes are added:
H3111, H3121, H8F01 to H8F7F
• Default value of communication parameter is added. [Section 5.6]
• Default value of mapping parameter is added.
• The explanation of Communication Profile Area is modified. [Section 5.6]
• The explanation of RPDO/TPDO is modified. [Subsection 5.6.5]
• The explanation of SYNC is modified. [Subsection 5.6.7]
• The explanation of Node guarding is modified. [Subsection 5.6.8]
• The explanation of Time is modified. [Subsection 5.6.10]
• The contents of protocol NMT is added. [Subsection 5.8.3]
• The contents of NMT slave identification is added. [Subsection 5.8.4]
• The explanation of NMT master startup is modified. [Subsection 5.8.5]
• The explanation of NMT slave startup is modified. [Subsection 5.8.6]
• The explanation of NMT slave assignment is modified. [Subsection 5.8.7]
• The contents of NMT Bootup / Error event handling is added. [Subsection 5.8.8]
• The explanation of Application Profile CiA® 417 V2.1 for Lift Control Systems is
modified. [Section 5.10]
• The explanation of Flying master is modified. [Subsection 5.8.11]
• The explanation of LSS is modified. [Subsection 5.8.12]
• The explanation of Configuration manager is modified. [Subsection 5.8.13]
• The explanation of Allocation of Buffer Memories is modified. [Chapter 6]
• The explanation of CANopen® 405 Mode is modified. [Chapter 7]
• The explanation of CANopen® 417 Mode is modified. [Chapter 8]
• The explanation of Pre-defined Layer 2 receive messages is modified.
[Subsection 9.3.2]
• The contents of CIF Multi SDO read access is added. [Subsection 10.2.2]
• The contents of CIF Multi SDO write access is added. [Subsection 10.2.4]
• The explanation of Send an Emergency Message is modified. [Section 10.5]
• The contents of PLC RUN/STOP is added. [Chapter 11]
• Partial correction
• Errors are corrected.
220
FX3U-CAN
USER'S MANUAL
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
HIMEJI WORKS: 840, CHIYODA CHO, HIMEJI, JAPAN
JY997D43301B
(MEE)
Effective Dec. 2013
Specifications are subject to change without notice.